Episode 236: 3 Types Of Content Companies Line Up To License – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

Episode Bonuses:

Free Webinar: How to License Your Content to Scale Your Business and Increase Profit

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for entrepreneurs who have an established method, framework or process and are ready to scale exponentially.

Summary:

People don’t talk about licensing. In fact, it’s a secret weapon that most companies don’t tap in to. However, licensing when done properly can be the catalyst to higher profit than you ever dreamed possible. And there’s no catch! In fact, the business model of licensing your content, course, or program is quite simple. This week we’re continuing our conversation about from episode #235 and talking about the types of content companies line up to license.
I’m also sharing behind the scenes details of how I’ve licensed my content, methods, frameworks and processes for over a decade. And you can too! 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know what makes your content valuable enough to be licensed
  2. Know how to license what you already have and not re-create the wheel
  3. Know how to decide if licensing is right for you

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

Episode 235: How To License Your Course, Content, or Program – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneurs Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Free Webinar: How to License Your Content to Scale Your Business and Increase Profit

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for established entrepreneurs who are interested in learning how to scale your business exponentially through licensing your content, course or program.

Summary:

If you’re an established entrepreneur with proven programs, courses, or content, and you’re looking to grow exponentially, then this episode is for you. By creating content to license you can demonstrate thought leadership in your space, increase credibility across your audience, expand your business to B2B or create a dual business model. 
 
This an intro to licensing for entrepreneurs who want to know how content licensing works, those who want to demonstrate thought leadership in your space through Licensing, those interested in transitioning from B2C to B2B in some capacity. This show will give you a good foundation and knowledge base to consider your options. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know what licensing is and how to make money doing it
  2. Know the business model of licensing and if it’s right for you
  3. Know the prerequisites to license your content

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach, and welcome to episode number 235. This one is really juicy. It is jam packed with the secrets to how I grew my first business consulting firm to over seven figures. So I’m super excited to share this with you and all of the resources that we have here available for you on the show can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com.

And this is episode number 235. Welcome to the suite life entrepreneur and business podcast. If you’re new, my name is April beach. I am the host here of this show. I am a business consultant and strategists that works with entrepreneurs and experts to design, launch, and scale. Your business in today’s episode is literally a secret weapon. If you are listening to this,

if you’re a regular subscriber or you just happened to land here, this is something that nobody’s talking about, and I’m so excited to share it with you on today’s show, we’re talking about how to license your content to scale your business and increase profit. And this particular episode is a best for you. It’s most appropriate for you. If you are in phases three,

four or five of my entrepreneur roadmap, what that means is that you have to be in a specific phase to be ready for this level of business scalability and this level of growth. And so if you’re in phases three, four or five, this is a great episode for you to listen to. If you don’t know what phase of business design growth scale and impact you are in,

please take a second pause here and cruise over to Sweetlife co.com forward slash quiz. And you can take a really short quiz and I’ll tell you exactly where you are in your business and what you should be working on right now. You can also text the word quiz to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. Okay. So here’s what we have in today’s show. It’s really great for those of you guys who are established entrepreneurs,

and you’re interested in learning how to scale your business exponentially through licensing your content course or program. If you have a proven program course or content, and you are looking to see even the greater impact that you can make, you’re trying to find even more ways to make more money into create the impact that you know, that your program can, then this episode is for you.

And so at the end of this episode, you are going to know what licensing is and how to make money doing it. You are going to know the business model of licensing and be able to have insight on whether or not this is even right for you. And you’re going to know the prerequisites that you need to have in place in order to license your content.

And there is a super special bonus with today’s episode. If you want to know more about this, you do not want to miss this bonus. I am giving you a completely free one hour licensing your content quick start video training, and you really don’t want to miss it. It’s one hour training on the quick start guide of how to prepare and license your content.

And you can find that totally free by visiting licensed to scale.com. It’s the word license, the number two, and then the word scale.com. And I’ll make sure that that is in the show notes for you. So that’s another resource for you to grab here at love, giving you guys awesome, very highly valuable stuff here for free that other businesses charge you thousands for.

So definitely go grab that. Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. This is episode number 235. And so all the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. Number 2 35 under podcast<inaudible>. So let’s start out by answering the question. What is licensing licensing is creating content for other companies to use. Think of it as renting your content,

renting your course, renting your program. So it’s creating content for other companies to use and they rent it from you and it’s called licensing so that they can grow faster or so that they can make more money or so that they can provide better services or training or support for their people, whoever their people happen to be. And now let me read you the legal definition of licensing,

but just so you know, I wanted to make sure I gave you the April entrepreneur, regular person’s definition of it too. So the legal definition of licensing is content licensing is a legal agreement between two parties known as a licensee and a license or licensees can purchase the rights to re-publish content from a license or licensing is extremely versatile and allows her brands to repackage content in a variety of forms across desktop and mobile platforms.

And that official definition came from news cred. So let’s go ahead and dive in a little bit more. You have a program where you have a course and you want to make more money. You want to go from what I call in our business, where we take our clients from scale to amplify, there is a difference between scaling your business and amplifying your business in this.

My friends is how you do it. So the benefits of licensing are really important to think about as you’re considering whether or not you want to license your program to other companies. Here are some of the benefits that you can flow through your mind. As I’m saying these to you and really hold each one up and see if it fits you right. The first one is,

if you want to demonstrate thought leadership in your space, if you want to become a thought leader in your particular niche, your particular area of expertise, then licensing is a benefit in that area. Number two, licensing increases credibility across your own audience. So even though you’re creating content, that’s used by other companies, when your audience knows that other companies are buying your content,

all of a sudden, they are really confident in your ability to get them direct results. Number three, licensing enables for what I call exponential scalability. So let’s talk about scale for a second scale. In most cases, as we talk about here on the podcast in most entrepreneurs and online businesses are familiar with it. In that case, we’re talking about taking a one-on-one service or a one-on-one program and turning it into one on group or creating different business models so that you can reach more people and increase your profit.

Usually in the same amount of time, scaling is a precursor to licensing licensing is where you still create that one piece of content, and then you’ve tested it in the scale capacity. And now you are willing to rent it or allow other companies to borrow it from you called licensing it for them to distribute. So we have gone from scaling you to literally exploding so fast,

your reach with your content through licensing. And then another benefit of licensing is for those of you, if you’re listening to this and you want to figure out how to go from B to C, so you have a consulting firm or a coaching firm, or you’re a speaker, an author, and you are used to serving one particular client that gets direct results from you.

And you want to transition. You want to start coaching other businesses. Licensing is also a really great benefit for you. So there are multiple benefits to licensing your content, if any of those fit into what aligns with your strategic objectives for your life in your brand. So really the question that we need to dive into here before I share anything else is,

is licensing right for you, but not only that are ready to license. I have so many people, literally we have a waiting list of entrepreneurs who really want to learn how to license their materials, but they aren’t ready yet. So let’s talk about what is the prerequisite for being able to join my masterclass called license to scale, to learn how to do this.

The prerequisite is that you have to have a proven course or program or content. That’s gotten people transformational results in the past. Okay? So this means if you have never created a course before, or if you do not have a membership community with curriculum, if you have not developed transformational curriculum or a transformational program, and you have not tested that you are not ready for licensing.

And so at this point in time, if that is you, of course, you’re welcome to sit here and hang out with me for the rest of this episode, but I would put it on pause because we have a program to teach you how to do that. It’s you can find that program by visiting signature offer.com. And so the process we take companies through is first we help businesses launch.

And then the second phase is scale where entrepreneurs join our transformational program, design masterclass. Again, you can find that@signatureoffer.com at this is where you are, and then you can go onto licensing your material. So the prerequisite is you have to have a proven program course or content. That’s gotten people results in the past. If you don’t have that, you’re not quite ready for that yet.

And that’s okay. This is a very Coopa. So to know what is the potential for you is in the future. So I’m going to give you guys a peek behind the scenes. I’m pulling back the curtains, and I’m going to share with you two case studies out of five different case days in which I have licensed my content for over 12 years,

because I want you to get your wheels spinning about what you have or what you can do with your business, all five case studies, and they’re all different. All five case studies are available by going to license to scale.com and joining that licensing 1 0 1 webinar. But I’m just for the sake of time and to get your wheels spinning, I’m going to share with you two here.

Okay. So the first case study I want to share is the fact that I had a collection of courses, a collection of online courses back in 2009, I’ve been doing all my courses before. They’re even a thing. If you listen to the show, you know that right? So I had a collection of eight full online courses, and there were eight different courses that were as for a very specific niche audience.

And they were totaled 198 slides, 13 hours of recorded classes. And they came with teacher guides and supplemental worksheets and even project plans. I licensed that collection of courses, and I have licensed these collection of eight courses that is currently still to this day, licensed in over 13 countries to other businesses. They included business coaching videos, swipe files, and we licensed it in different formats so that the business could use it.

And even co-branded. So that is case study number one. So I had a collection of courses that served a specific audience and people line up, people literally joined my waiting lists to license my courses. I only release them once a year in the month of November. And they join a waiting list to license my courses once a year. And I have been doing that since that beginning of 2009.

And so that’s one way. So if you have a collection, of course, it’s not just one course. Think about all of the material you have created all of the mini videos, all the things that you’ve done, that we can package together into a complete package. And I promise you when it’s done correctly, they will line up to license that from you.

And so I’ve done this for years and I’m still doing this today. So that’s case study number one and then case study number two is that I have a full coaching program that includes the courses, but it also includes consulting for corporations and content that that corporation can distribute to all of their people in this case, it’s a corporate program. And so they want to take my content and my courses and use my consulting.

And that’s another case study. And I first started doing this back in 2010. So these are two case studies. And again, I have five, some smaller ones for those of you guys that are just getting started and you can see all five by going to the license to scale.com and you can join that information webinar. So hopefully that gets your wheels spinning a little bit about what you already have.

We want to dive into your assets, dive into your method, dive into your process and what you’ve already created, and then have a conversation about who can this really benefit. So it’ll benefit your business and it’ll benefit their corporation and their company as well. The next thing I want to kind of transition here, because I know that for many of you,

this is a new conversation. This is a new topic is sharing with you that there are three primary ways to license your content. And each one of these ways is going to equal the branding in the future goals for you that you have for your company. So the first way you can license your content is straight as it is with your branding, your logo all over it.

So that would be somebody borrows or quote unquote licenses, rents your course, or your class. And they plug it into their LMS. They plug it into their system or wherever they’re distributing it, but it’s your logo all over it. That’s way. Number one way. Number two is co-branded where you allow your them to add their name and logo to it.

It could be co presented by co-branded by, and that’s a really great way for you to retain the ownership and the authority of that content, but also to really help your licensee level up as well. And then the third way you can license your content is completely white. Labeled white labeled is where nobody even knows it’s yours. Some operations expect that to happen.

So some companies will only license your content. If it’s completely white labeled some companies only want to license your content if it’s co-branded. And so every single one of the licensees has their own goals for licensing your content. Now let’s talk about for a second. What is really actually good for you? Those three levels. Number one straight as is, is your trademark number two co-branded or number three white labeled.

They follow the flow of the value, which means that someone will pay you less to take it straight as your own, a little bit more to co-brand it, and a little bit more to white label it, or in some cases there’s significantly more amount of money to let white label content, but let’s ask the really important question here is that right for you?

Is it right for you to have no stake? And for nobody to know that that was your genius and out of it, all the companies and all the entrepreneurs that I coach to license their courses and their content, very, very few of them go with the white label. Even though the end user, the licensee will pay all the tea in China,

is that really worth it to not get recognition or your brand. And so those are some things that I just want you to be thinking about. I know this isn’t yeah. Intro to licensing conversation. So I wanted to make sure that you knew about those three primary ways to license your content. So as you’re going through, as you’re thinking about what you have,

or that you can license, you’re also thinking about in what capacity that that could work best for you and what you want your branch to be 2, 6, 10 years down the road. And then the last question I want to answer for you today is who licenses your content? Who should you license it to? This is a very common question. I answer this in clubhouse rooms all the time.

And I get emails very often, especially when we’re leading up to opening up my license to scale masterclass. And people are saying, well, who, who wants this? Who do I sell it to? So let me give you two very clear examples of who should you license your light, your content to the first one is other companies who are not in direct competition with you,

but they serve the same audience and they want to look better or expand their reach, grow their list, increase their sales and save time. This second opportunity for an audience for you are companies that are exactly like yours, but they’re missing something they need. And they want your expert content. They want turnkey offers. So they want to be able to take your course and just plug it in to their system and sell it right away.

And they want to have faster instant results. So you can license your content to a company whose audience needs it. But the company is not in direct competition with you, or you can license your content to a company that is just like yours, but perhaps they don’t have as great of content as you do. Perhaps they need some more content to level up where they already have to shore up their offering and they need your help to do that.

So those are two general examples of audiences who you could consider licensing your content to. So today we’re talking about how to license your content to scale your business and increase profit. And I talked about a lot of things. We talked about, what is licensing? We talked about the benefits of licensing. We discussed whether or not you’re ready to license. I gave you two of five different case studies of when I have licensed my content and hopefully in doing so,

your wheels are spinning and you’re thinking about what you already have, that you can license or how you can package together content, courses, programs, your framework, your methodology, to license, to other people. We also talked about three primary ways to license your content. And we talked about who should you license your content to? So we discussed a lot,

but I’ll be really honest. This isn’t even the tip of the iceberg. I have so much more to share with you. So if you are interested in licensing your content or learning more about licensing your content, I highly recommend you join the licensing 1 0 1 training, and it’s totally free where I’m also going to give you a quick start guide to learn how to get your content licensed faster,

and to determine if it’s right for you. And you can grab that anytime by visiting license and then the number two, and then the word scale, S C a L e.com. Or of course, all of the show notes will be found in the episode show notes. This is episode number 235, and you can visit us@sweetlifeco.com click on the podcast. And this is number 235.

And just so you know, this is part one of a two part podcast episode I’m doing for you next week in episode number 236, I’m going to tell you the four types of content that companies line up to license. They will literally line up Fletcher list begging for you to license your content to them. And there’s four kinds of content that companies line up to license.

We’re talking about that next week on the show, that’s going to be episode number 236. So thank you so much for joining me. I am very excited to share this. This has been my secret weapon. Many of you might not know. I own two different business consulting firms. And this is how my first, very first business consulting firm really broke through that glass ceiling.

And I’m so excited to share this with you. It’s been kind of a secret. I’ve been holding in my pocket for quite a few years, and I’ve had the privilege of working with so many businesses one-on-one to do this, but we do have our license to scale masterclass, visit licensed to scale.com. If you are ready to take the steps and license your content to hit that amplify level in your business,

all right, you guys have an amazing night happy July, 2021. When I’m recording this, I hope you’re doing something super fun that you love that really fills you up. I’ll talk to you on another episode soon.

Episode 233: Create Videos People Watch, Engage With, and Buy From – with April Beach and McCall Jones

McCall Jones SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

GET THE ULTIMATE GUIDE TO ONLINE BUSINESS MODELS, OFFERS and LIFESTYLES

Who This Episode is Great For:

Experts who are ready to increase sales with video. 

Summary:

You’re an expert, and you’re pretty incredible at what you do, but sales from your online videos aren’t exactly reflecting just how amazing you are. This means there’s a disconnect between who you truly are and how you’re showing up on video. Or there could also be some bumpy roads between how you show compassion on video, establishing your authority, or entertaining viewers long enough to stay until the call to action. Does this sound like you? 
 
No worries my friend! McCall Jones, creator of Charisma Hacking, is here to break down her proven framework to “make strangers trust you and followers become aggressively devoted to you.” 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know the F.A.C.E. Framework and how to apply this to your videos
  2. See the formula to pin-point your own areas of improvement
  3. Solve the disconnect between the great videos you already make, and your lack of sales

Resources Mentioned:

 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach. Hey everybody. And welcome to episode number 200 in 33, we have a very special treat in store for you today. You’re Going to leave today’s episode with fully knowing how to look at your own videos,

how you’re showing up in video and edit and change anything so that you can create an, a crazy devotion to you where people love you and increase your sales. So we’re going to dive into all of that in just a second with our guest expert today, McCall Jones, before we get started, first of all, welcome if you’ve never listened to this show before I’m April beach,

founder of the Sweetlife company and host here at the sweet life entrepreneurial podcast. Thank you guys so much. I keep forgetting to share back with our audience. I’ve been trying to in the last couple of episodes that you guys have just voted me top 50 moms and podcasting, and I appreciate you so much that never would have happened without you turning in your votes and lifting this show up and lifting me up.

And I appreciate it so much. So I just want to say thank you to you guys. We’ve been producing this show for about four and a half years, and if you’ve been a faithful listener here on the show, you know that the Sweetlife entrepreneurial podcast gives you business trainings from the trenches proven business trainings from decades and decades of proven frameworks systems pass and coaching to bring your business to the next level.

We like to say that this is the podcast that other coaches would charge thousands for the information you hear on this show. And I just want to thank you so much personally, for being a listener. If you are not officially a subscribed yet, please click that subscribe button and take a screenshot and tag me in it. Take a screenshot tag at April beach life.

And so I can know you. I can know who’s listening, and then I want to follow you back and I want to follow your business back, and then we can keep supporting you back on Instagram. So I would love to do that for you as well as if you haven’t connected with us yet. Every single week we host a live Sweetlife entrepreneur pot house podcast room on clubhouse at 12 o’clock Eastern time on Wednesdays.

That is your time to come to me, come to our guests and ask your questions. We want to workshop with you based on the podcast trainings that we drop here on the show. So listen to the show as a drop some Monday, join us live in clubhouse on Wednesday at 12 o’clock Eastern time. And we’re there to workshop with you in order to find us on clubhouse.

All you need to do is search my name. You can search at April beach and then click follow up and click the bell little bell next to it, to turn on notifications. And you will actually also see a schedule of rooms that I’m hosting, and you can even RSVP for those rooms to get a notification on your own calendar, as well as we always post the clubhouse calendar every single week to my Instagram,

which is at April beach life. So lots of places for you to get connected and to get answers and to get support. We’re just not here talking to ourselves. Everything we do here is about giving you proven strategies and giving you support to take your business to the next level. And let’s go ahead and dive in and talk about what we’re talking about on this episode with our amazing,

amazing guests. So who this episode is for first of all, if you don’t know what stage of business you’re in, just stop for a second. We actually have a self-assessment you can take, you can go to sweet life co.com forward slash quiz, and you can take a self-assessment and you can find out exactly what stage or phase of business you’re in as composed as compared,

I should say to my lifestyle entrepreneur roadmap. And the reason why I say that is because every single one of our episodes here on the podcast are tagged to a stage of business, because I don’t want to just give you more content. We want to give you a transformation, but if you’re not ready for what we’re teaching you and talking about on today’s show,

based on where you are in business, then go pick another episode to listen to this. That is, that means that, you know, you, aren’t in alignment with where your business is growing right now. And we want to make sure that you continually stay in alignment. So I say all of that to say that this episode is for those of you who are in phases two,

three or four. So primarily you two and threes, but also some of you fours. So if you don’t know where you are, again, you can pause this and just open up a new window on your phone. Really quick, go to sweet life co.com forward slash quiz, or you can text the word quiz to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. And we will send you a link to take that,

to make sure that what you’re being taught, what we’re pouring out today aligns with something that is going to take your business to the next level, because you’re ready for it. Okay, let’s go ahead and dive in. This show is very important because you’re an expert and you’re probably really pretty incredible at what you do, but sales from your online videos.

Aren’t maybe re exactly reflecting how incredible you are, how great your services are. This means there’s a disconnect between who you are and how you’re showing up a video. Or there could be some bumpy roads between how you show compassion on video, establishing your authority, or maybe making your videos a little bit more entertaining. So that’s what we’re solving today on the show.

And my friend McCall Jones, creator of charisma hacking is here and she is breaking down her proven formula to solve these problems. So let me tell you whom a call is. She’s going to introduce herself a bit. So I’ll just read a little bit here to get you prepared. She’s a founder of charisma, hacky, and a set of business systems built from Hollywood tactics that make audiences notice you then obsess over you and then compulsively buy from you.

And she goes in and she’ll share her whole entertainment story on this show. It’s fascinating. And the connection between her background in entrepreneur growth is this perfect superpower that she has is there. You’re really gonna love today’s show the secrets of charisma hacking success is in its systems and how they adapt to each entrepreneur’s personalities. McCall says we’ve cracked the code on how any entrepreneur can amplify the best parts of themselves to build a rabid fan base,

regardless of whether they are as intense as Gary V nurturing his Bernay brown, energetic as Russell Bronson, or matter of fact is Dave Ramsey with charisma hacking clients have increased YouTube video watch times by up to 242% tripled their revenue, 20 X, their Facebook ad click-through rate, and more than anything else, finally, we’re able to connect with their audience and meaningful way and deliver their message in a way where they responded by being the best versions of themselves.

That’s everything you get today on the show. And it is a little bit longer than most of our episodes. So I just wanted to prepare you for that. You are going to want to stay till the end. I promise you, you are those of you go getters that never leave before the end. You guys are so rad. We love you,

but if you can’t stay too long, make sure you pause the episode and you come back to it. All right, let’s go ahead and dive in and all of the show notes and everything I mentioned previously, and everything that is going to be mentioned on the show can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode number 233. Let’s go Hey guys,

welcome to episode number 233 here on the sweet left entrepreneur and business podcast. And I am joined by my new good friend. I say new good friends because yes, of course, all my listeners are laughing and be like, oh yeah, I bet you met her on clubhouse. Yes, you’re right. I’ve met McAllen clubhouse. By the way, side note,

if you aren’t over there yet, you need to come over there and chat with us on clubhouse, because this is what it’s all about. Meeting amazing people that can pour into your business that can pour into my business and create these amazing dream teams, a business collaborations that bring us all to the next level. And I have had such a great time the last five months getting to know my friend McCall Jones.

And I’m so excited. She’s here on the show today. So I’m so proud of be April. Yeah, guys, you got to get over to clubhouse is the place to be. We’re just making all new friends kind of hang out with us. Kim, hang out with us with that being said, one of the things that we know about clubhouses is it’s a great place to establish your superpower,

your true superpower for how you get people results and your exact method and strategy. And you have risen to the top. It’s like the best rise to the top and clubhouse because of your very niche, amazingly charismatic, important like important superpower. So tell everybody who you are, what you do and how you got into doing what you do first. Let’s start there.

Yeah, of course. So I own a company called charisma hacking. So with charisma hacking, we work with coaches to solve two problems in their business. Number one, people aren’t watching my videos and number two, people are watching my videos, but they are not buying. So we tap into your specific personality to make sure that you are being yourself so that you get higher value customers that stay forever.

The way that I got into charisma have you, I’ll give you the short version. It’s a long story, but I grew up actually as a child performer. So I was performing in front of audiences of 25,000 when I was eight and 35,000 when I was 11. And I was performing on a very consistent basis, did a couple of movies in high school.

I was in high school musical two a, which was really fun. But the whole time I have this incredible performance anxiety, that was pretty crippling. All of my worth in my mind was wrapped up in the fact that I was a performer and I had this recurring nightmare. That one day I would wake up and not be able to sing, not be able to act,

not be able to perform and that nobody would love me anymore. And this nightmare started when I was a really little girl and it led me to, you know, long story short, it led me to creating these frameworks back then I called them checklists so that I could wake up and feel like I could teach myself how to do what I did the night before.

I also started paying attention to what audiences paid attention to and what they cheered for louder, things like that. It all started with Donnie. Ozmen, it’s a long story, but basically I was watching him perform. He saying right before me at the Steve young benefit retirement cruise. And when I was having this panic attack backstage, basically I saw the audience interact with him in a way that I had never seen before.

And I snuck over to the side of this room divider that they used as this backstage area. And I honestly got really envious and really jealous. And I thought to myself, I could do exactly what he’s doing. And I started to make a checklist of like, oh, what he’s doing with his hands, what he’s doing with his space, what he’s doing with his voice,

who is he pointing at? How is he walking on the stage? And I started to log these things into this checklist. And then I realized that these checklists were going to lower my anxiety considerably. And I just made checklist for everything. After that, I realized that it’s more of a science and it led to creating checklists for acting, for dance for all different types of audiences and sizes.

I used it for auditions. And then when I was 18, I was fired from an acting job for being too fat. They literally dismissed me from set because I had been wait between the audition and when we were actually filming, which it isn’t their right to do that. But it was very devastating to me. All of a sudden this fear of rejection became just rejection.

And in that moment I vowed to never get on camera. Again. I knew that I never wanted to do that again. I, I didn’t want to feel the way that I was feeling in that moment. So I didn’t, and I stayed low for a couple of years. Then the really depressing thing about that. I went into this very deep depression.

I had spent my whole life at this point, perfecting the art of being in front of people really perfecting it of, you know, all of these checklists of like, this works, this doesn’t in front of these audiences. You move this large and in front of these audiences, here’s what you’re supposed to do. And you know, an auditions. And then I wasn’t using the skills that I built over,

you know, my entire life. And within a couple of years I had somebody come to me and asked me if I would help then with an audition. And I said, yes, under very strict circumstances, because I didn’t want to be the reason they succeeded or failed. And I told her that I would help her as long as we did it before after video.

And if I could prove that I made a difference, then yes, we could do it again. I could take her money and we can move forward that way. And I just taught her some of the checklists that I had really never verbalized out or verbalized yet outside of, of my brain. And it worked in a very real way. The before after video was insane,

which led to my whole first business, which was helping entertainers basically be better in front of people. And then about a year and a half ago now I went to funnel hacking live, which is a big internet marketing convention. And I just went to see my sister-in-law speak. She was speaking. I knew it was big deal for her, but I knew nothing about the internet marketing world.

And as I looked around, I started taking notes of all these entrepreneurs that when they would come up to me, they would light up and share all of their solutions and the amazing things they were doing. And then we’d go five feet, you know, to the left or to the right. And they would be networking with other people and they would shut down and it would be a completely different person.

And then I’d see them filming things for ads or joint ventures or logs. And they were just not great. They were not themselves. And I realized that nobody would ever hear their solutions. Nobody would ever listened to them. People on stage that I was just like, oh my gosh, they just had these techniques. I could help them. And as I looked around,

I realized, you know, with entertainers my whole life, I had gone through, you know, the, that I’m going to change the world first as a performer was, I’m going to make people happy. Then as a coach of entertainers, I’m going to change the world by basically trying to help people be famous. And then as I sat there surrounded by people who had these incredible solutions that truly were going to change people’s lives.

I realized that my impact on the world could be infinite because theirs was, if I empowered them to make people, listen to them, basically. So Prisma hacking it’s been going really well. And it’s really fun. All of the techniques that we use, like I said, have been proven. I’ve used them since I was eight years old. I have hundreds of before after videos proving their effectiveness.

Yeah. That’s what brought us here. That’s I really, I don’t think I could do anything else. This is so much a part of my identity and everything that had been since I was a little girl. Wow. I have honestly, never heard that whole entire story. I never knew that that was your background actually in all the time we spent together on clubhouse.

It’s really interesting what you say. So I don’t know if you knew this, but my middle son is a professional hip hop dancer. And so we have lived in Los Angeles before COVID a week, a month. He was there working. And interestingly enough, since COVID, and since he’s kind of not currently dancing right now, but in some of them,

some of the, the wave that you were sharing, like about viewing yourself and how you show up. I see some of that. I’ve seen some of that in him and some of those same challenges actually. And so it is really, really fascinating to hear that. And just being like a mom in that industry, there is nothing like that industry.

And how cool is that that absolutely a completely, perfectly positioned you to help other kinds of stars, people that have amazing solutions for businesses, but actually utilize what you know, from the entertainment space, because it’s like, what does that reminded me of gladiator of Russell Crowe when he’s like, are you not entertained? You know what I mean? I just think that’s such an amazing story and absolutely you’re the perfect person to give this solution to people.

And you know, me being in the entrepreneur space, my whole life you’re right. I see so many people that have these amazing solutions, but yet it’s not getting out. There’s like a block of some kind and you have the gift to see that. So I’m so excited. You’re on the show today. We’re going to talk about your framework that you’ve developed,

literally, since you were eight, this genius started following your framework that people need. And when we give people frameworks to build their own genius within that’s when we truly created something, that’s amazing. That’s going to, like you said, your one framework impacts literally a magnitude and a multitude of people. Let’s talk about what does this look like? Like,

first of all, when people say, what is actual charisma hacking? Like what actually is the definition of charisma hacking? Let’s start there. Absolutely. So I defined charisma a little bit different and I will tell you why. The first thing that I feel like people define charisma as is like what the masses consider high energy. And they’re like, oh,

they can command a room because they’re this very specific personality type. I do not define charisma that way with all the research that I’ve done with all the clients that I’ve worked with. And with my own experience, I defined charisma as making strangers trust you and making those who know you aggressively devoted to you, that does not matter. And it’s not dependent on your personality type.

It only matters the level in which you communicate with people. So for me, you know, it’s exactly what you said with the entertainment industry. Everything is about rejection. You get so many more rejections than you actually get jobs, really. And you know, people who like you or dislike you and people are picking apart every single part of your personality.

And for me, you know, growing up a lot of times, people wanted me to be something different. And because I was an actress, I could do that. I had a very specific skillset that any time somebody didn’t like a very specific part of my personality, I would change. And a lot of times they wanted me to be sexier or I was called step Ferdie.

Once some people have told me that because I am bubbly, they thought I was stupid. Like, there’s so many different things that kind of built up this, what people want me to be, which I know a lot of times that’s how people define charisma. They say, what do people want me to be? What do they need me to be?

And I will be that when I started charisma hacking, you know, remember I made this vow to myself that I would never get on camera again. And at funnel hacking live, I had this really interesting experience where the whole first day that I was planning, you know, creating this new business model, I was trying to figure out a way for me to do it behind the scenes.

Cause without whole first business, I was, I was very much behind the scenes. I was pushing other people, you know, out in front of the spotlight on the stage on camera. I was the director, the producer, and I felt like I was happy and satisfied with that. So that’s what I tried to do the whole first day. I tried to figure out a way to not be on camera,

to not be the face of my business. And I very quickly realized that that was not possible if I wanted to make the impact that I wanted to. And there was a wonderful woman who spoke at funnel hacking librarians, Heather Quizzle, she’s a friend of ours now. And I went up to compliment her on her speech and she stopped me and said,

what do you do? And I tried on my new business title and my new business description. And she just told me it was like, she saw through me. She’s like, whatever you do, make sure the face of it, make sure that you are on every video, on every ad on everything. And it really struck me. I was like,

oh my gosh, I’m being seen. So when I got home, I had to make this promise to myself that I made all of my clients also promise themselves that they have to be themselves 100% of the time. They cannot try to think, Hey, if I’m going to be charismatic, I need to be whatever people want me to be. Whatever people think I should be,

whatever will attract the masses or satisfy the masses, whatever they will. Like. Instead we focus on this aggressive devote. And like I said before, that actually draws people to your specific personality. I will tell you, I am not for everyone. And a lot of people will tell you that, right? I am cooky and crazy and silly and all these.

And I wasn’t that for a really long time. And my greatest achievement, I believe with charisma hacking is building a business around actually who I am. Because every time people watch my videos, every time they move higher in my programs or up my value ladder, they only want to get to know me more or at the very bottom. They know if I’m not for them and they leave don’t waste any time,

I don’t spend any money marketing towards people who are not a good fit. So with this, when we put it okay, charisma hacking, right? We make people themselves and we make them not only themselves, but that version of themselves, that level of themselves is the very best person they can be in their business and for their clients. So when I said like,

I didn’t want to be the face of my company or led me to taking all of these amazing things, all of these things and really breaking down what was important, how do we make you yourself? Because the frightening thing is you absolutely can build an audience if you are not being yourself. And that should terrify you because all of a sudden you’re creating a new problem.

You are building an audience for a person who does not exist. If you create an alter ego and a character that you feel we’ll help you be less nervous and you just no put on your Sasha fierce face and you go on camera, you are building an audience for that person. They are investing in that version of you. That is not sustainable. You can build an audience that way,

but you will spend time and money acquiring an audience, acquiring a customer that is not a good fit for any of your higher programs, especially as a coach, because the closer they get to you, the more they will realize. First, you create distrust. You create a sense of discomfort because they realize you’re not the same person and they leave, right.

So instead we say, okay, you’re going to be the face of your company. You’re going to be the same 100% of the time so that we can create trust and we can make them aggressively devoted to you by being the face of your company. So I know we have a big face framework that we’re going to go through too, but that’s the core Prismic mapping.

And that’s a scary statement to hear for some of our listeners. And I am so glad that you said that the fact that you are literally building an audience around somebody that doesn’t exist, because it isn’t you and you aren’t showing up authentically to who you are and who you’re going to be after they buy you and, you know, refunds and, you know,

disgruntled people. I mean, that’s all part of what happens in that. And so it’s so important that you said what you said, but I also think it’s pretty sobering in the fact that you said it as clearly as you did. And so I also know that, you know, we have a lot of listeners and with the process of where they are in business,

when you are starting to launch, I actually think that in my experience, in coaching businesses, through the development and growth phase, the launch people, surprisingly, they, yes, they deal with kind of struggling with this so much. They actually are pretty good at being themselves. It’s after they start getting a little traction, I have seen them go to this next point of saying,

oh, but I’m not enough. Oh, now I need to become somebody different in order to actually keep getting a little bit more attraction. This is usually like in the first 18 months, sometimes I see that transition. And so I love that you said that because eventually that’s going to be a brick wall for them. And thank you so much for speaking the truth.

And that’s what we do here on this show. And I know our listeners really want and need to hear it. So let’s talk about this face framework. What is it, why do people need it, break it down for us? Absolutely. So with the space framework, what we are really assessing is two things. So it’s your personality style or type,

or your charisma style or type that’s one side of it. And the second side of it is the level, right? So the first thing that we establish is making sure that your personality type is right, or we can even say is true, right? And I’ll break down the different parts of your personality that we make sure that we assess the second part of that.

It never changes your personality or charisma type never changes, but the level does as you get more competent or more, you know, at an expert level on video, these very specific things are going to level up, but who you are and your personality type doesn’t change them up super important. So we go through F a C E so F is the floor,

or we can save a level. We can call it the Flavell level if you want. Right. And this is where we assess how competent you are or how effective you are at making sure these next three, the AC and E are the right type and what level they’re at. So Fs floor. So we’re going to assess the level a is authority.

C is and E is entertainment. So with all of our research that we’ve done, you know, not only over the last year and a half, but obviously for the last, you know, 20 years, I have found that you have to have these three things in order to fully connect with a human. Now everybody has them within their personality. So it’s really important that on-camera,

we make sure that all three of these things are present in very specific times. So authority makes people act, it makes people buy. And I’ll tell you how we measure that in just a second. Compassion makes people confess. It makes you safe. It makes them engage in the comments. And I’ll tell you how we measure that. And then entertainment makes people watch,

right? So with each one of these things, we have a way to measure, not how you are in person, right? What we’re saying is we have to make sure how you are in person when you are with your very favorite person in the world is the exact same person. We call this emotional accuracy as you are on camera. So we look at these very specific types of your personality or parts of your personality.

So authority would be like, when you’re in charge of something, when you are in your element, teaching something, how do you act when you are with your very favorite person? We have very specific ways. We measure that with compassion. It’s when you’re being empathetic with people, when you are counseling them, when they come to about hard things or when you’re being vulnerable,

how are you sounding? Right. Voice face, body language, right? How do you sound? How do you move? How do you speak when you are actually doing those things with your favorite person in real life? And that entertainment is when you are goofing off, when you are being lighthearted, all those different things. Now, each one of these things are going to look very different for different people.

Some people’s authority is based in strength and empowering, and it can even feel a little bit aggressive. Some people’s authority is very much based in patients and making sure that people know that they know what they’re talking about by being very patient with them, right? Compassion, same thing. Some people are like, Hey, I’m gonna kick you in the butt.

Like we got to go. This is how I’m being compassionate. And other people are deep listeners. And they want people to feel very seen entertainment. Some people are dry, some people are bubbly. Some people are, you know, the kid in the back, coroner making jokes under his breath, right? There are different types of all of these different things.

So making sure that you assess how you are when you’re with your very favorite person, once again, I’ll give you the ways to measure these. You say, how is my voice? Right? The most common thing that I see with my clients is when they’re on video with me and they’ll be like, oh my gosh, I’m so excited. This is so great.

And then they get on video when we’re filming now. Like I am so excited to be here. And I’m like, okay, well, if your voice like this, we’re actually excited. And then you sound like this. When you’re on camera, when you’re excited, it’s not emotionally accurate. Right? A lot of people say the word authentic. I don’t actually like to use the word authentic for this very specific reason.

I like systems. I like to measure. I like to be measurable and repeatable. And authenticity is just a little bit vague. Right? I know what they mean. And I, I think that that’s fantastic, but emotional accuracy with exactly what I just did with my voice, we can say, is it accurate? Or is it not? Is that actually how you sound move speed when you’re excited,

when you’re being compassionate, when you’re being authoritative or not. Right? So we dive into all these different things. So now with the level, so once we find the type, once we find your specific personality type, then we assess the level. And as you go up in level, you are able to retain attention more. Your watch times go up.

That’s the entertainment part. You are able to know pain points, objections, and get more comments and engagement because your compassion is higher and you are able to move people to action in very real ways, any call to action that you give them, whether it’s by opt in, watch the next video. If it’s in a course, it’s very effective. And people do what you basically tell them to do,

right? So we have your type and then we start moving up your level. So within the authority, I’ll give you this. And then I’ll tell you a quick story. So within authority, we have five different levels. Only the top three, make you any money. The bottom two do not. The very bottom level of authority is the level of authority where,

okay, have you guys ever watched somebody and thought they have no idea what they’re talking? Right? You watch them in your life, their stuff, or associate my business with them. It would do bad things to my business. It would not be a good idea, right? Yes. Bottom level of authority. The next level is the most interesting level because it still does not make you money,

but this person is very likable. You watch their stuff, you share their stuff. You like route them on from the side, but you would never pay them money if you will watch them. But you’re like, oh my gosh, they’re making their dreams come true. This is so great. I would never hire them as a coach, but I would totally,

you root for them, right? I’ll share their stuff. This is great, right? Still doesn’t make you money. You can be the most likable person in the world have the most views in the world. But if you’re missing that authority, you still aren’t making any money. The next level up from there is employee authority. What this means, we’re basically saying how much control will somebody give you of their business?

Right? So with employee authority, somebody would give you a checklist. They would feel, and a lot of coaching clients, guys, if you are a coach and you get clients that feel like they will give you the checklist of what you’re going to do, you have employee level authority. Even if you can get them to bring you money. At first,

it is not a good client for you, right? Because they feel if they gave you a checklist of exactly what to do, you would be competent to accomplish it. The next one is contractor level authority. This is the good, because of the glides who feel like every single thing you do is up for discussion and that they can decide which actions they want to take.

And not because with contractor level authority, they trust you in one very specific area, but they don’t trust you with steps. They don’t trust you with direction. These are things like funnel builders, where we say, okay, you know, I am in charge, but I trust that you have expertise in building this funnel. But every single thing we do is up for discussion.

And in the very top level of authority is coach level authority. When you get to this level of authority, not only will people pay you and see you as a coach, but when you get coaching clients, you have been given control. They do what you say. They trust your expertise in your area. It’s something where you can give them steps and direction.

And they are ideal clients. They pay you money. And then they thank you for taking their money because you have this level of authority. They don’t question that, which is really great. So with all these things, like I said, I have not said anything about some personality types have more authority than others, right? Every single personality type, regardless if you’re introverted,

extroverted, loud, quiet, whatever, right. Every single personality type goes through these levels. Right. And the way that we measure, if you’re being effective in this is do people move to action, right? Do they buy, or do they opt in or whatever your call to action is at the end of your video, if they don’t, you know,

your authority is probably down in the second from bottom level, right. They probably like you, if they’re engaging with you and be like, oh my gosh, I’m being myself. Right. But they do not see the authority enough to buy from you. Go ahead. Given you so much. So yes, obviously so much to say, I’m sure our listeners are like,

oh my gosh, okay. I’m like, I’m not taking notes by the way, side note, Macola and I are always co moderating clubhouse rooms. So just join us in a clubhouse room and, and McCall, and even expand on this for you personally as well. So this is really interesting as you were breaking it out. One of the things that I,

from like the offer development side of it that I see as I see like level three and four, for those businesses that do like the done for you or the done with you type services, which is interesting because some coaches obviously also have another separate of their division of their company that is like the build-out or, you know, whatever that is the done for you.

But one of the things that I coach my clients on is you’re not the person that does that. You’re the coach. Like you have to have a separate team to do that, that works with that client to actually implement that. That is a way to grow and scale your business. But I’ve never clearly, I like the way I’m communicating it has gotten through,

but the way you communicated, even now, I’ll be able to say yes, because that’s a different level of authority in taking your coach authority and bringing it back down to the contractor or that employee authority is actually reducing your expertise and bringing you down a scale after they have paid you top dollar or whatever it is that you do. And so, as you were saying,

all of that, that’s immediately. What I was thinking is these entrepreneurs that are listening to this show, small businesses that are listening to this show that have the coaching authority, but also this separate, oh, I’ll do it with you or I’ll do it for you after I coach you and strategize how to do that. It’s a great business model. It’s a great way to scale and grow your business.

Like we even have a separate design division of our company, but I don’t do it. And so it’s just really interesting that you were saying that. So getting back to these coaches though, what do they do? McCall, if they are like, oh my gosh, I think I’m at this. I’m looking at my notes here. And like millions of McCall notes behind the scenes and with a pencil because my children steal all my pens.

It’s all we have left in the house and you know, like, what is the deal? If they’re like, oh my gosh, I met this employee level. I’m not showing up with confidence. How do you get them from where they are now to that level five that I have the authority here. I know what I’m doing. You know, me,

I’m like, I have a framework. Everybody has to have their own framework or method. How do we help them? Absolutely. Such a good question. So the very first thing that everybody needs to do is they need to make sure that their type is correct. Right. So you can be very competent. And if you’re trying to, you know,

I don’t know how many of your listeners know who Garrett J white is, but if Garrett J white and Russell Brunson, right? These are two internet marketers in the online space. If Garrett J white and Russell Brunson, or let’s say Tony Robbins and Bernay brown, or Marie Forleo, if they tried to use the same tactics, they would work for one of them.

And they would not work for the other one of them because they’re very different people, right? So if you look at Marie Forleo, the way that she entertains is very authentic to her, right? He uses her voice kind of like this, and she’s kind of spilling all over the place with Bernay brown. If Bernay brown, tried would be Marie Forleo,

it would be a disaster. And Renee brown people would be like, I don’t buy it. I don’t buy, it would not only like lower her entertainment level, but it would also lower her authority level. Right? The first thing that people can sense is just a yes or a no, they just say is something off here, right? Is something off.

So the first thing that you want to make sure that you do is we’re going to find emotional accuracy in all three of these areas. I’m going to give you a very specific thing that you can do in order to do that. Because being emotionally accurate first, then you can actually be likable, right? As soon as you’re likable, we can start to increase your authority with very specific things as well.

So the first thing that you’re going to do, I’m going to tell you a very quick story. That’s going to make sense of how to do this. So we’re looking for emotional accuracy. So when I was a voice teacher, voice acting performance teacher, I had this wonderful nine-year-old student named Beck. He was incredible, was like a bounce off the wall,

kind of spastic kid who seriously, it was one of my very favorite humans ever. And I had taught him singing lessons, voice lessons for the last six months. But this was the first time he wanted to try acting. It was big audition coming up. It was this all male version of Annie, which was really interesting. And he had a three line audition.

He had a script that gave him three lines and a description of how to say it. And he memorized his script because he was a go getter. And remember, my whole first business was before or after videos. So he comes down to my studio and he’s all ready to go. And I’m taught him singing any hard to get him to stand still.

Right. And I read this description. I like, he hands me the script. I read this description. It just says very excited, basically excited out of his mind, there’s boats in the Harbor. He’s never seen boats and it’s, it’s supposed to be really exciting for him. And I was like, oh my gosh, he’s going to nail.

This is going to be thing. So I’m like, okay, back, we’re going to do your before video. Are you ready? He’s like, yeah, I’m totally ready. And you kind of see him, like looking off to the side to recall his script, that he’s memorized. These three lines. I was like, okay, ready? Action.

And he goes, the boats, mama, you were holding me up to see the boats. And they were right there. I was like, yeah. Okay, cut. Let me kind of like bounce around. He’s like how’d I do all day. Well, I was like this time. I just want you to be excited about the boat. Right.

We just need to be excited about the boats. Oh yeah. Okay. Okay. Okay. I’m like, okay, ready? Action. He’s like the boat’s mama. You were holding me up to see the boats and they were right there. I was like, okay, let’s try something different. So Becca wants you to tell me about your very favorite thing in the entire world.

My puppy snickerdoodle it was the best puppy in the world. When you tell her to sit, she sits. And when you tell her to stay, she stayed. I was like, okay, here’s what we’re going to do. I want you to talk about snickerdoodle. We want to be just as excited as we are when we talk about snickerdoodle. But instead of saying snickerdoodle we are going to talk about the boats.

You understand? He was like, oh yeah, totally. I was like, okay, ready? Action. Just like the bumps, mommy girl, you have to see the bumps. And I can see the bright there. And what I understood in this moment with this wonderful nine-year-old is he didn’t have any emotional context for his copy. He had memorized it,

which for a lot of people, if they have something memorized or scripted, they feel like they are doing it well, when instead that accuracy was not there, he knew need to have something in his life that was emotionally accurate for the emotion he was supposed to be on camera. And then he just had to make the match. Right? Coolest thing.

I’ve had people when I’ve done this in trainings before say, well, what if I’m not like that? What if I’m not bouncing off the walls? Right? What if my snickerdoodle story? Cause this is what we call them. Sounded like the boats, mama, you were holding me up to see the boats. I can see them right there. That’s perfect.

Right? Because then the way he talked about snickerdoodle will be, you know, my puppy snickerdoodle, Snickerdoodles coolest. As long as it’s emotionally accurate, it’s effective. Doesn’t matter what personality type. It just has to be accurate, has to be emotionally accurate. So with which one of these things we want to create or have snickerdoodle stories for authority, compassion,

and entertainment, right? These are going to be, our triggers are trigger snickerdoodle stories. So when you are authority, when you’re in charge, when you’re in your element at home, right. With your friends, when you’re giving advice and you’re making sure that they’re moving to act in the way that you tell them, right. As a parent, whatever,

as a teacher, right? In person, what are you like when you are doing these things? Things, how do you sound? Next voice was different. It was from the boats, mama snickerdoodle to the boats, mama. Right? Don’t let that happen. If it’s snickerdoodle, then it needs to be the boats. Right? How do you move when these things are happening?

What do you do with your arms? What do you, how do you speak if you use very formal language online, but you will never use that in person. It is not going to translate very well. Right? So you need snickerdoodle stories for all three of these things. Once you find your personality type, you also can start to charisma that other people who have the same personality type in one of these areas,

but a higher level than you, right? Easiest way to do this, find somebody who you feel you can. I can see yourself in and pay attention to how they communicate with people, pay attention to what’s effective, take notes, see what they’re doing with their voice, with their face, with their language body, right. You can say, oh,

I like this person. They are like me authoritatively, but there’s so much more effective. Okay. I’m going to, I’m going to charisma, hack those things. I’m going to write them down. And I’m gonna use that. If it’s somebody who has a different personality type than you, like I said, Renee brown can not be Marie Forleo. If they tried to be something different,

it would be a disaster. Right? So find your personality type. First with authority, we have content strategy and we have charisma strategy, right? Making sure that we have emotional accuracy. And second it’s making sure that you’re hitting very specific things in your content that lead them to buy before you ever to what all of my clients called the pitch transition.

If you’re doing it right there, shouldn’t be a transition, right? The entire time you’re pitching or telling a story, you’re establishing your authority in a very specific way so that people ask people, ask for your programs. So when you get to the call to action, it is so easy. All of a sudden they just buy. They just buy from you because you have highlighted their pain in very specific ways.

You’ve highlighted your solution in very specific ways, right? The way that you deliver it and the content that you bring to the table, the way that you structure your own frameworks that I know April has helped you with. Cause she’s a genius. That’s what I would say. That’s where I would start. Oh my gosh, the sneaker, everybody needs a,

here’s my notes. This is what I wrote down. That we all need a snicker doodle story for each one of these areas, authority, compassion, and entertainment. So, okay. Next question. So when we are speaking in authority, when we’re speaking in compassion, when we’re speaking with the entertainment component, I know it all comes together into one video.

What if those different stories bring up like another part of our personality? Does that make sense? Like what if like when you’re talking, like some of this is like, this is really serious and blah, blah, blah. But then it goes into my, but like, does that make sense? Am I making sense? Like if part of when somebody is on video,

if the flow of the stories brings them through experiencing multiple, I don’t want to say multiple personalities. Cause that’s not the right word, but multiple emotions from me or whoever’s making the video. What about that? Like we’re taking them through a wave of different types of experiences through that. Is that okay or not? Okay. So you’re a genius because that’s what we call emotional mapping.

That is 100% of thing that we do in everything. So with very short videos, usually you will have one snickerdoodle story, right? Very short videos. You have one emotional point that needs to get across. That is one, but with longer form content, right? We have what we call an emotional map with every single part of your speech, of your life,

of your webinar, of your ad, whatever it is, right. If it’s long form video, then you are going to map out the different emotions that people need to feel. And then if you have a script you’re going to color coordinate it, right? You’re going to color code it. If you have bullet points, you’ll color code those, right?

So you’ll have a color for entertainment. You’ll have a color for authority. You’ll have a color for compassion. Now, every single video doesn’t have to hit all three, but your audience has to see all three in order to fully connect with you. A lot of times, compassion isn’t introduced into every single video, right? Deep compassion, vulnerability. Sometimes you don’t see that in an ad,

right? You only see entertainment and you only see authority, right? A lot of times when we get to sales calls, because those are also on video, compassion is extra high. You need people to confess their pain to you in very specific ways. So that compassion piece needs to be higher. So as you map out your video and you map out these snickerdoodle stories,

you’re going to emotionally map it at which points do they need to make sure that they are feeling very specific things. Now, what I have my clients do is write out, post it notes and just stick them to your computer with those snickerdoodle story triggers in them. So when you get to those stories, you can look at your trigger and you can say,

oh right, that’s the emotionally accurate thing. The other thing I would say is before every single video, we call it a cold open versus a warm open. You have to make sure that you get into that snickerdoodle story that you get emotionally accurate before you ever push record. The analogy that I like to use is imagine you were an Olympic sprinter and you decided,

right. You’re like I got this or you were nervous and you had a 400 rates, right? Four times around the track. And you decided that because you got it or because you were nervous, you were not going to warm up. The first lap of your race would be your warmup, right? Either your warmup is chosen for you or you choose your warmup,

right? So you would hit your stride after that first lap, after you’ve warmed up. Same thing with video. So many people push record. And then they’re like, well, five minutes into the video, I really get to be myself or like eight minutes into the video. All of a sudden I hit my stride. It’s because you are not in an emotionally accurate place before you hit record.

Instead you push record. And then you’re like, hello everybody. I’m going to try to do this right. 30 to 45 seconds before your video starts, before you push record, before you start a clubhouse room, before you start your podcast, before you start whatever, speak out loud, your snickerdoodle story. But we turn it into an I M phrase,

if your snickerdoodle story is all about, okay. Yeah, my entertainment, oh, that is silly. Right? Then you say, I am silly. I am silly. Right? Whatever this snickerdoodle story puts you in the frame of mind to write voice-based body language, right? You say, I am silly. I am silly until you get to the point where it is emotionally accurate and say other things out loud as well.

If it’s authoritative and you’re like, I am empowering. I am empowering. So then when you start your video, you’re not like, hi guys, I’m here. You’re like, hi guys. I’m here. And here’s what I’m going to do. I’m an emotionally accurate person. Who’s being authoritative right now. Instead of having to warm up, having that time and losing people at the beginning of your videos.

So you have a snickerdoodle story for each one of them. You map out those points. If it’s a long form video. And before you ever start those videos, you warm up, you do a warm, open 30 to 45 seconds before you get in that emotionally accurate place that we practiced with those snickerdoodle stories. So that it’s effective from the time you push record.

Amazing. You guys, this is so much more McCall, just poured so much more into us. And we discussed before we started recording that she was going to talk about on this show. So as usual you have shown up and delivered and supported our listeners and you are freaking amazing. It’s just, it’s super unique in what you do. And I love that you have found your stride and your super power that is so different from everybody else’s out there.

And it’s such a pleasure to work with you and to know you and do fun collaboration stuff with you. It’s just, it’s just always a blast. And I appreciate you so much. So this is ton of great information, and I know our listeners are going to go and really start applying the actionable steps that we talked about here. But like we have tomorrow’s next level entrepreneurs to listen to this show.

People hone in here because they want to know that they’re getting trusted business advice, not just anything it’s really proven and trusted by us. And so we also have people that are action takers here, where they know if this is something that you guys know that you suck at this, that this is something that it is like, this has been it everywhere else in your business.

You might be nailing or maybe you’re even not there, but you keep trying and trying and trying. And there’s just something off about the way you’re showing up. Then I want them to make sure that you guys know how to connect with McCall. In addition to our clubhouse rooms, in addition to the places where I would highly, highly recommend that you follow McCall and clubhouse,

and that you do join our rooms, because we talk about these things, she’s goes in there and workshops it, all these things and helps. But like what would be the first step for somebody who is thinking, Hey, listen, I am really struggling with showing up authentically. I have tried. I want to be myself. I want to be true to myself.

It’s deep rooted. I really want to be what I know that I am to my people, but I can’t figure out how, how do they work with you to start going through that process? Yes. The first thing that I want to be very clear on is most of my clients. So yes, absolutely showing up authentically. We work on that,

but a lot of my clients feel like they rock on video, but their sales are not great. Right? They’re like, I am very likable. I am myself, but I am not selling right. Or they are rock stars. 90% of my clients speak in front of audiences of hundreds, of thousands of people in person. But for some reason can’t sell on video,

right. Something doesn’t translate. So the way that you guys can work with me. I know that April’s going to put all of the links in the show notes that you guys can check out all the things, but I felt like the very best thing that you can do. I have a free thing for you. It’s charisma vault.com on charisma vault.com. I break down five days a week on Facebook live,

and then I put them into this vault different personalities using my charisma hacking tactics. So you can see people of all different personalities, all different levels broken down using these tactics so that you can find those people who have the same type of different levels@charismavault.com. When you sign up, you get an email that literally says, be my friend. And if you want to work with me,

you book a call. When that comes through to be my friend and we can bond and you can hire me as a coach and do all the things you also will get the free thing. No, you signed up, you get access to every single episode. There was like 120 episodes in there separated by different people, different personality types, different video types,

whether you’re wanting to do ads, whether you’re wanting to do Facebook lives, YouTube webinars, live presentations on stage. Any of those things, they’re all broken into different categories and really, really easy to find. Wow. Thank you so much for sharing that. That is incredible. Charisma, vault.com. You guys. All right, Ms. McCall, we really appreciate you.

Thank you so much for your wisdom and pouring into our guests today on the show. Super pleasure. Hey guys, such a great episode. I love that McCall was here and she spent so much time with us today. Again, all the show notes and everything we talked about can be found by visiting sweet life co.com clicking on podcast. And this is episode number 233.

Thank you so much for hanging out with us. Please take a screenshot of this episode, tag me at April beach life and tag McCall Jones in it. And let us know your favorite part of this episode and how you’re going to apply her charisma hacking formula. I can tell you right now, I literally have two pages of notes from everything we talked about and I get to hang out with a McCall all the time.

And I learned so much on today’s show and I really trust that you did as well. Thank you so much for tuning in here on this sweet life entrepreneur podcast and sharing this episode with your friends. We really, really Appreciate you. You guys have an awesome week and I will talk to you again.

Episode 232: How To Plan Your Next Team Retreat – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

GET THE ULTIMATE GUIDE TO ONLINE BUSINESS MODELS, OFFERS and LIFESTYLES

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who want to have successful retreats. 

Summary:

So, you’re hosting a team retreat? Amazing! Team retreats are one of the best uses of our time and resources. Though I’ve hosted team retreats for decades, I’ve finally nailed a planning process that helps us actually accomplish the goals I set forth, in a way my team loves, that blows the ROI out of the water. 
 
This is a great episode if you’re looking for structure in your business retreats, but you’re equally focused on building up your team, accomplishing crazy big goals and having a lot of fun in the process. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Learn my pre-retreat planning process
  2. Know how I set my team up for success before, during and after our retreats
  3. Get excited about the power of breakout sessions and mini-masterminds amongst your team members

Resources Mentioned:

 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi, you guys. Welcome episode number 232 here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. I’m April beach host of this show and founder of the Sweetlife company and everything. We do everything you find here on the show are proven,

trusted business strategies to launch scale and amplify your online business for four and a half years and counting. And I’m so glad that you are here. Joining me today. Welcome to summer 2021. It is not kidding you a hundred degrees here in Colorado. It’s it’s what it’s been all week. So I hope wherever you are, you’re in a nice, cool place,

surrounded by water or doing something that you love as you’re listening to this show today, we are talking about a little bit behind the scenes. I’m actually opening up a little bit behind the scenes about our operations here at the Sweetlife company. And I’m sharing with you how I plan for our team retreats. As a matter of fact, as you’re growing your team,

if you haven’t yet started having team retreats. They’re one of the most powerful ways that I have found to not only grow our company and our footprint and the people that we impact, but grow those people who are part of our family, our company, family, and really elevate them into their purpose within our company. And if you listen to last week’s show with Tracy Lowe,

she was talking about how to get over the fear of hiring. And so I felt like this was a really good episode to continue on that journey. Last week, we talked about hiring this week. I’m talking to you about planning for this next team retreat, and we’re talking a physical retreat. And so welcome behind the scenes of the Sweetlife company, all of the show notes and everything that we’re talking about here can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com.

And this is episode number 232 in this show today, you can expect to hear the three steps that I plan before holding our team retreat. And some of the philosophies that I have about growing teams and getting work done during the retreat, both for me personally, and for my team. So thanks so much for joining me in, don’t forget to join me every single week at,

in clubhouse at 12 o’clock Eastern time for the clubhouse room, where we get to jam on this topic. And I get to know you more. If we are not connected yet on clubhouse, you can find me at April beach. Okay. Let’s dive into today’s show. Okay. Welcome to the scenes of the Sweetlife company. You guys, let me give you a little history about this company.

This is my second business consulting firm, and this company has really been active in motion for about a decade and in my first year consulting firm, which is still an active company, we used to have these huge, amazing retreats, and they were all centered around work and business. And we used to head to trade shows together in Vegas, and it was so much it’s fun.

It was life-changing. I know for the women who are part of that company, and for me, it was really important. And then we went through this lull here with the Sweetlife company where we really didn’t do any of them until fall of 2020. Yes. In the middle of a pandemic, we hosted our first in-person team retreat for the suite life company after eight years.

And it was the most powerful week that we had ever spent together as a team. So we have team members all across the world. We have a team member in the Philippines, in the UK. Okay. And over here in the United States and we don’t have a big team. There are only eight of us, but our core team, it’s really important that we’re together in that we’re lifting each other up.

And I’m a big advocate of doing that for my team members as a company, when we come together, the ideas that we have produce and the energy in this space, and frankly, the love and respect and admiration for each other, Heather just overflows my heart. And so it was, it’s a really powerful thing when we did this in October and I wanted to do it again as quickly as possible.

So the one I had to share with you a bit behind the scenes of how I plan for team retreats, and then also to share just recently here in Colorado, Kelly, who is the COO of our company was here and we had a mini retreat. So I want to share these tips with you and explain to you my process and the three areas that I plan for before I host team retreats,

whether you’re doing a whole entire team retreat or whether you’re hosting a retreat for just you and one other person, it doesn’t matter. As a matter of fact, as I’m saying this out loud, these three steps could totally work for your own solo two retreats. I’m also a big advocate of escaping by yourself for retreat, weekends, whether it’s a writing weekend or a creative weekend or learning weekend,

whatever that is. I’m a big advocate of that as well. So tonight I’m going to give you these three steps and share with you behind the scenes. How I do this in an effort to help you, if you’re planning for your next team retreat, or maybe you’ve just never thought about hosting an in-person retreat, here’s some steps that can help you help you make that time that you’ve invested in spending together even more productive and frankly so much more fun than you ever imagined.

So the very first thing I do when I am planning for a retreat is I set our primary objective for the time away. It’s not necessarily just to retreat to hang out which that is a great part of it, but these are working retreats. And so as a leader, it’s important for me to set the primary aim, where are we going? What are we focusing on?

What are the goals of this particular short period of time together? And if you’re like me, that means that you always think that you have more time than you actually do. If you schedule for a five day retreat, those five days are going to fly by and what feels like five hours. So it’s really important that you’re realistic with yourself in what you can accomplish.

And you set a primary aim for the company as a whole. And the things that you’d like to have clarity on the things that you’d like to have built or created, or those primary aim outcomes after you set that primary aim. My very next step that I do is I share that primary aim with my team members. And I say, this is what I want to have accomplished.

This is what I want the end result of this time together to be in. Then I ask each one of the team members to dive into each of their areas of expertise before they ever get there in think about how their part, their super power, which is one piece to our entire company puzzle comes together to form that complete picture of the primary aim,

objective that we want to accomplish in that retreat. So before we ever get to the retreat, I want them thinking about what things could get in the way of them being successful, what processes that we might need to discuss before they ever get there. So it’s not a problem so we can flow through and really get things done. So I want them to think about any blocks that are going to inhibit them from working through that primary objective.

And then the second thing is I really want them to think about what it is that they want to bring to the table. I want them to get excited about how their specific area of genius or management fits into the primary goals. And so their creative juices are flowing far before we ever get to this. So they can start doing research. They can start doing whatever they need to do.

And here’s the most important part to me is that they can feel ownership, that they know that they’re important, that their area of expertise is needed. That without their part, we can’t do it, that all, you know, the sum of all parts equals the whole. Those are the things that are incredibly important to me as a leader. And that is why I do this.

So first I set the primary aim and the objective, and I have to be really realistic. Again, the reminder on that one is if you’re like me and you think that you can accomplish so many things, scale it back because I’ve done that way too many times. And I ended up leaving feeling like, ah, I didn’t do enough, or I didn’t get enough done.

So set smaller primary aims or objectives, or very clearly just one primary aim or objective. And then you can always add on to that as you go through. And as you do an awesome job being efficient in your goals during your retreat time. But my recommendation is to set something that’s clear and a little less aggressive, but also something that’s going to definitely move the marker on your business and give your company a transformation.

And then the second thing is I do is I share that with my team and I asked them to start getting ready to contribute to this awesome main goal, get them really excited about it. How can you make this great? How can you bring more to this? What creative genius do you have or thought or training? Is there something that you need to train the rest of the team on your area of expertise,

as it relates to what we’re trying to accomplish together as a company, and when they bring these genius to the table, it will blow your mind as long as you are intentional. And you share this with them ahead of time and you ask them to start dreaming big and getting ready to present in their area of expertise. It is so powerful. And I’m so grateful personally to my team for always being so incredible about this and in teaching me and teaching all of us and contributing to the greater whole,

the sum of what we’re trying to accomplish together. And then the third step. The third thing that I do is I make sure that we have an, what I call an afterburn implementation plan. So after you leave, there’s a lot of work to be done. It’s oftentimes like going to a conference and leaving with a whole bunch of things. And so it’s really important that even before we get to the retreat that I build in implementation time for whatever it was we accomplished during that retreat.

And then my team does it as well. So we have afterburn meetings. We have the afterburn benchmarks based on the primary objective that we need to meet together collectively as a team and independently. And before we leave there every single person who is part of this retreat, whether they’ve joined us physically there, or some of our team members have to join virtual,

unfortunately not everybody can always make it, but every single one of them has their own afterburn implementation plan and really aggressive benchmarks in order to accomplish this company, aim this company objective from our retreat together. Now, here are a couple of things about that, that I want it, that I will also want to share. That is much more behind the scenes,

but this is real business. Oftentimes one of our team members can’t get something done without support. And so what we do is we pair up our team members. So team members that need help accomplishing things during the retreat time, they will go and they will have their own mini strategy sessions or their own mini, like scrum sessions to work on certain things because they can’t do it alone.

And frankly, the whole entire group, can’t always be working together as a whole entire group for the whole retreat. That’s unrealistic. So sharing with you a little bit behind the scenes, we break off into these little groups, almost like these mini masterminds to accomplish certain things. And last year in the retreat that we had, you would find that like two people would be working on something sometimes up until two and three o’clock in the morning.

Cause they were on fire and everybody else’s, you know, passed out asleep, totally exhausted. And then the next morning three other people would be outside, you know, having coffee right on the ocean, talking about another project. So when you structure your retreat like this, like I do, it’s really powerful because you’re creating an environment that honors genius,

that honors disruption, that honors collaboration and that honors thinking outside of the box and in, so doing, you are going to honor the people that you’ve brought together in your team and your company is going to be so overly, amazingly blessed like mine is when you structure it. Like this is a, let me give you a really quick recap about how I structure these team retreats.

And so that if you were thinking about hosting your next internal team retreat in person, hopefully these steps and these strategies can help you achieve amazing results like we do at our retreats as well. So first of all, again, set your primary objective and be very clear about it. Number two, make sure you’re communicating this primary objective to each one of your team members and giving them permission and encouragement and an opportunity to pre-work about their zone of genius and how their Joan of genius can contribute to this greater company.

Objective that is going to happen in this retreat or the bigger project you’re working on. But also having them think about what things could get in their way, either to strategy-wise or systematically before they ever get to their tree treats. So when you guys are there, you are hitting the ground running. And then the third thing I do is I have a very,

very clear afterburn plan all for the company as a whole and the benchmarks that we’re going to hit, but each individual who is there develops their own afterburn implementation plan, and they set their own realistic, but aggressive benchmarks to get things done. And then the overall culture just sharing behind the scenes of what we do here at the Sweetlife company is that we hire based on specific areas of expertise.

And so we honor those people who are part of our team and we honor their expertise. And so we elevate each person and I’m a believer that when each one of our team members can see and grow their future lifestyle, profit plan and wishes within this company, then it’s better for everybody. And so with that being said, I advocate for independent thought disruptive thought.

And I also advocate for mini mastermind in amongst my team members, because truly that is how we collaborate and get more things done. And I just wanted to share this quick episode with you. Some of these solo trainings I do here on the podcast in the summertime are a bit shorter intentionally because I want you to get great proven business strategies and information that you can take to the bank right away and get you back to the beach when dive in that ocean headfirst or climb that mountain or wherever you are faster.

So thank you so much for hanging out with me here on this wheat life podcast. This is episode number 232 and all of the show notes and everything we talked about can be visited, can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com, simply click on podcast and click on 2 32. And if you felt like this was a great episode and you took something valuable out of it,

I would love to hear from you. You can ping me on Instagram at April beach life, or take a screenshot of this episode and tag me in it. Or of course, connect with me on clubhouse. I’m happy to jam with you and talk about how to plan your next person, company retreat, any time important to you to make sure it’s really effective and efficient.

And you are truly leaving that retreat and everybody in your team is leaving that retreat, getting your company to the next level. Thank you so much for hanging out with me. Thank you for subscribing to the show. I appreciate you guys so much. Thank you. And I know I’ve said this a bunch of times in the last few episodes, but thank you again for the honor of naming me,

taught at the moms and podcasting. You guys are absolutely amazing. And I will talk to you next week here on the show with the one and only McCall Jones. And we are diving into all about charisma hacking. You are going to love her. If you don’t know this woman, yet you also, if you are doing video marketing, don’t want to miss me next week’s episode.

All right. You guys be awesome. And I’ll talk to you soon.

Episode 230: Simplified Systems To Scale – with April Beach and Brittany Keeling

Brittany Keeling SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join us live on Clubhouse to get your questions answered. 
June 2, 2021 12:00 ET

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who are ready to scale and grow, but lacking systems to make it happen. 

Summary:

It’s time to scale your business, and you know that systems and SOPs need to be in place. But, if you’re like me, the thought of sitting down and documenting your tasks sounds as fun as having teeth pulled. Thankfully Brittany Keeling, our guest expert, is sharing practical ways and clear, simple systems you can follow to start scaling now. 
 
In this show we’ll also cover the difference between a platform, a system and automation. These common terms are misunderstood but important to understand. Stick with us and join us live on Clubhouse to meet with Brittany personally and get your questions answered after listening to this show. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Brittany’s 5 Steps To Scale
  2. How to create SOPs without crying 
  3. The importance of choosing the right platform to make your business easier to manage

Resources Mentioned:

 
ClickUp (Brittany’s Affiliate Link)
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. We are so excited to dive in depth. So number 230 here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, and today’s guest is simplifying your systems and helping you put standard operating procedures in place so that you can scale your business.

And this is why this is incredibly important. We have so many companies that come to us and they want to launch courses and masterminds and memberships, and they want their suite of offers created. But oftentimes when we do a really good job launching scalable online programs, there are some systems that are missing in the backend. And when these systems in the backend are missing,

then what happens is a bottleneck. And you actually can’t even absorb all of the money and the clients and the hard work that you’ve gone into in order to actually launch and reap the benefits of the hard work. And so today on episode number 230, we’re diving in with Brittany Keeling, she’s the CEO of be elevated a business operations and launch expert. And she’s going to take you through the processes of how to really simplify your systems.

Now you’re going to laugh. I am being really transparent about how I hate creating SOP on this. So if you’re like me, you’re going to be able to relate real well to what Brittany’s saying. And we’re going to give you some amazing strategies to get through that today on this episode. So this is a great show for those of you guys who are in phases two through four of my Sweetlife business roadmap,

that’s the startup to scale up system that we’ve created. And in order to figure out what phase of business you’re in simply go to sweet life co.com board slash quiz, and you can take a very short self-assessment. So this episode, this business training that we’re talking about is specifically for those of you guys in phases, two, three or four of that business system.

What you can expect at the end of this is to first of all, know the most common standard rating standard operating procedures that should be in place for your business. You’re also going to get tips on software that can simplify your processes. And you’re going to know how to use the way that you work as a leader, as an entrepreneur, in order to put it into systems in a way that is actually going to happen for your business.

So I’m so excited to dive into all this. And of course, Brittany will be with us live on clubhouse, the Wednesday that this show drops. So if you are not a member or following the Sweetlife entrepreneurs club on clubhouse, please make sure you search us on clubhouse life. One word, just like this podcast. And you’re going to get access to that room where Brittany is going to be able to take your questions.

She’s amazing. And I’m guessing you’re going to want to have somebody like Brittany workshop with you, and that’s what the clubhouse is for. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show. All of the show knows everything we’re talking about can be found by visiting our website@sweetlifeco.com forward slash two three zero. Oh, wait. I lied about that. All of the show notes can be found by visiting sweet life coat.com

and then you got to click on podcast, but then it is episode two, three, zero. All right, you guys, I can’t wait to dive in with you. Let’s do it. All right. You guys welcome to episode number 230 here at this sweet life entrepreneur business podcast. I am joined by Brittany Keeling and yes, you’re probably getting entired me saying this.

I met Brittany on clubhouse, like all of our guests, like lately, all my new clubhouse friends and she is amazing. I was in a clubhouse room with Brittany and she said three words that I was like, oh my gosh, I need this woman to come and talk to us and really simplify and clarify these three terms. And you’re going to find out what they are here and just a little bit on the show,

but, you know, Brittany is a scaling with systems expert. And so that’s what we’re all about here on the show, giving you tools and strategies to move forward and scale your business. And so here we are, Brittany, thank you so much for joining us. Tell everybody a little bit about yourself and how you became such a systems ninja. Yeah,

I’m so excited to be here. So I have a really sort of unconventional background. A lot of people get into this space from, you know, they were in the corporate world and they decided to go off on their own. And I actually started my first business straight out of high school. So I was a serial entrepreneur for a few years, with a few various different businesses.

They were actually all online businesses as well. So been in the space a while and towards the end of 2018, I was feeling really burnt out with what I was doing. I wanted to change it. I just didn’t know what to do. And so I started asking people who knew me like, Hey, what do you think of when you think about me?

What am I good at? What are my strengths? Literally, everybody came back and was like, oh, you’re type a you’re detail oriented. You’re great at like being productive and helping people reach their goals. And I was like, okay, I can do something with this. So heading into 2019, I started trying to like make that shift. But right at that same time,

my dad who was a business owner actually passed away unexpectedly. And so I took over his company the day after he died. So yeah, I put my business hold and took over his company. I was 21 and it was a mess. He did not have. I mean, obviously I was grieving, but also he didn’t have anything documented. He did not have,

you know, a second in command. It was basically two months of me being on the phone all day, every day with clients saying, sorry, he’s not here anymore, but we’re still business as usual. It was very weird. But another thing that we ran into a lot was like the questions being asked and us not having answers. And that didn’t feel good for anyone.

Of course, we didn’t want to say, sorry, we don’t know the answer to that. But at the same time, my dad kept so much in his head, in his head and all over his desk. I mean, papers everywhere. So it was just really hard to try to run once he was gone. And thankfully we did end up selling that business four months later.

And at that time I had planned a move across the country for like a month later. And I was like, oh, I have now no income and no clients and no business, I should do something. So I relaunched my business and I went like full force headfirst into the deep end as an online business manager. And so at that time, this was like August of 2019.

And I just dove in, I invested in a mentor and I was like, you know, I’m just going to help other entrepreneurs create something that actually can outlive them. For me. It grew really quickly. I’ll give you the cliff notes version here, but essentially I created a bit of a monster that was doing for me the opposite of what I was trying to do for others.

And so I ended up restructuring a bit around this, actually around the same time, last year. So around like August, September of 2020, and now we work with clients in either one day or one week and we have a few signature offers, but we really essentially help them either get their systems in check, do like an overhaul, get them things simplified,

make it make sense for the long haul for them. Or we help them have a large-scale launch of a digital product or service in a short timeframe. We do like a seven day package for lunches or a one day for one week package for systems, depending on how robust it is. And clearly to have that done. We have to have a lot of really clear systems internally as well.

Yes you do. Oh my gosh. So first of all, congratulations on all your success. It’s so hard when you know you’re doing something well and all of a sudden it’s running your life. I love how you have modeled. We talk a lot about life, first business modeling here on this show, and I love how you’ve modeled your offer to actually deliver that time in life that you want.

Secondly, I’m so sorry about your dad. I lost my dad a couple of years ago and that is it just really hard still sometimes today I’ll like forget, and I’ll go to pick up a phone and call him and it’s just this weird thing or I’ll think, oh, I can’t wait to tell dad or whatever. And so I totally get that.

And I’m so sorry about that. Your dad also was a total entrepreneur like that entrepreneur brain, like the notes everywhere, papers everywhere. I’m literally not going to turn the camera. You guys, before this, behind the scenes, you were typing something out to think like that’s way out. I need to write in order to think and process in. But because of that,

then I have a million pieces of paper. And so your dad sounded like amazing man and very typical classic entrepreneur. And then the last thing, you know, I love how you have always been an entrepreneur out of high school. Like we have very similar stories. I absolutely love that. And so I’m just so glad that you were here on the show.

Now what you’re talking about from a business sense, first of all, it’s no surprise that you are so successful because what you need are what people need are the tactical things that you actually deliver. It’s the not sexy part that everybody desperately wants and needs. They’re the systems and that like the SOP and the client pipelines and the launch plans and the content plans and all those things.

So I’m so excited to talk about what we’re going to dive in today. And I know our listeners will be like, okay, bro, gen up so we can hear her talk. So, so like, so this is very exciting. And so I’m really, really excited about what you’re going to download for us today. So one of the things that we find as a company is a lot of companies come to us and they’re like,

oh, we’re so excited to scale with courses and offers. And all these things help us design them, but it’s like, let’s stop because they don’t have their systems and processes in place. Yet. I was actually in a clubhouse room last week when I was saying that to somebody and the woman ended up DME me on Instagram saying, so you said I shouldn’t do this yet until I have systems in place.

What are the exact systems? People don’t know, like you were saying before we started recording what they don’t know. So can we first for our listeners who might not be familiar with that, we first talk about what systems should you actually have in place before you start really scaling your business. Yeah, 100%. And I love that we’re talking about this because every business I’ve ever worked with that has overlooked these steps in the beginning has had to spend more time and more money and more energy backtracking to redo the things that were not done properly.

So my hope is that if you’re listening to this, you will not get in that position. It is never too late to start creating systems. And just like April said, it is not at face value, super sexy to talk about, but it is super sexy when you get weeks of your life back. So, yeah. So I have sort of a top five systems that I like to focus in on whenever talking about like getting started with systems,

mind you, there are a million systems in the world and I totally understand that, like can be really overwhelming. So I always just suggest starting with these five. And if I feel like too much, start with one, like just do one at a time because it’s going to be better than nothing. Okay. So let me make sure you guys heard this before.

She says this. When you walk away from this show commit to start with one, if this is an area you need to grow. So sometimes when we hear all five, it is overwhelming, but Brittany is going to download you on what they are. So I’m really excited about this. Okay. What are they? Yeah. So quick overview of the five systems I like to hone in on are a task management and project management system.

So this is where you can keep all of your ideas. So instead of having 12,000 places to look for things, it’s all in one place, an SOP standard operating procedure creation system. So you may or may not have heard of SOP before. And if you have heard of them, it may be in a corporate setting or it may just be like,

sure, I’ve heard of it, but I don’t know what to do with it. How do I create them? Having SOP are important, but you need actually know how to create them. So having a system for creating new SOP is on an ongoing basis is going to be huge. The third system is a content planning and repurposing system. Let’s be real,

pretty much all of us are marketing through social media. So we probably need to have a system there so that we’re not having to spend hours every single day typing up a last-minute caption just to get it off the door. Right then the fourth is a client management system. This one is huge, huge, huge, I’m such a huge fan of white glove experience and really kind of going above and beyond with the client experience because we want everyone in our sphere to feel really valued and a huge way you can do that is with your client management system.

And then the fifth and final is email marketing. And if you’re like, well, maybe I don’t have a list. This is fifth for a reason. It is very important of course, but you don’t have to start with this one if it’s not the easiest one for you to dive into, but we can keep it super simple. Maybe you have an automated welcome sequence or some sort of automated email marketing in place.

But even if you just have some sort of system for showing up regularly in your email marketing, like a task for yourself to write a new email once a month and send that out, it’s so much better than nothing, and you’re still going, nurturing your audience chat. Okay. So let me state those again for our listeners. And then we’re going to move on.

We’re going to dive into a couple of those today. So the five systems you recommend people have in place to start our task management, SLPs and a process for actually creating SOP and an SOP. If you’re listening in stands for standard operating procedures for any of you guys that didn’t know that number three is a system for content planning. Number four is the system for client management and number five,

it’s a system for email marketing. Is that right? That’s right. Okay. Let’s kind of pivot in. Let’s just focus in actually on those first two things tax management and SOP is here on this podcast. So when we’re talking about task management, there are so many things that businesses are doing on a regular basis. And oftentimes companies that are looking to scale,

you have just very few people doing all the things, talk to us about how you recommend and how you really kind of lasso all of these things that are happening in order to get them into one place. Yeah. So I think the biggest thing is like, you know, there are first of all, so many ideas in our brain at any given time.

And even if we just think about the ideas alone, not even the to-dos, it’s like you could have a million dollar idea, but if you write it on a sticky note and forget it exists, there goes your million dollars. Right? So I’m a huge advocate for getting things in one place. So initially, I mean, I would start with hunting down all the things you have all over the place.

If you’ve got just tasks and ideas and to do’s everywhere, get them all streamlined in one place from there, you can probably then start diving into breaking things into categories. And again, this can be really overwhelming. And like a lot of times people are like, well, I just have one big list. What do you mean I need categories, but we can structure things very strategically when we are intentional about it.

So if you zoom out of the day-to-day of your business and actually look at everything from a bird’s eye view and look at all of the tasks on your list, look at everything that’s popping up. Do you want assessment of what do I, and if I have team members, my team do on a daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, yearly, so on and so forth basis.

And what maybe aren’t we doing that needs to be done more regularly and even seeing like what tasks have popped up that are not recurring tasks, but you’re noticing them coming up more and more often that can really help guide you and figuring out what the departments of your business really are. So being able to identify it, doesn’t have to be like 18 departments.

You don’t have to have a whole marketing team to have a department for that. When I say departments, I’m really, especially for small business owners, mostly honing in on the fact that like, there really are still segments of our business, where if we were to scale to a much larger level, we’d likely be outsourcing those two different team members. Yeah.

And that’s usually where most of our listeners are. They’re like really ready to the point they want to scale. They have all these things that are happening. And many of them have even really started building their teams. But yet they’re not exactly sure. Also with that being said, many of our listeners are to this point where they also have a, just a ton of,

VA’s doing a couple little things for them at once. So as they’re listening to this, I’m guessing you’re the expert here in this process. You also really recommend that even all these little pieces, even if it’s somebody who’s only working a couple hours a month doing a task for you that you develop SOP for that as well. Correct. 100% a gauge that I like to use is like,

okay, if you were to take on 10 clients tomorrow, would you be ready? Yeah. My business mentor talking more says that all the time. He’s like, you know, it doesn’t matter if we get you all these clients in here, he’s like, you know, it can be like, it’s like a fire hose. If you do not have these systems in place,

like don’t go out and grow. Right. Oh, that’s so good. That is such a great analogy. Oh my gosh. So you’re just going to lose them. All right. And that’s why when companies come to us and they’re like, we want to develop our signature offer. We want our signature courses or masterminds. We’re like, okay, are you going to be able to handle it?

Because if you can’t then literally everything. That’s like an overflow out of the top and you know, let’s make sure your stuff is in place. And so I love this conversation we’re having. So in the process and behind the scenes, you were sharing how you guys go about doing this. You have a software that you love, and I’m just going to say out loud,

you know, Kelly Buckner, our director of operations for our company is going to geek out when she hears this episode. Because I think that what you’re talking about is like right along the lines of something that she would love to look into more. So talk to us about how you go about this process for people. And, and also, I mean, they are in a million different places.

All these things are in a million different places. Let’s talk about simplifying software for a minute. Yeah, absolutely. So a lot of entrepreneurs are, and you know, we’re in 18 different softwares when in reality there’s probably one or two that could replace the bulk of them. And I think, you know, at the end of the day, maybe you’re going to pay more for one software,

but then you’re going to be able to let go of three others. And it’s so worth it. Now, if you’re using six softwares and it’s like, you know, you don’t have any problems and it’s working well for you and future casting. You’re not going to have any problems. Great. If it’s not working or if it is working, you don’t need to necessarily change it.

But if you’re starting to grow and you’re ready to scale, and you’re like, you know what, being in all this software is just really not working for me. Then. I mean, something that my business does all the time is like helping businesses get streamlined into less software or at least suffer. That makes more sense for them. And so one of the things that we do is we utilize click up and this is where we use like our task management and our project management.

But also we use this as like the one-stop for the whole business. And we do this with our own business, as well as for our client’s businesses. Because if you’re listening, I can almost guarantee if you don’t have some sort of system in place, you’ve probably got your Google docs, a hundred different docs or folders in your drive. You’ve got your handwritten notes,

sticky notes, your whiteboard, your mirror, that you’re writing on your, your, everything, just everything notes on your phone. You’ve got your, your 18 journals on your desk. Like it’s just all over the place. And so being able to create an atmosphere where it doesn’t feel like, oh God, another place I have to look every day and instead positioning it in your mind.

And also in the way you structure it as the only place you need to go and look at things every day, it really is a game changer because instead of waking up, you know, three hours into your slumber, remembering that you forgot to do three tasks that are like really important, and now you’re going to be panicking about it. You can have one place to put them all as soon as they pop into your head and then literally forget about it.

Like you can just forget about it and come back to it later. Yeah. I love that. And that’s so important for entrepreneurs like me too. Not officially, but pretty officially have ADHD. And so this process of going through and understand like the tasks, changing task management, having things in one place is, is really, really, really important.

And another thing you said just triggered something that I like to tell businesses all the time. And this is what Brittany is talking about. This is why this is important. I like to say, you know, how would you carry your business today? If you were already a millionaire, you’d already have these systems in place, and you’re never going to be there until you have these systems in place.

This is the bottleneck. And this is so important. And you know, we’re not saying you have to use one software or another, like you can do it whatever way works for you. But the reality is, is simplified systems scale. They do simplified system scale. And so this is so incredibly important. Okay? So in this process you’re going through and people have all their ideas and they’re bringing their,

all their ideas together, taken all their sticky notes and their pieces of paper. And they’re getting it. Like you guys use click up for this. How do you recognize, are there like certain departments of a business that are standard or typical for, you know, service-based businesses and online entrepreneurs where you tend to group together type of department. So you sort of,

our listeners can kind of at least clarify their mind and start heading in one direction of how to organize their stuff. Yeah. Such good question. So some like standard departments that we like to utilize are like your headquarters, right? So for us, at least in here, we house various things like our capacity so that anyone on the team can come in and see what we’re working on.

Like what big package, but also what’s coming. We have like the next several months booked out and we can all see it and be prepared. And then also if I’m on a sales call, I know what’s available and what’s not I’m meeting notes, go in there, employee onboarding various things like that. Team resources go in there. So like SOP is our brand kit,

affiliate links, testimonials our team agreement. So we have like, all the team has come together and agree. Like this is our way of working so we can all reference that. And then another department is operations. So you’re going to have your recurring operations more than likely that may be broken down into various things like social media. So Instagram, Facebook,

LinkedIn, so on and so forth. Maybe your email marketing can go and hear your metrics management. So if you’re needing to check on your numbers weekly, the list, of course. Yeah. Right. I mean, I’m thinking in my mind, I’m like podcast processes, like for us, you know, podcast processes, you know, PR speaking,

client management. So as you guys are listening to Brittany talk, just think about like the grouping of repetitive tasks that you’re doing in your business and start to figure out what falls under each one. And then take an opportunity to understand that for each one of these, you need to develop these standard operating procedures, which brings me to the next question. So we hear this all the time and I’ll be really honest with you.

Especially somebody that’s like always in all directions. I own four companies. I have three kids. I’m always on an airplane somewhere when somebody tells me and it’s okay if you have to tell me this, but let’s just keep it real here. When somebody tells me that I have to sit down and document every single thing that I’m doing in some capacity or some way for like a week straight,

first of all, I’ve never, ever, ever done that. I can’t think of anything worse than doing that. And so what I ended up doing, and this is why, if you’ve also listened to the show before, I’m like not the best person to work for. I mean, I have an amazing team, thank God. But you know,

it, it’s kind of hard. So it literally, I’m not kidding. You it’s taken me 25 years to get through. And so when I go down and I document like an SOP, it is usually like in a scrub, like we’re working on a project like that day. That is my work I’m going to do. But going through my everyday,

you know, week just kind of documenting my time and managing my time and stuff. You couldn’t actually, I’m being so honest. You’re going to like school me here. Probably like you couldn’t pay me to do that for my own company. Like I am Wade. I’m like all off in a role. Is there any other way to do it? Yeah,

totally. Okay. Good. Cause that way sucks. Right? At the end of the day, it’s like we’re busy and the thought of creating a whole system and process and documenting the SOP, Internet’s going to take me three hours longer than if I would just do it all myself and then never outsource it. Right. Right. But of course in the long run,

we know that’s not true, but it doesn’t make it any to do in the moment. So I do have a philosophy that I like to follow a system. I like to follow with creating these because most business owners are very similar to you. Like I can’t say that I have a lot of fun sitting down and creating all of SOP for my business.

And so if you don’t like it, then that’s yeah. Then they really are tough work. Okay. Right. And any, you don’t have to do it alone. And it’s actually to be so much easier than we think. So here’s what I like to do. And here’s what I tell people to do. Start identifying what needs to be documented.

Right? So obviously your recurring tasks, easiest thing to start with, you know, it’s going to happen on a recurring basis. So start there. And once you’ve identified, this needs an SOP, take a loom screen recording. The next time you do the task, you can literally do the task, the exact same way you would without documenting anything,

but screen record it and talk through what you’re doing as you’re going. And then if you have a strategic and like, well put together template for the written SOP, you can then give the loom or whatever kind of screen recording. You utilize to another team member. You can give it to somebody else and they can build out the SOP, the written version.

They can include the video version in there. They can plug it into whatever. You know, if you’re using a task management software, get it in the right places, create templates within that. If you want, it can get really nice and crazy robust, but it doesn’t have to. And even better when you do it that way, you now have a video,

an audio with your video and a written. And so no matter what kind of way somebody learns on your team, you’re meeting them where they’re at. Okay. Thank you. So I do that. I do LUME recordings and then you’re like Dropbox fanatics, and then I’ll put it in Dropbox. But I really thought that I was like duck taping the process together.

And then, you know, we can get them transcribed through our Searchie and everything that we do. So thank you for saying that because I literally is like, this is just the way I work and it’s just the way it’s going to be. And this is the way I work and I just, I’m never going to change me. So I hope this works out for y’all,

which, which it has. I mean, I have an amazing team, but in the back of my mind, I’m always like, you suck at doing this because you’re not doing it the way it’s supposed to be, but I know I would never, ever like literally over my dead body, am I going to sit down and write down my steps that I am doing?

So, yay. I feel a little redeemed here on this show and then Kelly in the process, like she does this as well. And so like listening to the podcast, you guys all know like what we really like struggle with behind the scenes. We try to share it all with you. This is one of those things that I haven’t really liked so much.

Okay. So in that process, you know, documenting it in whatever way that works. I also do audio recordings on my phone. So I do audio as well too. And that has seemed to work, you know, to upload them for certain files as well for my team and our team Dropbox folder, I should say, hopefully that’s acceptable, but it does work.

Okay. So after somebody has, you know, really documented these processes, let’s go back and let’s kind of circle back and let’s talk about the importance of simplified software. Share with us more about click up, why you guys use that, why this is your chosen spot to do this in really why, of all the things out there, as, you know,

there’s a million there’s Monday and Salesforce and all these other things, like why is this your go-to? And so our listeners is, is there processing can think, oh, well maybe I should check that out. Yeah. Great question. So let’s tie it in with SOP is right. If you create a hundred SLPs and they’re sitting in a Google drive that nobody knows exists,

what’s the point, right? Versus if we can pull them in to a software, like click up, or if you’re using something else, you know, whatever you’re using, bring it into one place so that someone can super easily search the name of what they’re looking for, or go to the SOP folder or list and look through it, what they need to find.

And you can even from there, so like in click up, you can create like a template of tasks essentially. So you could also turn your SLPs into templates if it’s like things that need to be tasked out. So if you’re onboarding a new team member, for example, that can be a template. Every time you onboard a new team member, you duplicate the template,

you assign things out and boom, like you’re good to go. Okay. So this is making my mind totally gone in a different direction, which I won’t on this show, but I also teach entrepreneurs how to license and scale their content programs and systems. And every single one of them has a different place where they build those systems. And so what I’m hearing you say is it click up,

could possibly be a place for those of you guys that this is really advanced scaling. But those of you guys who are listening to this show who are licensing your courses, your content, you’re creating a certification program. All of these mixed level scaling could use a software like this to really streamline the distribution of your processes and templates a hundred percent. And you can even like,

you can like sell templates. You can share templates. I mean, you can do so much with it. And the reason that I really love click up above all the other platforms, I’ve, haven’t been in all of them, but I’ve been in many of them. And what I tend to find is kind of twofold. One click up is 10 steps ahead.

Of many of the other platforms, other platforms are coming out with a lot of the things click up has, but they’ve had it for months. So why not choose the software that is going to be 10 steps ahead. And two, it has a very, very, very customizable interface. The aesthetic of it. You can look at it in so many ways and customize fields and can do it everything in your own brand colors.

I mean, there’s so many ways to go about it. So I, I love it. I it’s just the, in my opinion, I clearly am a nerd about this platform, but I’m a huge fan. I’ve been in so many different ones and it just has proved to be the best and has the most robust options for what we need. Okay.

This is, I really love this episode. Thank you so much for everything you’re pouring into us. Okay. Before we wrap this up, I do have to say, I love the aesthetic side women entrepreneurs. We really like this side. Like, I really love the fact that I can change the picture on the back of my Trello board. I mean the stupid stuff like that makes me really happy.

So I love the fact that it does offer that option as well. And I appreciate you sharing this resource so much here. You guys, as you’re listening, we’ll make sure that we are going to share Brittany’s affiliate link to click up with you so you guys can go and play with it and try it out. There are three different words I would love for you to,

this is the circle back from the beginning, define for us as we close up this show. And I think that the clarity and the definition of each one of these, whether whoever’s listening is new or established is going to be very, very helpful. Can you please define the difference between a platform, a system and automation for any of our listeners that aren’t crystal clear on these saints?

Absolutely. And it’s really common to not be crystal clear on this because some of these buzz words right there, total buzzwords are used interchangeably when they shouldn’t be. And so it’s confusing for most people. And so what I have found is that if you’re not clear on what each of those are, it can be really difficult to know what you need or ask for help or find the right resources.

So I’m really passionate about helping find clarity throughout these. So let’s start from, you know, a platform. So a platform is like a click up, right? Click up is a platform. Or of course there are other platforms like, you know, later first scheduling on Instagram or depths auto active campaign. There’s so many, right, but having a platform does not mean you have a system.

It’s really how you utilize the platform that you can create systems within a platform being signed up on click up does not mean you have a system being signed up on any software does not necessarily mean you have a system. You can create systems within the platforms. Like we create systems all throughout clicker and they can go hand in hand, but they are different things.

So a system is something that can actually be documented, right? A system is something we can put into an SOP that we can duplicate and do over and over again. And then an automation of course, is something that is going to be automatic. But again, it’s different. Not all of your systems are going to be automated. Some of your systems are not going to be automated and that it can still be a system.

It doesn’t have to be automated to be a system and you can house. So an example here too, all three of these things can go hand in hand is within click up. There are automations. So you can have the platform I’m just using click up as an example here, you have to pay me to say this, but wish they were. So you could use click up as your platform.

You could house your content creation system in here, and you can have automations in here as well to move things accordingly. So they can all go hand in hand. They are very different things though. And so I think being able to define those is really, really helpful. And being able to talk about things. Yeah, I love it. I wrote down that quote,

having a platform does not mean you have a system. And I think that is so powerful and that’s really a great way to wrap up today’s show. Of course my like business coaching minus went crazy. Now I actually want you to reach out, to click up and have them sponsor a room on clubhouse in pay you to talk about it. Like, let’s get this right.

So click up, we’re going to tag you in this and you need to be, listen, you need to hit Brittany up, sponsor her clubhouse rooms because it’s, it’s good for everybody. So, all right, well, I just really appreciate your expertise so much. And we are going to be live in clubhouse on June. What did we say?

I think it was June the night at 12 o’clock Eastern time in the club that goes with this podcast. So this podcast club is called the sweet life entrepreneurs club. Search it up on clubhouse, hit me up, hit Brittany up, like send us a DM. If you want to know where the club is because Brittany sent me coming in live and we’re gonna be taking your questions from today’s show.

And this episode is going to drop on Monday. You have two days to listen to this and come in and let Brittany roll up her sleeves with you and help you guys get your SLPs and systems in place, you know, answering platform questions, whatever it is, we are here to serve and support you. Not just listen to this show, but to implement the show and put it into action.

So now you have a couple of, you have a resource as well, and I’m going to make sure all the things that we’re talking about here in the show notes for you guys. So what is a free resource you have for our listeners? Yes. I have a pretty doozy guide. It’s called five systems to take your business from scattered to scaling.

And it goes a little more in depth into all five of the systems we touched on at the beginning of this episode. And then also I actually include in the guide my own SOP templates. So there you go. Yeah. I’m so glad. Oh my gosh. An SOP template. Okay. So all of the show notes are going to be found@sweetlifeco.com like on the podcast.

And this is episode number 230, and everything’s going to be in there for you as well. But we want to see you guys in clubhouse, even you, Android users are getting invites now. So we want to see you guys in clubhouse. And if you need an invite, hit me up on Instagram. We have actually a lot of club invites they’re releasing to us.

So we’re excited. You can RSVP for this event and we’ll get you an invite to that, Brittany, thank you so much for your time. I’d love to everything we’ve talked about and clearly appreciate you confirm me. I’m not totally crazy about the way I’m supposed to be doing things and just really appreciate all your expertise, how clearly you explained things and those you guys who are listening,

please follow Brittany, pay her and follow and just thanking her for her expertise in Korean and tossed bang. It’s great. Thank you. I appreciate you. Thank you. Have a lot of fun.

Episode 229: Creating Your Strategic Financial Roadmap For Your Business – with April Beach and Arnesha Bobo

Arnesha Bobo SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Check out CFO for Women’s Small Business Resources

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for small business owners who are looking to scale but they’re missing the strategic foundational plan. 

Summary:

When it comes to entrepreneurship, people just start working. But, sooner or later when the time comes to scale, 60% of businesses realize they are missing a strategic financial plan and the foundations needed to move forward. Today’s guest expert Arnesha Bobo, Founder of CFOForWomen.com breaks down her Smart Financial Roadmap and the first 3 steps to building your strategic plan in detail. 
 
If you don’t know your numbers, don’t know how to analyze KPIs and you want your business to grow,  this is an ideal business coaching episode to get your foundation in place.  You’ll be surprised that the first steps actually have nothing to do with your numbers at all. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Have 3 clear steps to start creating a clear financial plan
  2. Understand how vision and core values must be part of your financial plan
  3. Be aware of the 4 numbers you should know every month in your company

Resources Mentioned:

 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate This week on episode number 229 of the suite life entrepreneur podcast. We are talking with Arnesha Bobo about how to create strategic financial plan for your business. Now, this episode is incredibly important because she actually says it’s 60% of businesses come to her.

 

Who’ve already been in business for an extended period of time and never have a strategic financial plan. So in this episode, Arnesha breaks down everything that you need to know, and the first three steps to create your strategic financial plan. So the reality is as entrepreneurs, we just kind of get in there and start doing the work, doing the business,

 

selling the service and miss a lot of foundational steps. But when it’s time to scale your business, or when it’s time to get funding, when it’s time to apply to be a member of, of some sort of a, a board or an organization, people are going to want to see your numbers and you need to see your numbers in order to continue to be profitable.

 

And then this is the episode where we dive in and help you really start building that out. And so that, you know, the process that you get to go through in order to fully take control of your numbers and your business. So let me give you an indication here of who this amazing woman is. First of all, yes, I met her on clubhouse.

 

I know don’t laugh at me. We are going to be going live in clubhouse on Wednesday that this show airs again. This is episode number 229, and that is going to be Wednesday, June 2nd, 2021, 12 o’clock Eastern time. Join us in clubhouse because what we’re talking about here, I understand that you might have some questions. So it’s really important that we are then taking this from just a podcast,

 

this one way conversation and giving you an opportunity to really workshop with our Neesha, to get your questions answered. And so Wednesday, June 2nd, join us at 12 o’clock Eastern. Let me give you an idea of who this amazing woman is. She tells her story. So I’m going to summarize this here, but our niche as a small business CFO in strategic planner,

 

she works with women, led organizations who are ready to gain visibility in their finances and build a smart growth strategy together with her clients. She focuses on three key areas, capital structure, profitability, and growth planning. She is absolutely amazing. I know that you’re going to love her. And I’m so excited to invite you to tune into this episode. Again,

 

as we always say, all the show notes can be found by going to Sweetlife co.com. This is episode number 229. So all these links, everything that we’re talking about here are going to be waiting for you on tap. And if you’re a new listener to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, thank you so much for coming. I’m April beach, founder of the suite life company.

 

And I am absolutely stoked to have an opportunity to welcome you on this show. This show we’ve been named top 50 moms in podcast, but the show isn’t just for moms, all of you are welcome here. And we deliver a business strategies and trainings that other coaches charge thousands for. As a matter of fact, this podcast is part of one of the giving missions of our company.

 

And we’re pouring into you week after week for four and a half years straight so that you know that you can take the business trainings and strategies that you hear here, here on here, here, here, here on this show, and truly implement them and take them to the bank. So thank you so much for tuning in. Thank you for being a subscriber of this show.

 

And I appreciate you so very much. Now let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. All right, friends. We are joined by my new clubhouse friend. Yes. I know another new amazing club friend that I have met. And so grateful for clubhouse are Nisha Bobo. And she is here because of the fact that she has been in clubhouse rooms with me,

 

literally drilling down on what women need to know about their money. She is absolutely amazing. She’s a CFO for women. I can’t wait for you to meet her. And today on the show, we’re talking about creating a strategic financial roadmap for your business. And our Nisha is going to walk you through the steps in order to do that. So, or Nisha,

 

thank you so much for coming to the show. Thank you for spending time with me here and all the time that we’ve spent together on clubhouse. And tell us a little bit about you and what you do. Yes, absolutely. I help women become better leaders in their business by improving their decision-making women are the fastest growing demographic of business owner. Yet they are the least paid.

 

They’re not growing in other industries. And most importantly, they’re not getting access to funding that they need to help either grow their business or expand in other markets. So I help women. We’re all things, money with all things, money. I love that. Okay. So reminds me. I was actually in a meeting a week ago with an author of a book it’s about the new entrepreneurship and he was talking about women and minorities and immigrants as well coming in,

 

and that they don’t have funding, but this gentleman who funds a lot of regular business was saying, they’re looking at ways to create new programs to do that. So just decide now, but it was very interesting to hear and just triggered me to say that because I do think that the funding hopefully is coming around, but like what we’re going to talk about today,

 

there’s a lot of things that every business owner needs to do to get their ducks in a row before anybody will even pay attention to fund them. And those are the things you’re going to share with us today, but tell us a little bit about you and you know, really how you got into this, why you started your company and your, your journey about getting yes,

 

absolutely. I have a 14 year corporate accounting career. So I’ve worked with very large companies. I’ve managed multi-billion dollar portfolios. And when I first started my company, I was at a nine to five or so I was a part-time entrepreneur, like many businesses starting out. So I would, you know, work my full time job, my nine to five.

 

And then I would go home and work on my business, five to nine, how I became a consultant. I actually work with the procurement department for some corporations. And if you are familiar with the procurement department, that’s the department you go through as a business owner to get corporate contracts. So you have to go through a procurement process, you have to register your company with them.

 

You have to submit financial information, you have to apply. And then you start bidding on different contracts that they have. So you can do this at a corporate level, government level, city, state, and federal, but I was at the corporate level and I noticed a lot of businesses did not qualify to do business with these corporations because their business head,

 

no proper foundation. So they were not set up correctly. They didn’t have access to financial information because they only met with their tax accountant once a year. So I found myself a lot of days working with business owners to set their foundation up just so they could do business with that corporation. I am not a gatekeeper. If there’s an opportunity for me to help you come on and come on,

 

but I want to make sure that everything is done correctly. So that’s how I started my business is helping other small businesses get into these corporations to do business with them. And then it started to grow from there. I later joined a national organization for women. It’s called<inaudible> the national association of women business owners. And I joined to become a better business owner because I had that corporate mindset and everything was structured,

 

but I wanted to learn how to be a business owner. So I joined this organization, you know, attended some events, was able to do a couple of reasons, patients or answer questions that event. And I caught the eye of the president at no idea that she had watched me or she, you know, I was on her radar. Well,

 

she asked me to join the board. And as I actually, yeah, I joined the board as a financial secretary. So I was responsible for doing all of the financial reporting for the organization at our chapter level. And I started working with a lot of female owned businesses. So that’s how I, you know, that’s why my core are women because I was able to help them birth.

 

And I’m a woman. I love women. I love to see women win mommies, aunties, everybody. I want all women to win because I coming from corporate America and just seeing the huge disparities between men and women, the earnings, all of that, I was like, oh no, any opportunity I can help women. I’m going to do that.

 

So that’s how I kind of got started. And I actually left the organization because relocated to Atlanta. So I’m in Atlanta, Georgia, the home of entrepreneurship. And I actually joined another business organization. It’s called the Atlanta black chambers. It’s a chamber dedicated to helping black businesses grow coffee. I have the executive director of course started. So, you know,

 

do a lot of great, amazing things. Patients with the chamber got into leadership. So I chaired a couple of committees. I co-chaired another counting the financial services committee at one event. One of my chamber members actually invited me to speak at an event because she was a program manager for a city accelerator. And I was able to get a contract with the city.

 

So I got my first contract sole source. I didn’t have to go through a bidding process. And that’s one of the longest standing contracts that I have. So now I teach a financial consulting to new and small businesses here. Wow. That is an amazing story. I mean, your story is just amazing. There’s so many things that people can take away from that story alone.

 

And I think that like, it is remarkable. You are clearly very good at what you do, but I love the part of it where you just did it and people recognized it because you did the work and people recognize you for just like being true, doing your skill, doing the work and connecting important into others. Yes. Thank you. If I was building a personal brand and didn’t know that I was building a personal brand.

 

Yeah. You had no idea. That is so amazing. That is so cool. Congratulations to you. And I hope our listeners are like, okay, like I can do this. Like there, isn’t always some big, huge, hidden strategy behind it. It’s just leading with what you know, doing good work and pouring into people and you get recognized and you get elevated.

 

You get brought up. Yes. We could just end the podcast. This is today’s lesson, boys and girls. Oh my gosh. Okay. So you currently teach businesses on a regular basis. How to get their financial Jackson row, how to get their foundation in place. You do it on clubhouse all the time. If you guys are not following our Nishawn clubhouse,

 

please make sure you do that. Is it our Nisha Bobo? Yes. We’ll make sure that’s in the show notes for you guys as well. Plus of course our Nisha is going to be going live with us in our suite life podcast, clubhouse room though, week this show drops and you get to connect with her even more directly and bring your business questions.

 

So that’s just a side note, those of our listeners that know that, and can’t wait to have this conversation in a live setting. So you can get a chance to really workshop with our listeners too. So what we’re talking about today is really creating a roadmap for your business. And you have a method, you have a way that you bring businesses through this and it’s so important.

 

And when you explained it to me, kind of behind the scenes, before we started recording, I was like, oh yeah. Oh yeah, that’s really, really good. So today you’re going to guide us through really the first three steps of that process of that business roadmap. So why don’t you go ahead and get us started here for those of our listeners.

 

You guys should have a pen and paper, please make sure you’re taking notes or if you’re driving or at the gym or wherever, you know, you can always come back and replay this. So what is the first thing businesses should do in order to really start creating a great foundation? Thank you. Yes. So the very first step is creating a solid foundation.

 

I work with hundreds of business owners a year and they, most of them just get into it. They just get into business. You just started doing it. There was no business plan. There was no page today. Your business is not registered. You don’t know which state you’re at should pay taxes. And like they’re all over the place. So I’m going to help you right now,

 

create a foundation, a solid foundation. You need a business plan or some type of strategic plan, right? We’re known in our industry for strategic planning. That’s our jam. We do strategic planning from the top to the bottom of your organization. I have a top down approach. You need a plan. The very first step of creating your foundation, whether you are a new business established business,

 

you’ve been in business 15 years, every single year, you should have a plan. And that plan should start with your vision. What is your vision for your company for this year short term and long term, right? Where do you want to grow this year? What do you want to accomplish this year? What do you want to improve this year?

 

What do you want to be this year? What is your vision? Create a vision and stick to it because you are the leader of your organization and your team is going to follow you in your leadership style. They need to understand your vision. They need to understand where you’re trying to go. I had a meeting this morning with my marketing strategies that I just hired.

 

And I sent her my strategic plan and she was like, oh my God, I’ve never had this happen before. Right. Never had a strategic plan. It lists our goals, our objectives, everything. I want her to have clear direction on what I need her to do for my company. I absolutely love that. Okay. I totally geek out on that whole entire thing.

 

As you know, like we do strategic planning when it comes to drill out Venus suite of offers. And we were talking about this behind the scenes too, but like the whole financial side of it is so big and there’s so much more of a process that people don’t even talk about. And I’m not an expert in that I don’t, you know, build out their,

 

their financial plans. And so that’s why, like, I’m just geeking out on the whole strategic plan thing. So let me ask you a question here. And this is, I think a lot of our listeners, we have businesses that are scaling, who are listeners. We have brand new businesses when we are talking about guilt or like, this is a problem.

 

Like when is it usually with, and sadly, this is the case. Although it shouldn’t be entrepreneurs, aren’t very proactive on the things that, you know, we really just don’t want to do that. Isn’t fun. It doesn’t feel like we’re creating anything. So obviously they need to do this in the very beginning. Every business should be doing this in the very beginning,

 

but honestly, how many businesses do you guys have coming at you that have been in business for a long time? And they don’t have any of this? I’ll say about 60% because, and the reason why they don’t have it in a place, like I said, when they start off, it just started doing business. There isn’t a roadmap in place.

 

You just started doing business because you are good at it. Or you don’t really think it through or plan it out. And typically when you start to hurt in business or something goes wrong or not making the money yourselves or not increasing in your conversion rates are low. There’s a problem somewhere. And you need to just pause, pause so we can figure out what’s not working where the issues are and create a plan to fix that issue or implement some type of solution that will fix that issue.

 

But if we don’t know what the problem, if you don’t have visibility on the problem, and you’re just trying to figure it out, that you’re going to continue to build yourself in a hole. So you need to just stop and figure out what’s going wrong. I’ll use myself as an example. I struggled with creating content because as an accountant, when I first started my business,

 

I sounded really technical. My language was very technical and my content was not combining. I hired a content strategist. I was like, because look, I have tried Facebook. I’ve tried Pinterest, I’ve tried this. I’ve tried that. And I’m just not seeing the conversions or the view. I’m making the money. That’s not the problem. It’s the view.

 

And she was like, oh, this is the issue. And this is the issue. But I had to hire an expert to tell me where the issue was. And I was like, oh, okay. So now we have a map in place. Now she’s like this. We start here to create this and you create this. And this builds on that.

 

And then boom, there’s that content static every over, like over the next, maybe seven days, I saw a drastic improvement on our views. I was like, okay, thank you. I love that. Okay. So you guys are listening. If you haven’t done this yet, like, don’t feel bad. Don’t feel guilty, but it’s probably time to stop.

 

If you don’t have this financial foundation as our Nisha is saying and place, all right. So after this strategic plan is created, what comes next? What’s step number two, that people should really start diving in to understanding. So step number one is creating the foundation, solidifying your vision. After you create your vision, you also need to create core values and smart goals.

 

Your core values. You know, this is how your compass is what your company believes in. This is what you support. And this is how you pretty much operate. We have six core values in our company, and I always work with a business to create them when we’re going through the strategic planning process. So step one, creating a foundation, eat a vision,

 

core values, and smart goals, right? And a lot of times with the goal planning every year, every January, we all get excited. We’re going to create these 15 goals and we want to achieve all these things. You have to structure your goals and organize them, right? You don’t need 10 goals. Maybe you just need three, three short term,

 

three long term. That’s six that’s enough for the last year, the entire year. So creating those goals is enough, right? So step one, foundation, step two. We’re going to get into business performance. You need to analyze and assess your business. So once we solidify your vision with your company, the next step is I’m going to do a full,

 

I’m going to analyze your business top to bottom. What’s not working in operations. What’s not working in finance. What’s not working with you. Hiring people. I’m looking for missing processes. Do you have a hiring process in place? Because if you don’t, you’re probably not compliant with the state you’re operating in, right? Do you have a business budget in place?

 

Do you understand how much money you’re projected to make? How much are predicted to spend and your contribution margins? Do you understand your profit margin? So we get into some KPI reporting. I’m a numbers person. So I’m going straight for processes and then numbers. So making sure you have bird’s eye view and business owners, they typically only want to know how much money they may,

 

how much is left over and how much they only taxes. There are so many other moving it’s telling me this. I’m fine. Just tell me the rest I’ll be on. I’ll be on a beach somewhere. Yeah. Just give me those three things and we’re good. Oh my gosh. Those three things are, there are still other factors that you need to understand total income,

 

right? What are your top revenue performing items? If you offer, if you have a full product landscape by April, you work with businesses to build out their product suite. So business owners need to know what are their top performing, you know, products or startups. Don’t just dump everything in sales, right? That you need to see everything listed out expenses.

 

What are your top expenses, right? How much of your expenses contribute to your labor? What are your labor margins? If you have a team, how much is your team costing you? Right. I know for a fact on a 70, 30, no product that I released is going to cost me more than 30% of their product so that I can remain 70% profitable.

 

That’s how we build our service landscape. I’m not reducing my total projected income or increasing additional costs. Say that again. That was so powerful. Can you say that again? Cause I want to make sure our listeners did not just pass that up. Okay. So listen to this financial structure for your products. Okay. So what is your, what is your,

 

when are your numbers right? 70 30. So that means out of a hundred percent, it only costs me 30% to produce my services so that I walk away 70% profitable. That’s a very small conversation around pricing, which that’s a whole different conversation, but you need to understand your profit margins going in. How much is it going to cost you to produce this product or service?

 

How profitable do you want to walk away be? So I know every time we create something, whether it’s a bootcamp, a group coaching program, authoring a book, whatever it is, we’re going to walk away. So many percent profitable. If I cannot do that, I need to restructure the cost. Amen. Yes. And this is a thing,

 

and I was actually speaking to a client about this this week. And we talk about it all the time. Like in your clubhouse rooms, I was in there and you were talking about this. The thing is, is that when we’re, most of our listeners obviously are online, businesses are offline going online. And so what I tend to see is that they purchase so much software and they have no idea how much money they’re spending on an ongoing basis as well,

 

and what they actually need to use to produce that particular offer or a product. And so this whole entire conversation is, is just so helpful. So thank you again for being here, talking my best today on the show. Okay. So know your numbers and like down and dirty, what are the numbers that people need to know? So knowing your total revenue,

 

knowing your total income, how much money did you make, even if you use a lot of payment gateways, like, Hey, Pao, Stripe, square, collectively, you need to know your total income, right? You need to know number two, your total expenses, how much money are you spending? Like you just mentioned, April people use all of these tools.

 

We downsized all the time. I have what’s called shared services. So if we are creating digital products or consulting services, I want to utilize the same system. So I can just do a percentage allocation across the board. I’m not going to implement a ton of systems because that affects my profit margin. So total expenses, total income, and your bottom line.

 

The difference between your total income and total revenue is your bottom line. Are you operating at a net loss or are you operating at a profit? You need to monitor that every single month because that’s going to affect you at tax time or when it’s time to seek capital when it’s time to grow. When it’s time to have the bit management conversation where you want to apply for funding,

 

you need to understand your bottom line and all the factors that positively or negatively impact your bottom line. Yes. And a lot of businesses right now have also spoken to clients about this. As far as that, the relief loan, like the COVID relief loan. Like if you don’t have these numbers and you don’t know if there’s been a loss or a decrease or whatever,

 

then you know, they aren’t there. Aren’t qualifying for some of this really powerful cash injection that they can get it. They weren’t in 2020, they can get into their business. So, so important. And then KPIs, can you really like dumb that down? Explain that. So people really understand how to look for this in their own business. Yes.

 

KPIs are key performance indicators. So these, there are ratios to help you analyze areas of your business. Like your have revenue KPIs, you have labor KPIs, you have production KPIs. So when I say KPIs like they’re in ratio form, so you’re just taking numbers and providing them over to percentages. My favorite is revenue growth. How is your revenue growing period to period when,

 

I mean, period, every single month is your revenue growing month, month, month, per quarter, or a month to a year. So how is your revenue growing while your a monthly recurring revenue, each department of your business is going to have their own KPIs? So you have financial KPIs, which I monitor. You have operational, you have logistics depending on the nature of your business,

 

traffic to conversion. So there are different types of numbers. It depends on your operations, you know, marketing, they’re going to look at visits to conversions or visits to sales, to figure out what’s working. What’s not working in this particular marketing strategy or marketing campaign. So just understanding how to analyze your revenue and your income, or all of your numbers for your business in a percentage capacity.

 

And don’t worry has a guide. We’re going to make sure that you have so that you can really start diving in this and make sure that you guys are taking action. As you know, here in the show, like we’re going to give you the step-by-steps business trainings here, things you can look for, but then, you know, it’s your job to go and implement this.

 

And so our Neesha has a guide. That’s going to really start walking you through that process. We’ll make sure that you have a link to download after we’re done chatting here. Okay. And then what is this third step that you recommend businesses go through? The third step is creating a long-term plan. So once you have you slip out of your foundation,

 

you’ve created a operational plan for the year. It’s time to think long-term and long-term in the, the mains of everything, right? Capital are you, do you have the right capital structure? Do you have the right money in place? You have access to excess capital like lines of credit and business credit. Are you able to grow that you have debt in place?

 

Are you able to properly manage your debt? One of my clients incurred a lot of debt over the last few years. So we put together a very aggressive bit management plan to reduce their bit because it was affecting her bottom line. So you had this heavy umbrella of debt over your business. And if you’re in the rat race every single day. So being able to create opportunities to reduce that debt without hurting,

 

you know, operations, too much team, your team and operations capacity planning, what is your team doing now? What can I do better in the future? And how long can they do it? Right. We have a lot of technology that’s coming down the pipeline. A lot of AI, what can be automated in your business for us? We actually started out as a bookkeeping firm.

 

So we started out providing bookkeeping services and we’re quickly able to scale up to CFO services because a lot of bookkeeping services offer automated bookkeeping. So we’re doing the day to day, that can be done automatically. You don’t have to pay a lot of money for that, but the strategy and the planning you’re going to spend money on because a computer can’t tell you that you have to have somebody to sit down and read through the numbers with you and read through your operations and fill in that.

 

So number three is definitely planning for the loan term. Wow. What a powerful thing. I mean, that must feel so good for businesses to have you go in there now probably virtually and be able to help them unpack what they want and hand them a strategic plan to get that. I mean, just like for a second, you guys listening, like imagine what that would feel like to you to have somebody like our Neesha come in there and unpack all of this for you and what you’d walk away with.

 

And no, I don’t get like commissioned for making sure. She’s just saying, you know, like imagine how much that would take off your plate of wondering what you’re missing. See, here’s the thing I find that most business owners worry so much about the things they don’t know that they’re missing. They don’t even know specifically what they’re worried about, but they know that they don’t know enough about certain things that they don’t know enough about.

 

And they know that they’re there in sometimes business owners, even clients of ours, who’ve been in business for years and years. It’s like, they’re waiting for the other shoe to drop. And that is no way to run a business, especially creating a business. That’s going to skill you into the future. So I love everything that you’re saying. And it’s so incredibly important that businesses go through this process.

 

And after they figure out their long-term plan, you guys are Nisha has a full guide. That’s going to go into detail, but just really, really like top level. What are the next couple steps that people go through in this process? The next step will be assessing your tech deck. So what is what tech interviews is using? You know, do you have outdated processes?

 

Do you have outdated systems? A lot of times we found that companies that have smaller team, they have a team size. That’s unnecessary because too many people are doing too many manual things. There’s no automation in place. There’s no, there aren’t any sequences set up to trigger this action. When you have poor outdated processes, you have unhappy employees, you have a lot of manual work.

 

That’s costing you a lot of billable hours for your company. And most importantly, you have people doing a job that could be automated. I was an unhappy employee in one of my corporate dives because the tech was just so old and it was so manual. And I was just, this is, I felt like I wasn’t living up to my potential because I was trying to figure out how to automate this process instead of doing the actual job.

 

And you don’t want unhappy employees, you want people that are happy to do the work for you to help you in your organization. And they can help take things to the next level. Asset protection is another one, making sure your intellectual property is protected. I just had a meeting with my attorney because we were talking about some programs I want to roll out.

 

And she was like, make sure you send the prelim over to me so I can look at it to make sure it’s part of our IP deck. So making sure that your IP is protected and then last but not least for my small businesses tax planning, please, please, please free tax plan. That’s why no longer a number is important. You should not wait until tax season to know your numbers,

 

especially in a year like this. When we had an administration shift, we are in a pandemic there a particular way. Things have to be calculated. Are you ahead of the game? Are you being reactive or are you being proactive? I would prefer for you to be proactive when it comes to the pre-tax planning phase. So those would be the remainder of the steps in the rule.

 

Wow. Okay. So today we talked about creating a strategic financial roadmap for businesses and you are the founder of CFO for women and everything was so informative today. You’re always just giving so much not, you know, we say that I’m also giving so much value. Well, yes, it was incredible value. But today I just appreciate you so much.

 

And you do this in clubhouse as well because you really, really dialed it down to the tactics. It’s not just all about idea or strategy or what needs to be done, but it’s going through the tactics. And so I appreciate your time so much on the show today and how can people find you? And we’re going to make sure the links to your download are in the show notes as well.

 

So if you’re driving, you can’t write this down. No worries guys, but how can people really connect with you more? Absolutely. You can always find us on Facebook, Instagram, and Twitter at CFL for women. Those are the handles for those three platforms and I’m on clubhouse ads. Our mission speaks up there every Monday at 3:00 PM. I am also there some Tuesday evenings hanging out with April,

 

but I’m always there. I’m just slide in my DMS. If you have any questions, I’ll make sure you get access to the right resource. If you are in the city of Atlanta and you are a new or established business, but you need some additional support, you can contact the urban league, the entrepreneurship center and register for one of our free accelerated programs.

 

This is about $20,000 worth of free training for you and your business. I am one of the coaches for their program. So please come out and receive the assistance. That’s why you can find me. Wow. Yeah. Luckily Blog that goes out every first, Monday of the month, it’s called your bottom line. So you can go to www.cfoforwomen.com and click on blog.

 

It’ll take you straight to our blog. So we upload a blog every single month to help you get access to resources and strategies for your amazing, amazing, thank you so much for being a guest on the show. And this is Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, episode number 229. So everything that our Nisha just said, and you weren’t able to jot that down will also be found@sweetlifeco.com

 

click on the podcast. And this is episode two 29, and don’t forget to join us. Live in clubhouse under the sweet left entrepreneur’s club on Wednesday, the week this show drops, I’m looking at my calendar right now. I think we said, that’s going to be June 2nd, Wednesday, June 2nd, at 12 o’clock Eastern time. And Arnesha and I are going to be in there taking this conversation a bit further and strategically there to make sure you guys are getting your questions answered.

 

So thank you so much for joining us Arnesha. I appreciate your time and expertise. Thank you so much for having me

Episode 227: How To Build or Join A Clubhouse Moderator Team – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Download the Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who want to understand how to use Clubhouse to grow your brand and business.

Summary:

On this week’s show we’re diving into how to grow on Clubhouse through Moderator Teams. Clubhouse is the ultimate collaboration platform. It’s a powerful place to build brand awareness (as we talked about last week) and generate revenue, but Clubhouse is unlike other platforms so how you approach your audience is through intention, giving and collaboration. This episode will show you how to get started. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know how to find your clients on clubhouse
  2. Know how to create collaborations on clubhouse
  3. Understand how to bring value to those you connect with and serve

Resources Mentioned:

 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate April beach here, founder of the suite led company and host here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. And this is yet another week of business training and coaching. You can take to the bank today. We are continuing our conversation,

 

actually, an ongoing conversation that we’ve been having about clubhouse. And I’ll be honest, about five minutes before I’m sitting down here to record this show for you. I was just in over my head with eighth grade science and trying to help my son with science and wow. I had no idea what I was doing. And so it really feels good to be able to come and record a podcast in an area where I do feel like I know exactly what I’m doing so I can pour into you.

 

It is very humbling having teenagers and you can’t do their math or their science. I’m just saying that for the record, just a little behind the scenes here in the beach house, or you, they use so much for tuning in this week. This again is episode number 227. And this is what you can expect from hanging out with here with me here on today’s show.

 

First of all, this is for those of you guys in every single stage of my suite life business roadmap. And that is phase one through five. If you don’t know, you can go take a very simple quiz right now by visiting Sweetlife co.com forward slash quiz and find out exactly what stage and phase of business you’re in and get a curated, customized checklist of exactly what you should be working on right now to get to the next level.

 

So this is for those of you in any phase, and I want to make sure that, you know, this is a good show for you to tune into it is for those of you who want to understand how to use clubhouse to grow your business and brand. Now on this week’s show, we’re diving into how to grow your clubhouse moderator team very specifically,

 

and talking about clubhouse in general, it’s truly the ultimate collaboration platform, and it’s a powerful place to build brand awareness. As we talked about a last week show. So tune in to episode number 226, if you haven’t listened to that one yet, and clubhouse is a really powerful place to generate revenue. And I also shared our stats and our numbers just within the first couple of weeks of participating on clubhouse in last week show.

 

But clubhouse is really not like any other social media platform out there. So I know that businesses are having trouble understanding really how to approach it, how to grow your audience. And so that is what we’re talking about on today’s show. At the end of this episode, you will know how to find your clients on clubhouse. You will understand and know how to create collaborations with other business and leaders on clubhouse.

 

And you will understand how to create a moderator team or join a moderator team, and really how to approach other people to create amazing collaborations that are good for you. Good for them, and good for the people who are in your room, listening and getting help from you. So if you’re ready for that, then we’re going to go ahead and dive in here.

 

And also, if you haven’t yet, please follow me on clubhouse in raise your hand, wave your hand and say, Hey, April, I’m a listener to your podcast. And I would love to welcome you on any of my stages. And of course, if you were not yet in our club, we actually have a couple of clubs. That first one is sweet life entrepreneurs.

 

You can just search sweet life entrepreneurs under clubs in clubhouse and join our club. That is an extension of what we talk about here on the podcast. So I would love to workshop with you and every single week at 12 o’clock Eastern time on Wednesday. So Wednesday 12 o’clock Eastern time, we host the sweet life podcast live room, and that is where we take your questions and workshop with you and give you extra support based on the podcast topic of the week.

 

So if you want more help and you have questions about how to join and build moderator teams, make sure you are joining me in clubhouse this week on Wednesday at 12 o’clock Eastern time. And I’ll be there waiting for you to support you in doing that. All right. Are you ready? Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show. All the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com

 

click on podcast. And this is episode number 227. I give a little bit of background information before we really dive into moderator teams. For those of you that are unfamiliar with actually how to use clubhouse. So, first of all, if you haven’t dove into clubhouse, or if you’ve been in there, talk to a lot of businesses that have tapped in there,

 

and they’re just like, I just really don’t see how to use it. Like I don’t get it, like just bunch of people talking to each other. So here are some foundational steps to get started. First of all, you want to curate the content that you see and clubhouse helps you to do that by selecting topics, you can go into clubhouse and you can select topics that interest you.

 

So that is step number one. If you have not done that, you can search clubhouse by topics and you can also search people and clubs by typing in certain key words. So if you are a speaking coach and you don’t how to use clubhouse yet, go ahead and type in public speaking or speaking trainings, and you’ll be able to join conversations on top of that.

 

You can also start following other people on clubhouse and clubhouse. We’ll give you some suggestions to do that. Now, once you get onto clubhouse, my first recommendation is just to start by observing, start by joining rooms, listening to rooms, listen to rooms of all kinds, not just in your area of business. Listen to how people, moderate rooms listen to the,

 

the culture that is being created in certain rooms in certain spaces and just chill and listen, you can take clubhouse with you on the go to the gym and the car, everybody multitasks on clubhouse. So first of all, step number one is curating the content you see, secondly, if you follow me and if you follow our clubs that like the Sweetlife life entrepreneur club or my second club called the wave makers club,

 

you’re going to be able to see who else is part of that club. It’s a, you’re going to be able to see a list of other like-minded people that’s already curated right there for you. So you could just simply go to sweet life entrepreneurs club and fall other members of the club. And that’s a really great way to get started. So step number one is curating the content you see,

 

start observing and follow people that have similar interests to you or serve a similar audience. Step number two is really connecting follow people. You want to connect more with off of clubhouse and on to Instagram. And this is something that I talked about last week, more in depth about taking your clients off of clubhouse. And so I’m not going to go in depth right now,

 

but I just want to share with you how this works in a really great way. So when you’re connected with somebody and you’re listening to them, speak on clubhouse, or you’re looking at their profile, they should have a link to their Instagram account. Some people use Twitter, but most people use Instagram. And so you can tap on that and you’ll still stay in clubhouse,

 

but your phone will open up another window, opening up Instagram directly to that person’s profile. And so if you heard somebody that said something that just really moved you, or if it’s somebody that you roll and want to connect with more, go ahead and follow them on Instagram, make a few comments on some of their posts and send them a direct message and say something to the effect of like,

 

I’ve heard John clubhouse. And I like what you said about XYZ. So start building relationships and start building great collaborations and friendships and, you know, really start complimenting and connecting with people. Just be really specific. I get so many messages on clubhouse. Some of them are just like, Hey bro, I saw you in clubhouse, which I love getting those,

 

but the best ones that I really stop and I’m able to respond to is when somebody says, Hey, April, I heard you on clubhouse today talking about this. And I just wanted to say that that helped me so much. Those are the messages where then I’ll respond back and I’ll be like, okay, great. I’m so glad that helped. Why,

 

how did that help? Why did that help? And then I can build more of a relationship. So, you know, try to be specific about the messages you’re sending to people in Instagram, from clubhouse. So this is just some foundational information about relationship building and how clubhouse works. Now, seven number three. First, I want to talk about joining other moderator teams.

 

Okay. So if you see a room and you go to a room and you just really love this room, you’ll start to notice it. Usually some of the same people are moderating again and again, you’ll start to recognize faces. And so those are what we call moderator teams. You’ll also see the way that teams work together. Whereas some of the hosts may leave for a period of time and they’ll really intentionally say,

 

Hey, listen, you know, Lindsey’s going to take over or Sarah is gonna take over. And so the moderator teams that are good moderator teams do a good job, communicating the fact that they are a team. And so when you’re in rooms and you see rooms that you want to be part of and you’re thinking, wow, I really could lend a lot of value to this.

 

Then talk about the opportunity of joining their moderator team. And here are my tips to do that. First of all, all of the hosts and all of the moderators, be respectful, follow the hosts and the moderators of the rooms that you want to speak up and raise your hand in. And just really a big advocate for that, that if you were going into a room and contributing in somebody else’s space,

 

that you should be following the host or the moderators that you know, at least those that you want to connect with, and those that invited you up on stage to speak. So that’s really step number one, step number two is follow their club. Make sure you are following the club of the moderator teams that you want to join or be a part of,

 

and then raise your hand to speak. Okay, here’s something I want to say about this. Don’t just join a room immediately, raise your hand to speak. Just like chill for a sec. Like feel the vibe in the room, listen to the conversation that’s already happening. Cause as soon as you’re brought up in stage rooms, run where you’ll either sit there for a really long time before you have an opportunity to speak,

 

or you could be brought up on stage and just be like fun right then. And somebody is expecting you to speak. So you really don’t want to be in a position where you come in a room, raise your hand to speak. And you’re like, Oh shit. Like what are we talking about? That’s really, really disrespectful. So just stay there for a minute,

 

get the vibe of the room and make sure that you can in fact lend some value to that room. Or if you have a question, please do not hesitate to raise your hand, clubhouses the place to ask questions. I know that there are some rooms that are really intimidating to ask questions for, or ask questions in. And I just want to encourage you to be bold,

 

speak up and ask what you want to ask. I also want to let you know that all of the rooms hosted under my clubs are really safe, great places to speak. Our moderator teams are amazing, and we really want you to always come into our clubs and raise your hand and ask any question that really applies to what we’re speaking about or how we can serve you.

 

Just a little side note. There, there are amazing clubs that have amazing welcoming moderator teams, obviously in addition to mine. But I do understand that sometimes it can be a little intimidating. So step number three, and talking about joining other moderator teams is raise your hand and ask to speak and add value to that room without selling. So if somebody is talking about a topic that is perhaps in your area of expertise or paired with collaborates well with your area of expertise and you want to lend to it,

 

raise your hand, ask to go up on stage when you’re invited to go up on stage, ask if you can contribute some value to the room. So first of all, you want to, you want to ask and be respectful for the moderators and just say, is it okay if I contribute some value based on a question perhaps somebody else had and don’t dine in dash,

 

okay. I called this like dining in dashi. Okay. When you go into a room and you’re up on stage, especially if it is a room comprised of moderators, and you’re really interested in joining their moderator team, stay there, like be present, show your commitment to the room and respect for the conversation and for those hosting that room. And of course for those people that are being served in that space.

 

So if you’re really trying to join a moderator team, I highly recommend that you intentionally be there. Like I say this all the time to my kids. And sometimes my students might business. Students is like this term be here. Now there’s a lot of multitasking. Like I just mentioned happening on clubhouse. You can be at the gym, you can be driving a car.

 

Most of us are, but still be mindful and present to the room that you’re in to be respectful of that space in stay, be present, continue to land value if you’re invited to do so and just stay as long as you are allowed to stay showing your commitment to that space and always lending with value, never leading with selling. You say that again,

 

always lending value, never leading with selling. In fact, when you’re joining a room where it’s another moderator team, you should never come up and pitch your own stuff. Period. You should only be lending value to that space unless somebody says to you, Hey, would you like to tell us what you do? You know, really who you serve and what programs are or what services you have available right now.

 

I mean, this is common sense. I think it’s common sense. You guys, you would be blown away by how many people, this actually is not common sense for, but be respectful. That’s all I’m saying is just chill. Be present, be supportive and be respectful. And then what you’re going to do is make sure you’re following all the moderators and the hosts in that room and ping the moderators off the platform and on Instagram and ask them,

 

compliment them, say, Hey, I love your rooms. I come every single week. You know, I’m showing up here consistently. I would love to add value. This is my areas of expertise or these are my superpowers. If you believe I add or could add value to your room, would you please consider allowing me to join your moderator team?

 

It just a very respectful, but it is important to ask because clubhouse is a busy place. And if you don’t ask for what you need, it’s going to be hard to get it. And so be bold, be respectful, show up to the room on a regular basis and then ask, in most cases you don’t want to just show up to a room.

 

You’ve never seen anybody before and ask them to join their mod team. They’re going to want to see you consistently and know that you’re trustworthy. When somebody adds you to their moderator team, they’re trusting you to serve their people. And that’s a great deal of trust and it’s direct representation of them and their club and their brand. So that’s how to join other moderator teams currently.

 

And I say currently, because clubhouses fluid, you guys, they are constantly updating this platform by the time this comes out, you know, we’ll have DMS in clubhouse and I don’t know, there’s no predicting, but I just want to make sure that you know, that the fundamentals we’re talking about here are going to apply based on however, the technology evolves.

 

And then the next thing I want to share with you, the final thing is how to create your own team, how to create your moderator team. So step number one is create your own club. You can create a club after you’ve been trusted by clubhouse. And that’s usually just a couple of days. You’ve kind of lost some lost some warning flags a year,

 

a newbie, but I would wait a little bit to create a club and make sure that you know, how your club is going to fit in amongst the other clubs and the value you’re going to bring to your space and how you’re different. So you can create your club. You want to brand it well, and just follow the steps that clubhouse has put before to create your club rules and club description.

 

And you also can put tags in your club about what the general topics that your club speaks to. Step. Number two is to establish a set schedule. You want to show up regularly. As a matter of fact, when I first joined clubhouse, we had to host regular rooms for at least three weeks in a row. In order for clubhouse to consider us launching the Sweetlife entrepreneurs club.

 

Now anybody can go in there and anybody can create a club, but it took us literally weeks and weeks of backlogs of proving that we were worthy in order to create a club. So you don’t have to go through all that. But I do recommend that you create a club and create a set schedule of when you’re going to show up every single week so that you can train your audience.

 

You can train your people. And not that you can’t change that schedule, but you want to start out with something set and something consistent. So plan your room schedule and your room content. What are you talking about? Name your rooms, really cool, catchy names. You know, open-ended questions for people to join that they know that they can contribute in your spaces.

 

And of course in all things, make sure that aligns with your brand and really how you want to establish your club as a leader and your company leading in a certain area of conversation. And then the next step is reach out to others and invite moderators who align with your brand and your voice and your mission to help co moderate rooms with you. Now,

 

there are a couple different strategies about how to go about doing this and they aren’t right or wrong. I’m just going to share with you the strategies and then you can choose what’s best for you. Strategy one is to find other people that do pretty much the same thing you do, other therapists or other fitness coaches, other van, life travelers, other surfers,

 

other speaking coaches, other graphic designers. So that’s step number one is finding other people that do the same thing as you and collaborating. I have hosted rooms in clubhouse with people that do very, very similar services to what we provide here in the suite company. And it’s so cool to be able to collaborate with them because still the people in that room,

 

they’re going to choose who they resonate with more. It’s not a competition in this space. So however you speak and show up. If you invite people to do the similar thing, some people are going to love you. And some people just aren’t and then that’s okay. Some people are going to want to work in your programs and some people are going to choose,

 

you know, the other moderator and that’s okay, too. So option number one is finding people who do pretty much what you do. Option. Number two is define those who provide different services and different areas of expertise, but who reached the same audience. So let me say that again, other businesses that serve the same audience, but they don’t do what you do.

 

And that’s the dream team that we have formed in our wave makers club. We have literally a business dream team of moderators and each person. And there’s usually a few people that have an area of expertise that are similar to each others, but we have created an entire complete pie. There are many pieces to a complete business, profitable impact business pie from Instagram strategy to how to use IgE TV.

 

You know, I have different experts that are on our moderator team, but one person talks about reels. One person talks about hashtags and of course, you know, marketing and branding and website development, but also leadership speakers and people that can come to how to delegate well, how to grow your teams. And so we curate a really amazing moderator team in that way that we go and we search because we know what the people who come to our rooms want and need,

 

and you can do the same thing. So whatever you do ask yourself, what are other things in my clients really, really need that we may not directly provide? How can I curate a team around like that dream team approach for our listeners in our rooms, that we can really curate a space where people want to come back to because they know that they are getting helped mindfully intentionally getting helped.

 

And then the last step, and this is just a logistical last step for you. I could do a whole I’d should, and we’ll do a whole episode on this is just to know, to create a back channel for your moderator team. You know, back channels are created primarily on Instagram, but also in text strings and WhatsApp. And so bring all the moderators who’ve agreed to moderate for you and your rooms into one place.

 

So you can communicate in the back channel while the room is happening live. I have had to numerous times send messages to my moderator T and saying, I’m so sorry, my dog won’t stop barking. Can somebody else emcee the room right now? Or I’m so sorry. I have to go potty, which like you got to go pee sometimes when you’re on clubhouse stages for hours and hours,

 

or I’m so sorry, I’m walking out of the grocery store, you know, having this back channel, sorry guys. I’m just keeping it real. That’s what I do. You know, having this back channel, just make sure your mic is on mute if you go pie. Okay. I mean this back channel and I’m communicating with your moderator team is really an amazing way to create a cohesive group of people that show up every single week.

 

And a couple of just insider tips that I do with my mob team. I usually present a question and the topic. So my moderator teams know what we’re talking about before every room. So they in their mind can start strategizing. They don’t just kind of show up to a room and be like, Hey, whatever. They already know how they can start strategizing and how they can help people in the room.

 

They also know how that topic can help their businesses grow. You know, our moderator teams they’re just to grow our company. You know, we love to position our moderators to help their businesses grow. It’s really a win-win win for everybody. It’s a win for us. It’s win for our moderator teams. And most importantly, it’s a win for the people that join our rooms.

 

So in summary, we have certainly talked about a lot today. This is how to build or join clubhouse, moderator teams, moderator dream teams. And that is a term that we use in clubhouse. That’s actually a term that we use in our business. We have business dream teams for our clients as well. And I’m so happy to be able to have an opportunity to talk to you today and to share these strategies with you.

 

If you would like more help on this, please join me on Wednesday at 12 o’clock and our suite life podcast live room under the Sweetlife entrepreneurs club. And we are here to pour into you again, this is episode number 227 at the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. And all of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com click on the podcast. And this is episode number 227 and next week in episode number 228,

 

we have Ashley Wilkerson who is an absolute clubhouse powerhouse as a guest on the show. You just wait, you are in for a treat. She breaks down her entire methodology on how she helps women build a pink print to achieve your dreams. It’s amazing. And I can’t wait for you to hear her speak. Thanks so much for tuning in and being a faithful listener of the show.

 

Take a screenshot of this and tag me at April beach life on Instagram. And I will message you directly with the link to join our rooms this week so that you and I can personally Connect be awesome. I’ll talk to you again next time. Bye bye for now.

Episode 226: How To Use Clubhouse To Grow Your Business – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Download the Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models

Who This Episode is Great For:

This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who want to understand Clubhouse.

Summary:

Clubhouse is a social audio app that enables conversations. It’s a great place to show your expertise by lending valuable information to live conversations. Clubhouse is also a great place to learn from others, network, build your brand, curate collaborations and simply connect with like-minded people with similar interests. Clubhouse is also a perfect place to find your ideal clients, and this is what we’re discussing on today’s show. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand how to increase brand awareness on Clubhouse
  2. Understand how to write your Clubhouse bio as a multi-passionate entrepreneur
  3. Know how to funnel people off Clubhouse and into your business

Resources Mentioned:

 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. I’m so excited to have another conversation with you about clubhouse. In today’s episode, we’re talking about how to use clubhouse to grow your business. And I’m going to give you some examples of how you can dive in on the app,

 

whether you’re building a personal brand or a company brand, or whether you’re just not exactly sure what direction and what positioning you want to take professionally using the clubhouse app. So today this is what we’re going to cover. We are going to cover the fact that clubhouse is the place to be. I am not joking you the place to be, to build your personal and business brand,

 

to connect with amazing people and really how to understand how you can use this app. It’s a great place to show your expertise by lending valuable information to live conversations. But I also know, and fully understand that it’s kind of confusing for some businesses, depending on what niche you’re in, or maybe it’s even a little overwhelming. Now, even though the app is still in beta mode,

 

beta testing at the time I recorded this episode for you, you know, you go in there sometimes and you’re in rooms with couple thousand people. That can be a little intimidating. So I’m here to help you onboard. This is an extension of the last podcast episode we did for you. Episode number two Oh nine, if you have not yet listened to episode number two Oh nine,

 

about how to get started on clubhouse. Take just a second. Go listen to that episode first and then come back here. This is episode 226. So if you’ve not listened to two Oh nine and you’re just getting started from scratch on clubhouse, go listen to two Oh nine first and then come back and reconnect with me here. I will be here waiting for you.

 

Those of you guys who are ready to dive in more and know how to use clubhouse to build your business, to increase sales. This is what you can expect at the end of today’s episode. You can expect to understand how to increase your brand awareness on clubhouse, understand how to write your clubhouse bio, especially for those of you guys that are multi-passionate entrepreneurs.

 

We’re going to dive into that and just jam on that a little bit. So I can give you some direction and clarity, and you’re going to know how to funnel people off of clubhouse and into your business. This podcast episode is for those of you in any phase of my sweet life business roadmap, that start to scale up system that tells you what phase of business you’re in.

 

So regardless of where you are, this is a great episode for those of you in every phase of business growth and development, all the show notes and everything we’re talking about today, of course can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode two 26. And before we dive into the meat and potatoes here, I have a very special bonus to this episode.

 

If you have not grabbed it yet, it is the ultimate guide to choose the online business model. That is right for you. It’s an amazing guide. There’s over 15 pages in there that break out the difference between memberships and courses and masterminds. And I break out and explain to you how watching each one of those will affect your life. What the lifestyle side of it looks like.

 

So if you haven’t yet grabbed it, definitely pause this episode and very simply just go to April beach.com forward slash guide. And you’re going to get taken directly to the page where you can download that and access that right away. So it’s a really special bonus episode that is with today’s show. So if you’re ready to know how to grow your business by using clubhouse,

 

let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. Okay. So let’s first start talking about what is clubhouse, right. Again, if you haven’t listened to episode number two Oh nine, please go do so. Otherwise let’s keep going. Clubhouse is a social audio app that enables conversations. It’s a great place. And I mean, a great place to show your expertise by lending valuable information to live conversations is also an incredible place to learn from others network,

 

build your brand curate collaborations, and simply connect with other people that are like-minded. They have similar interests as you do. And clubhouse is also a perfect place to find your ideal clients. And this is what we’re talking about on today’s show. So let’s go ahead and do just a little teeny recap of episode two Oh nine, to make sure that we are all on the same level base information of what we’re talking about.

 

So the thing with clubhouse is clubhouse enables human level conversations, human connection. It is a place to have actual real life, real time live conversations. So I want you to imagine being on clubhouse as if you have gone to an in-person networking event and you’re having amazing conversations, you’re sharing what you do. You’re listening from other people who are sharing their magic.

 

Usually there’s probably somebody who is the host of that networking event. And they’re kind of orchestrating that event. That is what it’s like to be in a clubhouse room. You show up to this networking event. There’s one person who’s usually the primary host of that particular one room. And they have other people that are there helping them moderate. They are leaders in creating the great networking environment.

 

That is what it’s like being on clubhouse. It’s an excellent way to build relationships with people you have never met before. And it is rare time right now at the recording of this show, where I was in a room last week, listening to MC hammer. And there was only 50 people in that room. So there’s an amazing opportunity to really connect with people in a very real level.

 

And I understand if you’re listening to this and it might feel a little frustrating if you aren’t on clubhouse yet, even if you’re, you know, especially if you’re an Android user, but we do have great news to you that they are rolling out beta testing for Android right now. So all of us are going to get to hang out there together on clubhouse very,

 

very soon. So when we’re talking about clubhouse, I want you to understand that clubhouse creates an instant warm connection with you and somebody else. You have just had a conversation with somebody else, or somebody just listened to you speak. That is a very important thing as a business leader or an expert. We want the opportunity to get in front of people that we can serve and help.

 

And that’s what clubhouse does. So today I’m going to share three different tips, three different steps to build your business on clubhouse. And I’m going to do them in somewhat of a sequential order. So first I want you to do one thing and then the next, and then the next, and I’m also going to show you the flow of how we get people off the clubhouse app in,

 

into your business. How do we take them from that company to a client? Cause that’s what, that’s what you’re here for in this episode. So I want to make sure you know, that this is how I’m going to take you through this today. So step number one, what’s talk about your clubhouse, bio unwell, like other social media platforms,

 

where you really can’t say much about yourself. Clubhouse gives you generous space to share your expertise, who you help, what your intentions are for being there on the app. And your bio gives other people an opportunity to connect with you right there in your bio. You have a generous space of information and the top two lines are the most important part of that.

 

Because as nobody’s looking at your bio, they’re only able to see a short preview. It’s like, it’s almost similar to the same thing. We call it above the fold on a website there’s above the fold on your clubhouse bio. And it’s just first couple of lines. Not only that, those first couple of lines are also searchable. So what you put in there is very important for how you want people to find you and what you want them to know about you and getting them to trigger whether or not they want to keep reading on to read your bio more as an example,

 

the top couple of lines in my bio, the very first three words, our online business strategist. And so when you search me and clubhouse, I’m coming up all the way at the top when you search online business strategists, because I’ve been really yes, pun intended strategic about those words. That’s how I want to be found because that is what I do.

 

And so, as you’re writing your bio, I want you to know that it is really a piece of it content. So I want you to treat it accordingly. And I want you to go through outline what you do on the top and give people some really fun, special things to know about you. Also in the top couple, you know, lines of my bio currently in there,

 

it says lifelong lifestyle entrepreneur. That’s something that’s unique about me and a little bit different. And so I also include that in the top part of my bio. So your bio is a generous piece of space and you need to use it accordingly. It is truly a piece of content. Now, one of the questions that I often get actually all the time in clubhouse rooms is how do I share my bio?

 

If I have a lot of things going on, if I have a ton of different things that I’m working on and a ton of different things I’ve done, you know, what do I, what do I put in my out? Well, let me give you an example between my husband and myself, we own four different companies and I’m a nonprofit founder and I’m a mom of boys and I’m an author.

 

And, and, and you’re the same way. And I’m a podcast host. And so you want to be very good about using that space. Now here’s tip number one. You want to choose the primary business or service that you want to be known for. We’re on clubhouse, both here in your bio and how you show up speaking in rooms. That’d be very clear about what you do and who you help primarily,

 

but clubhouse is an amazing opportunity to share multiple things that you’ve done. Share your street, credibility, share the projects that you’re working on and share other fun things about you. So, as an example, in my clubhouse bio, you’ll find my expertise on top and some interesting, kind of funny quirky facts about me. You’ll find a statement of the exact problem that I solve and who I solve it for.

 

And some further street, credibility press different ways to connect with me, but also in my bio, you’ll find a list of funny things. Like I love taking fermented mushrooms and I’ve lived on my own since I was 13 years old. Those are the things that you’ll find. And so your bio should be a place where you can establish your expertise, but also a place where you can list other things that are very special about you that make you human.

 

And that is why this is such a powerful opportunity that clubhouse gives you. So please don’t overlook, creating an amazing bio. And with this said, I’m going to put a link in the show notes for this episode. My friend Mario Armstrong is like the bio King. He’s the one that taught me how to write my bio. And he has an amazing bio and furthermore,

 

she’s always updating it. So with that being said, I’m going to put a link to Mario Armstrong, and I want you to follow him on clubhouse. If you’re on the app and you are there already, or soon as you get on clubhouse, because he will always have this top notch example of how you write your bio on this app and create connections.

 

I also learned something very powerful from him that didn’t come from me. So I want to make sure, you know, it came from him and I’m just sharing it with you on today’s show. One of the things that he does it recommends for people to do is if you have very, very different companies, you run very, very different things that he actually writes up his bio and a note pad on his phone in when he enters different rooms,

 

he can very quickly copy and paste and change out his bios, according to the room that he is in. So that is a great tip from him. I have not done that. I’ll be honest. I have not personally done that, but I have, I know that he does that and I know that other people do that. So I wanted to share that tip with you on this show as well.

 

So step number one is updating your clubhouse bio step number two, connect your Instagram to it. And it should be your business. Instagram, if you have a personal Instagram, but yet you have a business clubhouse works in tandem with Instagram. So it highly recommends you connect your business Instagram. Or if you don’t have one, upgrade your Instagram to a business account conversations that happen on clubhouse,

 

get taken off clubhouse and they become conversations that happen on Instagram or Twitter. I’m going to talk and dive into the Instagram aspect of it because most people use Instagram and connection with clubhouse. Currently. Now this is what is important about this. When somebody meets you or hears you speak on clubhouse, or maybe they just are standing next to you in a room and you aren’t even speaking on a stage and they,

 

because there’s nothing else for them to look at, see your amazing profile picture, click on it. And then they go and they click from your bio. There’s a direct LinkedIn. They’re going to check you out. One of the things that’s important is your Instagram should back up what you say in your clubhouse bio. And it should back up what you speak about on clubhouse stages.

 

Your Instagram is an extension of who you are and how you show up on the clubhouse app. So what happens when you do this well is your Instagram starts to grow as well because people will follow you on Instagram from clubhouse. So it’s very important that you understand that the conversations that happen on clubhouse, then get taken off the app on to Instagram. And here are some tips of how you convert people from clubhouse.

 

Even when you’re speaking live on the stage, send them over to their Instagram, to book or buy for you from you. One of the most important things that you can do if, and when you are a hosting room in have an opportunity to share how to work with you is to give very clear instructions on what people should do. I’ve seen it done a million different ways that are not clear.

 

And I want you to know the clear way to do it. As you were speaking on stage, I want you to give clear instructions to what somebody should do when they get to your Instagram account. You don’t want to just say, Oh yeah, just shoot me a message on Instagram, because then what we’re asking somebody’s brain to do is come up with what they want to say in that message to you instead,

 

make it very, very easy. I want you to come up with one key word and I want you to say, and if you were here in this room and you would like to connect with me more regarding what we’re talking about, or if you would like to download the piece of content, the lead magnet that I’m talking about, or read the article,

 

or, you know, join my, my event that I’m having. We’re going to talk about that here in just a sec, pick one word. So in rooms that I’m in, when I’m talking about how to create your suite of offers, I will say DM me the word guide right now, go to my Instagram. As I’m speaking, as we’re hanging out here in this clubhouse room and very simply DME,

 

the word guide, just one word, and I will send you the link on how you can grab my guide, see how easy that works. Instead of me saying, Hey, by the way, go send me a message and then I’ll send you the guide. So we want to make it super simple for them. Another tip that many people do as well is instead of sending you a DM,

 

they make a comment on your first post on Instagram. So if you want to increase the SEO in your Instagram and have people comment on your Instagram posts, you can very simply say to them, go to the first picture on my Instagram profile in DME, the word guide, and I will ping you directly and send you the link. So there’s a couple of different ways to go about doing that.

 

It’s very important that you connect your Instagram to clubhouse in that you have a system, a very clear system with very clear instructions. So people don’t even have to think you’ve made it so easy for them. And you’ve picked one key word, and that’s how we get them from the clubhouse app into a relationship with you. And then here is step number three,

 

step number three is answering the question. What happens next? How do I then get them from Instagram to a converted client? And so here are these tips. First one is have an open next step call to immediately available. Here’s some examples of what that could be. Number one, you can have an online scheduler, always sitting ready and waiting in the bio in the link tree or associate tab or link on your website where you share links from Instagram.

 

Totally ready to go. So there’s always a way to get people then from Instagram to have a conversation with you, you also should have links in your bio that lead to buying now or register now or download now. So the things that you’re talking about in your clubhouse rooms, you want to make sure they’re also live links in your Instagram for people to connect and grab right away.

 

You can say, and I will say it’s worked really, really well and beautifully for our followers. Who’ve taken off clubhouse into our Instagram is I do say sometimes, Hey, just go to the link in my bio and you can download this guide so they don’t have to DM me. And oftentimes I will actually get two different calls to action. Both of those have been very successful for us.

 

And so I wanted to make sure that I am sharing that with you. I will tell you, and you’ve, you’ve hung out here with me for a long time till the end of the show. So I want to tell you something and it’s a secret, but not so secret. In our first 11 days on clubhouse, we invoiced out $27,000 in business coaching.

 

And that’s really important to know, because I want you to know that what I’m telling you in today’s episode is not just me pulling this out of, you know, where this is, how we’ve built so many amazing relationships on club house, and started to be able to work with so many more clients that we would never have been able to reach. If it wasn’t through showing about then typically giving first and building relationships with the right people,

 

knowing who you serve is a very important part of enabling your leverage on this app, being true to who you are, understanding how to communicate the end results you provide. And if you do that, I promise you it will pay off in your business. And I want to see that happen to, for you, to you and for you. So just to recap today,

 

we talked about how to grow your business, your clubhouse, this isn’t some big funnel strategy. It’s common sense. That’s why it’s worked for us in so many people because it’s natural, it’s authentic. And it’s just common sense. If somebody loves what you have to say in a room they’re of course going to want to connect with you more in this as a process in which we do it.

 

So number one is making sure your bio is amazing. It’s very clear what you do, but also share some unique and funny and quirky things about you. That show that you are a human number two, make sure your Instagram is connected. And how do you communicate going to Instagram? Make sure you have a strategy of, of a word of a keyword that you can say when you’re speaking in rooms to have somebody download your lead magnet,

 

or they could perhaps just share the word to type the word schedule. And then the third thing is a conversion that happens in the next step. The third step is off Instagram. How do you get people then off Instagram and into a sales call with you into a webinar funnel or a live event? What does that next step of taking them off Instagram so that they can connect with you deeper and become a lifelong client?

 

If you’ve done a good job of building out your client journey services and a raving fan. And that’s what we’re talking about on today’s show. Thank you so much for hanging out with me. I absolutely love connecting with you as you know, thanks for being a faithful listener, especially those of you guys. Who’ve been listening to this show for over four and a half years.

 

And if you aren’t yet following me on clubhouse, I want to connect with you. I am very simply found it at April beach. And of course we have two brand new, amazing clubs that I want you to connect with. First of all, we have our podcast club, which is sweet life entrepreneurs and every single Wednesday at noon, Eastern time,

 

I host a room where we are rolling up our sleeves and talking about all these strategies. So if you’re listening to this live and you’re a subscriber to the show, join me at noon Eastern on Wednesday, and we will roll up our sleeves and help you work on your clubhouse strategy with you. Also, if you’ve never spoken in a clubhouse room before,

 

maybe you’re a little nervous to come to stage. Those are the rooms we host and that’s why I make a safe space for you. So please plan to join me on Wednesday. I can’t wait to get to know you. And then the other club that we have is our wave makers club wave makers is all about designing transformational, predictable measurable online services,

 

signature programs, and a suite of offers for high profit and deep purpose. Tuesday nights. Currently we are hosting wave makers rooms. So make sure you’re also following the wave makers club so that you can get access to those rooms. And I will, of course share all of this in the show notes for today, it’s show, which can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com.

 

This is episode number 226 and left talking to you have an awesome day and I’ll talk to you on clubhouse.

Episode 223: How To Create A Transformational Online Course – with April Beach

Sweetlife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the Waitlist to Create Your Signature Offer™ with April Beach

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs who are launching online courses.

Summary:

Launching an online course isn’t enough. In fact, the sale of on-demand online courses fell by 13.4 billion dollars because people are weary of buying another course they’ll never finish, the material is not good, or they don’t receive the outcome they had hoped. 
 
For entrepreneurs and businesses looking to scale, online courses are still a powerful tool, but how to curate your content and deliver a transformation to your participants will determine whether your course is a huge hit or a huge fail.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand the basics of Transformational Course Design™
  2. Be able to assess your current course for needed change
  3. Have 4 steps to take action if you’re building an online course right now

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach to the show. I’m April beach host here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast and founder of the Sweetlife company. Thanks for joining me again on another episode where you can take what we deliver to the bank.

 

This show is known for delivering new business trainings and coaching that other businesses and coaches charge thousands for. So thank you so much for tuning in with us before we get started today. And we’re about to talk all about online courses, which I know is a popular topic for so many of you. I want to make sure that you know how you can connect further with us here on the podcast.

 

Delivering information is one thing, but then you usually have questions or you want to know maybe how this applies in your business. So if you are on clubhouse every single week on Wednesdays at 12 o’clock, we host a room and this room is all about the podcast topic of the week. And I take your specific questions on what we talked about on this week show.

 

So if you’re listening right now to episode number 223, and you want to know all about how to launch a transformational online course, you’re listening to this podcast, and then you want to workshop with me and ask your questions. That is where you can find me totally free every single Wednesday on clubhouse at 12 o’clock Eastern time. In order to find that room,

 

you just need to follow me on clubhouse and I can be found at April beach, super simple. So let’s take this podcast from where we are now over to clubhouse, and I’m happy to have a deeper conversation with you and give you support in this area. So who is this episode for this episode is for those of you guys that are in the business launch or scale phase,

 

and you’re thinking about doing so with an online course. So here are a couple of important things to note launching an online course isn’t enough. All right. In fact, the sale of on-demand online courses in free courses actually dropped the consumption of them has dropped over the last couple of years. And that’s because so many people are weary of buying another course or,

 

or even spending their time on a free course. And they understand the material they’re getting really isn’t good, or it isn’t transformational. And they aren’t really getting the outcome that they had hoped that they would receive. So if you are, which you are listening to me here, an entrepreneur or a business, and you’re looking to scale online courses are still really a powerful way to do that.

 

In fact, we help most of our clients watch online courses, but how you curate your content and deliver a transformation to your students, to your clients will determine whether or not your course is a huge hit or a huge fail. And so that’s what we’re talking about today on the show. At the end of this episode, you’re going to understand the basics of transformational course creation and design.

 

You’re going to be able to assess your current courses and whether or not you need to make changes. And you’re going to have four steps to take action if you’re building an online course right now. So if you’re ready, let’s go ahead and dive into the show and all of the show notes and everything we have here for you can be found by going to sweet life co.com

 

Okay. So let’s first dive in and talk about what is a transformational course. A transformational course is an online course that delivers measurable transformational results, where your students, your, your clients actually are able to understand what you have taught them and actually practice and put it into action. Instead of so a lot of course, creators, actually, most of them just teach you how to kind of outline your content in benchmarks and basic reverse engineering.

 

You need to do much more of that. If you want to scale your business and become an undisputed leader in your space by creating a transformational online course. So that’s why this is so important. The problem is more content is not better. You know, nobody needs more content. Nobody is out there saying, please inundate me with more content. I know I’m not.

 

And I’m sure you’re not either your students and your clients and the people that are going to go through your course. They just need a transformation. And that transformation could be a micro transformation, or it could be a major transformational outcome for them. So in able to do that, or being able to do that as a course, creator means that you need to understand how to design your course,

 

that includes delivering a transformational measurable result in the end. And according to canto.com content overload is when too many different blog posts and articles and ideas and suggestions cover one specific area. And I know that as entrepreneurs, that you’re struggling with that if you’re talking about something that so many other people are talking about in that same area, it is a huge issue for your business.

 

And it has a couple of negative effects for one, it creates a vast quantity of material covering this one topic, and it makes a really hard for you to stand out. Another problem is that it turns off a potential audience and they don’t want to shift through endless content to find the one thing they’re looking to achieve. And you can read that article.

 

We’ll go ahead and put that link to that article in the show notes for you guys on our website. And so as an entrepreneur, I know you’re struggling with this. I know that you need to understand how to stand out, how to become known, how to become, like what I call undisputed leader. And I talked to hundreds of entrepreneurs every single month that are asking,

 

how do I make my course or my program or my service stand out. And it all starts with simplified transformational program design. So I want you to write those words down in your memory. If you’re driving your car to say with me transformational course or service or program design. Okay. And that’s what we’re talking about here today. That’s what we teach within the Sweetlife company.

 

If you’re looking for a resource beyond this podcast in this area. And so here are some steps I want to give you that you can walk away with though immediately so that you can take a look at your course. Step. Number one is if you already have a course, take a look at your curriculum, take a look at it. And if you’re in the process of building your online course,

 

take a look at what you’re proposing to build, and you need to be able to articulate the injuries Results so that people can expect, know what to expect fully in the end with the transformation they’re going to get from your course, not just what is the end, but what is the detailed transformation that they can expect? You don’t want to just say,

 

Oh, they’ll feel better as a parent, if you’re launching a parent coaching course, or they’ll know how to land speaking gigs, if you’re a speaking coach or they’ll know how to run or moderate a part, a clubhouse room, those are all too general. I recommend that you were able to specifically articulate and identify the transformation like this. So instead of they’ll feel better as a parent,

 

you should be able to say something about your course, like they will have crafted their parenting plan with confidence. So it’s really specific. And you’re talking about how they’re getting the transformation, or instead of they’ll know how to land a speaking gig. It’s something to the effect of, they will have completed the pitch process to land their dream stages. See it’s much more specific.

 

And it also alludes to how you’re teaching them, how to do that. And instead of launching a course that just says, Hey, you know, they’re going to know how to run a great clubhouse room. Instead. We want you to identify the transformation you’re delivering. And an example could be, they understand the guidelines of moderating inclusive clubhouse rooms. You see the difference in that.

 

So step number one is really taken a good look at your curriculum. Number one, do you actually understand the transformation that you’re giving people? Is that really, really clear to you? And if you don’t it’s okay. I don’t want you to feel like, Oh my gosh, I can’t believe, I don’t know the transformation because I literally speak with entrepreneurs all the time that are like,

 

wow, April, I’ve created this course. I bought all these other course creation programs. And I put all this content in there and laid it out. I still can’t articulate the transformation I’m giving people. So if that’s you just, first of all, know that you’re not alone. There’s a lot of people out there talking about how to teach course creation that might not even understand instructional curriculum design.

 

And so that’s not a reflection of you, and it’s certainly not a reflection of your content. So the very first thing to do is to look at the curriculum and be able to clearly identify the transformation in a detailed description. Number two, create transformational benchmarks. And so let’s talk about what I mean by this. I was just hosting a clubhouse room on this topic last week.

 

And I was asked this question and a woman said she’s had a course forever. And they were, I was so excited for her because they were going back through her course and actually understanding the importance of transformational course design they’re going back. And they were updating to redoing their course. It’s been, this killer course has made a ton of money for years.

 

And she asked me, should I measure the transformation in the whole entire course, or also, should I do it in each one of the benchmarks, each one of the modules. And here is the answer to that. Yes. As an expert, you need to understand, to be able to articulate the sub transformations within each benchmark of your course, or of your service,

 

or really this applies to any single business model. We teach transformational program development and design that applies to mastermind creation, membership creation. This can apply to a one hour coaching call with somebody. This can apply to any way that you deliver your content right now in this podcast, we’re just talking specifically about course creation. So step number two is create transformations within each one of your benchmarks and take a look and make sure that you understand them,

 

that you can articulate in a detailed way, the sub transformations within each one of your modules or benchmarks as well. And number three is to curate content the way people learn. Okay, this is really, really important understanding. The more content does not equal a better course or a program. We talked about that in the beginning, right? So your responsibility is to actually remove the content that does not directly apply to the end result that you are giving.

 

That is step number one, take a look at your course, or if you’re in the process of building the course, take a look at it and say, okay, what doesn’t actually have to be in here to deliver the transformation that I’m guaranteeing people, but there’s even more than that. As an entrepreneur, I understand that you’re not an instructional design expert or a scientific learning expert,

 

but if you’re offering a course, you have to curate curriculum with transformational program or service or coaching design. This is how you lead people to amazing results. And this is how you become an undisputed leader in your space. So I want you to understand this. Most people believe that repeated exposure to material, right? So going over the things that you teach them in each module and rereading it and practicing it and memorizing it is like the best way to get people Results.

 

But according to the McGraw center for teaching and learning at Princeton university, this is super time consuming and it’s actually less effective. Instead. They recommend making, learning difficult in strategic and desirable ways to enhance retention, retrieval and transfer of knowledge. Let me see, say that all again. You’re probably going like, Whoa, Whoa, you’re talking about Princeton university,

 

April, I’m a nutritionist or I’m a marketing coach, or, you know, whatever it is is totally doesn’t apply to me, but yet it does as course creators. It is important that we understand instructional design, especially if you are building your company and scaling your business with creating a product that gives people results and they have to go through a process of learning.

 

Let me say that again. A lot of course, creators<inaudible> course creators out there, put a bunch of content in a course, lay it out in a time in line and then give people homework for each benchmark. That is true. Really not the way to get people Results in your program. And what we find is just going over their notes or rereading the things that you’ve done isn’t necessarily the way to do it.

 

In fact, to this study by Princeton university, they actually recommend understanding and absorbing some of your content in your program and intentionally making it difficult, but doing so in desirable ways, creating challenges within your course that people want to overcome. They want to do. And it’s not super easy, but let’s go ahead and dive a little bit more into this because you might just be like,

 

totally tuning me out at this point, which I really hope you’re not because again, as a course creator or somebody that wants to offer a course, it’s important that you understand this in the process of building your curriculum. So does it irritable difficulties? So let’s kind of dive into that. What does that actually mean? Desirable difficulties is a term that Dr.

 

Robert York from UCLA came up with over 20 years and refers to conditions of learning that create challenges for the learners and even slow down some of the rate of learning. But in the end, they actually enhance the long-term retention of the knowledge and the skills that you’re giving that. So tell us, okay, this is, this is very instructional design and scientific learning,

 

and I totally get it. You’re like, okay, April, I’m not offering it MBA. I’m like just teaching somebody how to get more YouTube fans or whatever it may be. I totally totally get it. But you are a course creator and bringing your clients also known as your students from one place to another in knowledge or skill is what you’re promising them.

 

Right? And therefore you should include some measure of desirable difficulties. And again, what is that? So let’s take a look at your course either you’ve created a course or you’re thinking about creating a course. It desirable difficulty is placing a challenges, certain number of challenges and everybody’s program is different within your course, that they’re ready for non a challenge at every single week or every single module,

 

but really great challenges that your clients are ready to face. And by doing so, they get excited about doing it. They want to do it. They want to take what you’ve been teaching them and delivering to them over the past couple of weeks or months or however long or your program is. And they want to put it into action. It’s hard.

 

It’s really, really hard, but it’s the best kind of hard because they know that doing it is for sure. What’s going to raise them from where they are to the next level of where they want to be with you. Here’s an example of this at my company, at the Sweetlife life company, we have a program that’s called your signature offer, and we teach small businesses and entrepreneurs how to develop industry leading online courses.

 

We have taught this for over 13 years, as a matter of fact, way back when in 2008, we launched an online course on how to create online courses like before the whole entire online world was talking about it. And here is why the process of curating your curriculum and building courses in a way that embraces what you are capable of as an expert,

 

as far as scientific learning. But it also levels up your customer’s outcome. Your clients not only retention in your program, but the Results in your program. That’s how we build leading entrepreneurs and businesses. And we teach a process in my program called your signature offer. That actually takes your thoughts out of your mind and your expertise and puts them into a process that creates what we call transformational program design.

 

It is really hard work, but by the time we actually teach that in my, your signature offer program, people are ready for that. And so they’ve gone through the places in the benchmarks where they’re like, okay, bring it on. I am so amped up for this. I’m totally Agra, ready to grow. It’s going to be great work.

 

This is good, important work, because they’re ready for it. If we huge challenges for them throughout the whole entire program, they would never do it. If we created no challenges for them throughout the program, they would learn nothing and they’d have no transformation. So I always loved kind of showing you guys behind the scenes on our company and how we do things.

 

So let’s take that example and let’s look at your course or your program that you’re creating or that you’ve already launched. Do you have desirable levels of difficulty that are strategically placed that cause challenges that enhanced the outcome and the transformation people are getting within your course, if you don’t, then it’s time to take a look at that. And if you feel like you’re actually having a panic attack right now,

 

and you’re like, Oh my gosh, I don’t even know where to start then cruise over to signature offer.com and you can join one of my next white boarding sessions. I do these white boarding sessions for free all the time. And we’ll whiteboard out your course together. Or like I said, join me on clubhouse at noon on Wednesday, the week this show drops and we’ll,

 

we’ll be diving into this together. And here’s some things I want for you to consider as we’re wrapping up this really important episode here on the show. Number one, understand that action is part of your client’s learning process, but how are you going to implement that action? What is the difference between them taking action? And you just giving them work to say you gave them work,

 

or frankly you giving them no work because you just wanted your course easy to get through. Where is the measure there based on the transformation that you are promising they’ll receive from your course, number two, create challenges at the right points within your program, not just to create these challenges, but understand when and where people are ready to be challenged. And of course,

 

number three, which is how we started out this show, cut the content and focus on the transformation and the output of the process that you are teaching more content is not better. And if you take anything away from this episode, because I know we talked about a lot, number one is to simplify the content within your course, don’t overload people with more and more and more content.

 

Instead, look at the content within your course or your program and ask yourself, how am I going to make this transformational it, every single touch point within what I’m delivering to my clients. If you want to take your course, you want your course to take the lead in your space. You’re going to need to design it like a leader designs courses.

 

And this applies to mini courses, signature courses, and frankly, any program that requires learning and implementation based on the information that you teach. So we talked about a lot of things today, today in episode number 222 here on this wheat life entrepreneurial business podcast, we were talking about how to launch a transformational online course. This again is for those of you guys who are just starting to scale your business with online courses,

 

whether you have had a course for years like the woman I was speaking to in clubhouse, or you’re just now trying to tap into the power of scaling your business. Your online courses understand that launching a course alone is not enough. Also understand that the completion of online courses has fallen so much, that you have to understand how to engineer your curriculum in order to get people transformational,

 

measurable, predictable results, and the resources we have for you. Again, our join me in clubhouse. Let’s have a conversation about this. I’m happy to dive in, roll up my sleeves and link arms with you in our regular weekly clubhouse room on Wednesdays at noon. Again, follow me at April beach and we’ll dive in with this together. Or I want you to also check out signature offer.com

 

if you, to the place where you’re ready to take the lead in your industry. And you want to make sure that the courses that you’re developing are transformational industry, leading courses. That is where you get the steps to do it again. That signature offer.com and all of the show notes from this episode here can be found by visiting sweet life co.com. And I kind of geeked out on the research for this one.

 

So in those show notes, there’s a couple of really important resources. We have actually put the Princeton resource in there for you as well, as well as I’m putting a link to how to create strategic levels of difficulty from Dr. Robert Bjork here in the show notes as well. So if you want to dive in deeper to that, I’ve made sure all of these resources are here for you.

 

All right, you guys, thanks so much for tuning into the show. I can’t wait to talk to you again next week on a, another podcast that delivers a business coach. You can take to the bank. You guys have an awesome week. Bye for now.

Episode 222: How To Safeguard Your Content with Copyright Protection – with April Beach and Francesca Witzburg

Francesca Witzburg SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join Francesca live on Clubhouse Wednesday, April 14, 12:00 Eastern time Click here to join the SweetLife Entrepreneurs™ Club and get notifications and room links.

Who This Episode is Great For:

Those who want to know how to file for and use copyright protection. 

Summary:

In this episode we’re talking with The Trademark Attorney, Francesca Witzburg, about what you need to know when it comes to protecting your creative works by filing for copyright protection. If you’re a course or content creator, and you have work that is not protected, this is an urgent episode for you. We dive into who needs copyright protection, what you must be careful to do when hiring help to create works for you, and how to start the process of protecting your work. 
 
This is part 2 of a 2 part show with Francesca Witzburg. In part 1 we dove into Trademark protections for your work.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know if you have work that needs to be protected
  2. Understand how to own the work that others create for you
  3. Have the first steps to file for copyright protection today

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everyone. And welcome back. So the show April beach here, host of this show and founder of this wheat life company. I’m so glad that you’ve joined us again. This is part two of a two part series that we’re doing with our special guests,

 

Francesca Whitesburg. Last week, we dove in to trademarking protection who needs trademarking, the difference between word marketing and design marking. And so if you miss that, please pause this show, go back and start with last week of that is an area of need in your business. That was episode number 221. And today this is episode number 222. This episode is for those of you who are in any stage of business development in that stage is connected to our start to scale up system.

 

If you don’t know what phase of business development you’re in, we have an amazing, powerful, free resource for you where you can take a short assessment and get the exact stage and phase of business development you’re in and get a complete list of what you should be working on right now. And you can get that short assessment and access all of those tools by visiting Sweetlife co.com

 

forward slash quiz. If you haven’t done that, or if it’s been a while, since you’ve tested where you are in your business growth phase, I highly recommend you tap into that amazing resource. Now let’s talk about what we can expect from today’s show. So this episode is for those of you who want to know how to step into the process of protecting your creative work through filing for copyright protection,

 

our guest is absolutely hands down amazing. She has done work for our company and many of our clients, and I’m so pleased that she agreed to be on this show. Today, we are talking with the trademarking attorney, Francesca Whitesburg about what you need to know when it comes to protecting your creative works by filing for copyright protection. If you’re a course creator,

 

if you’re a content creator, if you have work that you have actually built, brought to life in tangible form and you have not protected it yet, we need you to be very careful. That is your creative work. That is your genius, and you need to protect it so nobody else can take it from you. And so we’re talking about how to go about that in today’s show clearly a very important show for our audience.

 

Now, the end of this episode, you’re going to know if you have work that needs to be protected. You’re going to know the process of going through the first steps to filing for protection. And you’re going to understand a few other very important things like how to own the work that others create for you. Other independent contractors, and even how to avoid getting into trouble when using protected material from other businesses within your marketing.

 

There’s so many important things that we discuss on today’s show. And so I’m so glad that you’re here and you’re not missing it. So let’s talk about our guest. If you did not hear her amazing introduction last week, let me give you an introduction. Francesca Whitesburg is an award winning intellectual property law attorney specializing in trademarks brands and copyrights. She advises Tom businesses,

 

brands, entrepreneurs, professionals, talent, startups, and individuals. Francesca has experienced working at various in-house global luxury brands. She has also worked in the world’s largest law firm today. She’s a partner at an IP law firm, Loza and Loza and creates content on her Instagram. And she can be found at the trademark attorney on Instagram. She’s absolutely amazing.

 

So I’m very glad that you’re here, power packed episode. So let’s go ahead and dive in all of this show notes and the resources that we’re discussing can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com and simply click on podcast. And this is episode number two 22. Also, we have one more important bonus. So Mark your calendar. If you are on clubhouse,

 

we invite you to join Francesca and me in our regular Wednesday room on Wednesday, April the 14th at 12 o’clock Eastern time. Now, what does that mean? That means you get to jump into a clubhouse room and you get to ask Francesca your copyright questions, your direct business questions. That’s what we love clubhouse. And we actually use clubhouses our community extension to this podcast now.

 

So we have a regular room. We host every single Wednesday at noon. You are invited to join us there this week on April, the 14th, Francesca is going to be there taking your copywriting questions as an extension from this podcast episode. So it’s an amazing opportunity of course, completely free and a chance for you to really get your business legal questions answered.

 

If you’d like to join this room, here are the steps to do that. Visit me on Instagram at April beach life. And you can click on the link in my bio and simply follow me on clubhouse and follow our club on clubhouse. When you do that, you’re going to have notifications and with clubs house, when your notifications are on, that gives you access to these very special rooms.

 

So very simply follow me on clubhouse. And I can be found at, at April beach on clubhouse, where you can go to my Instagram at April beach life on Instagram. And both of those opportunities will give you a chance to follow me there or giving you notifications in access to Francesca. So that’s our special bonus with today’s episode. And I know that’s going to be so powerful for so many of you who really do have important business questions you need answered right now.

 

So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s podcast episodes. Welcome back to another episode here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. I am joined again by my very favorite person this year, Francesca Whitesburg. She is here diving in with everything legal for you to protect your content, your intellectual property. And this is actually part two of a two part podcast episode we did last week.

 

We dove all into trademarking. So if you miss last week, pause this, go back to episode two 21 and start with that one and then come back here and join us. If you listened to last week, let’s get ready to go. We have so much to cover today and you are going to gain so much knowledge by this wonderful woman who is here just strictly to pour into you to protect your intellectual property.

 

So welcome back to the show. Francesca, thank you so much for me. Thank you for having me April. I’m excited to talk about copyrights. Yeah. Okay. So actually let’s go ahead and dive right in. So really what is copywriting for anybody who is absolutely brand new at this? They know they need to know what it is, but they don’t even have a baseline starting point.

 

Yeah, of course. So copyright is a form of intellectual property protection that the text creative works that can be your videos, your photos, your courses, the layout of their website, your podcasts. It covers anything that you’ve created. That’s fixed in a tangible media. So it can’t be like an idea in your head gotta be written down, actually like manifested in the real,

 

but once it’s out there, it’s protected automatically under copyright law. Okay. So let’s take a step back. I know we talked about it extensively in last week’s episode, but can you just give a general description to our listeners in what is intellectual property, Of course, intellectual property, which is IP, which we refer to as refers to creations of the mind.

 

They’re your invention. Anything that’s proprietary that you can upload your photos, your grants, your slogans, trade secrets. These are all things that you have created that either you or your business owns. I like to say you have your IP toolbox. And then in that tool box, there’s different tools you can use like patents, copyrights, trademarks, and trade secrets.

 

So good. Okay. So incredibly foundational, but yet so many businesses aren’t aware of that. All right. So my next question for you, and I know our listeners, especially those who listened to last week are automatically asking this question right now. What is the difference between a copyright protection and trademarking? Yes. Trademarks really protect source identifiers. So Sweetlife when you read that name,

 

you know, that that’s April beaches programs, she’s offering her consulting services April. You’ve seen, created a full brand around that. And also it’s your company name too, but to consumers, we know that that’s April. So that word tells people that if you get consulting from this person, it’s April, who’s behind it. The same thing. When you see Coca-Cola or burger King,

 

you go to a McDonald’s in Spain, you’re in a know that it’s the same person who’s behind that. That’s the function of a trademark. Now a copyright is a very different tool, but they can overlap. So copyright extends to any creative expressions. So if you have a really unique logo that went along with sweet life, I it’s like a little like circle with some interesting artwork in there that you use.

 

And when I, anyone one sees that I think April, but also it’s very detailed. It’s original. That can also be protected by copyright. So if you are working with IP counsel, a good lawyer is going to advise you holistically and really tell you all the tools that you can use to protect your intellectual property from different angles. Okay. Fascinating.

 

And so for our listeners, do they need to register their works for copyright protection? So copyrights are similar to trademarks in that they are granted automatically. As soon as you create something you posted online, put it, like we said, in the fixed medium, then you have protection. However, if someone is using your work in an unauthorized manner, that your permission,

 

right. To actually get them to stop in the United States, you need a registration certificate. So I like to say, you know, you could send them a letter, you can send them a DM telling them to take it down. Cause it’s, you know, using your copyrighted material. But with that, without a registration, it’s like waving an empty gun.

 

You’re really not gonna have any teeth behind it. Got it. Okay. And so let’s kind of just pause here because I want to get back into content around courses and really big written works that many of our listeners do, but let’s just kind of take a jog for a second and talk about a couple of areas where people tend to run into trouble and they have absolutely no idea when they’re using other people’s works.

 

So the first one is photography and using somebody else’s photography within your business, what do people need to know in relation to copyright? Anytime you use photos taken from the internet or anyone else’s photos, technically you need permission and you can get yourself into a lot of trouble if you use it even on just a random post or you’re using it for something more visible,

 

even mental, a lot of trouble. And so the way that you get around it is you either use photos and images that you’ve taken yourself, or you can purchase the rights to some of these images. That’s where you can use database as like Getty images to buy a license, to use those infants for certain purposes. Yeah. And I think that the,

 

you know, so many new businesses and actually even established businesses that are just trying to scale online, just kind of starting to get their Instagram out there. They don’t realize that grabbing another photo out there, you know, there is a license, but behind that and that you have to be within your legal rights to use that. And so just wanted to make sure that we were discussing that here on the show as well,

 

because I, I know that people have ran into problems with that in the past. Another kind of side question for you here, going back to our listeners original piece of work, their course that they’re creating the content that they’re delivering within their coaching programs or their mastermind, or they’re teaching their intellectual property, their methods, their signature programs, right. With some of our listeners hire other people to create parts of their work for them.

 

What do they need to know and be careful about when they’re doing that? Yeah, that’s a great point April. So when you hire someone to create whether it’s a logo with design web design, anytime you’re paying someone to build software or whatever it is, if they’re not an employee within the scope of employment, paying them a salary or hourly, or the bank benefits,

 

then technically they are the owner of the intellectual property. So you need a written assignment called an assignment for what an assignment means is a transfer of rights. So that person needs to sign a document that says all the intellectual property created around this program. And it’s more detailed than that, but I give all that copyright and all that property is transferred to two and you’re comfortable.

 

It’s very critical, especially if you’re going to pay a lot of money, really need to get this in writing because otherwise they own what you thought you paid for and they can continue to use themselves, or they can give it away to other people and competitors. Yeah. Imagine that nightmare hiring somebody to, you know, create something for you and your course or your program.

 

And then it’s not actually yours. So important. So thank you so much for discussing that. And that assignment is, is really incredibly important. And, you know, I know that the majority of our listeners, their teams that they have are actually independent contractors. So this is completely something that is critical for them to be aware of is this assignment within their independent contractor agreements.

 

And that’s why working with an expert like you to make sure it is, it says exactly what they used to say is so incredibly. Okay. So let’s go back to this process of protecting copyright. So another side question for you when our listeners are using the notation on the bottom of their slides or their PDFs or delivering, or their written work, and they have the little copyright protection and then they have the gear on there and then their ownership,

 

why is that important? And what is the correct way? If there is a correct way just to enter into that sort of, Yeah, you, you hit the nail on the head, you see the copyright symbol, which will say do it in an emoji you’re on like on your phone. And then you put either your name or your company’s name.

 

Whoever’s really claiming rights to that ID. And then the year, and what that does April is that’s putting third parties on notice it’s again, reminding people, Hey, this is my copyright. This is protectable information. If you use it without my authorization, it’s illegal. So don’t do it. We’ll do it. The only way that you can really get them to stop is if you file that registration.

 

Got it. Okay. And so I know that we get that question all the time. Clearly if I don’t answer it because I’m not an attorney and I know that so many of our users are wondering that, you know, they see that when can I use it? How do I use it? Especially those that have multiple years listed on that listing and in exactly how to go about doing that.

 

And so does the year usually reflect the original work or does the year cover when it is currently being protected in that listing on it? It could vary, right? So like sometimes it’s like people open up a book, you’ll see the original publication copyright notice, but then they’ll be the most current version. But for our purposes, I think it’s fine to do it.

 

Like, let’s say you had to create your website in 2020, you can have 20, 20 is the date, but then if you make changes to it, which you’re going to just keep updating, updating the year. Okay. So many, I already know that these are questions people listening or are having, okay. So now let’s go back to kind of the center of what we’re talking about here today for our listeners,

 

how do they start the process of protecting their intellectual property, their content course program outlines, where do they begin with this process? Yeah. I’d love the way you put it April, because you implicitly said, how do they protect what they already have? Everyone already has IP. It’s just a matter of understanding, which are your most important assets and how you go about protecting them.

 

So I actually offer an Ikea audit where I will look at websites, social media pages, courses, some of my clients give me access to their, you know, their subscription-based or whatever, log in to see their forces. I do a very holistic review. And then we will go get on the phone and do a 30 minute call to discuss what their most important assets are or we could talk about,

 

okay, here’s the name of your operating vendor? Have you thought about three markets that’s going to filing for that copyrights? Do you have your independent contractor agreement language? We’ll kind of go through and just do like a checklist, like as if I literally am doing an audit on your seat and make sure you have everything there. I recommend that as a starting point,

 

and there’s also an IP audit and I can action plan, which is like the deluxe version of that, which is going to really do a deep dive. And then we come up with eight phase one plan, which is your first three to six months on what filings to do. And then also the next like six to 12 plus months for the next round of filings,

 

because everyone has so much great content. That’s great IP. It gets a little overwhelming to think, Oh, I have to do everything. The reality is that you don’t, you stage it out. And if you have a plan strategy about it, it’s really not going to be that expensive. It’ll be way more expensive than the end. If you don’t do this.

 

And if you try to do deal with cease and desist letters or sending this letters as they arise. Yeah. Nightmare. So once somebody submits their work for copyright protection, each time they update it, do they need to resubmit that Great question. So anytime you modify a work that it becomes a new popular, it’s a new work. So I would say as long as the modification is substantially similar to the original work,

 

then you can rely on that. But if it’s very different and using that a lot publicly, it’s probably worth at least running it by an IP lawyer to come up with a strategy. Okay. So much great information, Francesca, thank you so much for being our guest again here on the show and joining us in clubhouse rooms where we talk about this.

 

There’s so many places where people can connect with you. You know, we highly recommend that people take up the opportunity to go through an IP audit. And what I love about why I have you on this show is that you understand the way service-based online entrepreneurs work and you understand what they’re creating and you understand courses and masterminds and signature programs, and you understand all these things.

 

And so it’s hard, frankly, to find an expert like you, that fully understands the assets that our listeners are creating. So thank you so much for being on the show and being an amazing resource and the best place for people to connect with you is through your Instagram. Is that correct? Yes. I have a link in my bio. It’s my counselee.

 

I’m happy to get on a 15 minute call just to hear about your business And to discuss if you want to do an IP audit or if you just want to Connect. Yeah. Great. All of you guys should take her up on that. It’s a very, I know it’s crazy. It’s totally free. So you can be found at the trademark attorney on Instagram and we will make sure that a link to that of course is in our show notes as well.

 

So it’s the trademark attorney on Instagram. And what is your clubhouse handle the trademark at the trademark attorney on clubhouse as well? Of course. Thank you so much for being here again and being our guest expert this week. I know that everybody really needed to hear a way, the things we’ve been talking about the last two weeks on the show. So certainly appreciate your time.

 

Absolutely. Thanks April. Thank you so much for sticking around with us. What an amazing episode Francesca is a super genius and perfectly in line with what our listeners and our clients need. If you would like to work with Francesca, if you would like to just take her up on her opportunity to connect with her for a free IP audit, please visit Francesca directly by visiting at the trademark attorney on Instagram.

 

So for handle is the trademark attorney on Instagram and the trademark attorney on clubhouse. She can be found at both of those places. Thank you so much for tuning into the show. Again, all the show notes and everything we talked about, and all these links can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. You guys have an awesome day. Bye bye for now.

Episode 221: How To Protect Your Business by Trademarking – with April Beach and Francesca Witzburg

Francesca Witzburg SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Bonus – Join Francesca live on Clubhouse Wednesday, April 7 & 9, 12:00 Eastern time. Click here to join the SweetLife Entrepreneurs™ Club and get notifications and room links.

Who This Episode is Great For:

As you name your business, programs, courses or creative work, you want people to recognize them as your brand, and it’s important that you know how to protect your creations so that others can’t use it. 

Summary:

In this episode, we’re talking with The Trademark Attorney, Francesca Witzburg, about what you need to know when it comes to protecting your company name, tag lines and creative work including your courses, branded programs and more. In this jam-packed powerful episode, we’re diving into; Who needs trademark protection? How much it costs? How to check if the name you want to use is available? How to block someone from using your trademark and more. 
 
This is part 1 of a 2 part show with Francesca Witzburg. In part 2 we dive into Copyright protections for your work.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know if you need to file for trademark protection
  2. Understand the difference between word and design marks
  3. Know where to start in your protection process

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everyone. And welcome to episode two. You one here, we’re diving into an important topic today, and that’s how to protect your business through the process of trademarking. And there are so many questions around trademarking.

 

We get this all the time in our business programs, especially in my year signature offer business program, where people are really coming in and branding their method, branding their industry, leading signature programs. And so there are always questions around how do I protect the name of what I’m creating? And so I invited today’s guests to come in, pour into you.

 

And this is what we can expect by spending time together here today. First of all, this episode is for those of you who are in any stage of business growth and development. Now, this really aligns with one of the tools here that we give away completely free with the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. And that is a self-assessment where you can find out exactly what stage of business you are in.

 

And you can take this self-assessment by simply visiting Sweetlife co.com forward slash quiz. So when we’re talking about who this particular podcast episode is for this episode happens to be for any of you wherever you fall in the phase of business development. Because if you haven’t protected your intellectual property yet through trademarking, then this is an important topic to pay attention to. So as you go through the process of naming your business and your programs and your courses and your creative work,

 

you want people to recognize that they’re yours, they’re your brand. It’s an important part of building your business, a recognizable brand. And so in this episode, we’re talking to trademark attorney Francesca Whitesburg about what you need to know when it comes to protecting your company, name, your tagline, to your creative work, including your courses, your branded programs,

 

and more, this is a jam packed episode. And she talks about powerful things in here that every single business owner needs to know. And then we’re diving into who needs a trademark protection. How much does it cost? How to check if the name that you want is available, how to block someone who could be using your trademark or infringing upon your trademark.

 

And there’s so many different things we’re going to dive into. So I’m going to go ahead and get right over to the episode. However, I want to make sure that you know, that this is part one of two episodes where we have Francesca on the show. And so next week we’re talking all about copyright protection and today is all about trademark. At the end of this episode,

 

you will know if you need to file for trademark protection, you will understand the difference between a wordmark and a design Mark, and you’ll know where to start in your protection process. Everything we’re talking about here can be found@theshownotesbyvisitingusatsweetlifeco.com. This is episode number 221. And one last thing we are going to be live with has got on clubhouse the Wednesday that this show drops.

 

So that will be Wednesday, April the seventh at 12 o’clock Eastern time. So if you were not following me yet on clubhouse at April beach, and you want to connect with Francesca in, take your questions from this episode to her, live in clubhouse, then make sure that you join us. And you can simply do that by following me at April beach on clubhouse and turn on the little bell for the notifications.

 

And you will get notified when we’re going live, which will give you access to Francesca. It will give you access to this room. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s business training.<inaudible> Hi everybody. I am so excited to be joined by Francesca Wittenberg, who has been instrumental in helping our business, make sure that everything that we have is our ducks in a row.

 

If you will say, and she’s here joining me on the podcast today, talking about quite a few very important legal foundations that you really need to have a no for your business. And so Francesco, welcome to the show. Thank you so much for being here. Tell everybody a little bit about yourself in UHIN, who you serve and really how you got to where you are right now,

 

professionally. Thank you so much, April. I’m super excited to be here. My name is Francesca Pittsburgh. I go by the trademark attorney on Instagram and I’m an IP lawyer. We’re going to talk about what IP is, but basically I help creators businesses, anyone who has created something using their intellectual creativity and especially people who are trying to monetize that I help,

 

whether it’s trademarks, copyrights, helping businesses get started to monetize and protect what they created is what I do. And I service really a variety of industries. I have fashion experience, story brands, online businesses in particular, and navigating how to protect content and all of the assets that you’ve created online. That’s really been my niche for the past year or two.

 

And, you know, I got started by going to law school. I had no idea what intellectual property was like most people. And I thought it was so amazing how, what you create are your real assets. These are real things that you can command. You can protect, you can sell. So I really fell in love with that. And also helping businesses get off the ground.

 

I feel like I’m able to kind of give back really help people launch. And so I got into it. I worked at a small IP boutique. I also had experience working in the legal departments at Prada and Tory Burch and the international jewelry brand from there. I really got the bug and I just wanted to learn everything in anything about intellectual property, in whatever industry.

 

And then I worked at the world’s biggest law firm called Dentons. I worked in Manhattan and Brock center for a little bit over three years, and then I made a big change. Yeah. I mean a big change becoming a partner at an IP boutique firm, meaning we only do intellectual property from start to finish like firms located in LA, but I’m based in New York and New Jersey.

 

I can service clients everywhere. And since September, I’ve just been really hitting the ground, running, helping a lot of online businesses, connecting on clubhouse, meeting people like you April. So I’m super excited to share my knowledge with everyone today. I’m so excited that you’re here and you know what? You do this super hyper niche area of serving online businesses.

 

I mean, you help our listeners protect their ideas and protect their services and their programs and their courses and their actual digital products, which is absolutely right on. And I know that there are so many people in this business space that are creating content that are creating different assets and what we call IP that have no idea, even the first step on, on how to protect that.

 

So let’s go ahead and start there. What actually is IP? What is intellectual property? Sure. So intellectual property refers to creations of the mind. They are inventions designs, creative works, brands, slogans, or anything that you’ve created kind of creatively. And so the law is divided up into certain categories and I like to call it, you know,

 

you have your IP toolbox. So there’s certain tools that you can use to protect whatever it is that you created or your business there’s patents, which protects inventions. Sometimes it protects certain ways of doing things processes, and it also sometimes protects designs. If it meets certain thresholds, then there’s trade secrets, which kind of works in tandem with aunts. If you’re not eligible for a patent may be able to protect confidential and secret information that is proprietary to your business so long as you’ve kept it private and you haven’t publicly disclosed it.

 

Then what we’re really going to focus on today is trademarks and copyrights. Trademarks are your brands. They are the symbols. And the names that you have created to tell that this is my business. I April beach am the owner of your signature offer. I upgraded this course, and that is my protectable content. The function of trademarks are to point to the source.

 

And then there’s copyright. Copyright is the creative regime. It really extends to creative, works such as content photos, certain texts, if it’s eligible videos, website layout. So, you know, just by saying that alone, there are so many different tools that you can use to protect an online business. And so we can talk about that. Wow.

 

Okay. So in, this is exactly why, I mean, just in that definition that you just gave, you talked about four really important areas that our listeners can and should be possibly if they qualify, protecting what they have created and what they plan to create. And I really want to dive specifically into trademarks today and we’re going to have Francesca back on the show.

 

Everybody don’t worry, and we’re going to be diving into other things as well. But I think this is really the most important place to start out. You know, just in my, your signature offer master class, we were having this kind of behind the scenes conversation about this. And even those students of mine that have been in business for over a decade are just almost like in this panic mode when this conversation came up because they realized they might not have done things correctly.

 

And so that’s why I’m really excited to dive into trademarking today. So first of all, I understand that there are two types of different trademarks that you can protect. Is it like a design Mark and a word Mark? Can you explain what those two different types of, of marks are to our, Yeah, I get asked all the time I have a brand name and I have a logo,

 

which one should I file for what’s protectable? And the short answer is that the word market itself, if you file an application with the government, just for the word in standard characters, that will automatically protect the name and any siloization. So if you go to re rebrand and change your logo, if you have a wordmark registration, that’ll extend any specializations colors,

 

whatever format. So we do searches for the word. And if that’s available, I usually say, go for the word Mark, but you’re right, that sometimes clients will have, let’s say it’s not just a script, right? Let’s say that they came up with a unique character or some sort of interesting artwork that they have in a circle next to the word,

 

a good example of this is target, right? You know, target has the word target and red, and then you’ll see the bullseye above that bullseye they use as a trademark. So they could file for the word target without a stylization and be protected. They can also file just for the bullseye, which is the design element, and that will be protected or they can file for a lockup version,

 

which includes the word and the design. So there are a variety of ways and it really is case by case specific, but more importantly, it’s about budget. And I always tell clients, start with your corny for your forklifts and services, because it can get very expensive. And also as a point of strategy, it may not be worth filing for every single variation of the bark.

 

Just start with your core name and your core goods or services. Okay. And who needs to file trademark protection? Let’s kind of really cover some basics like who needs it. You know, what’s funny is that if you were asking this question 10, 15 years ago, the answer different, it used to be fortune 500 companies had trademark lawyers and they were the ones Coca-Cola Pepsi,

 

big brands were the ones registering trademarks that has completely shifted with online businesses. And I think we need to take a step back and explain an important concept April that you and I have discussed. So in the United States, trademark rights are based on use. So I’m sure all of you have one point or another. Someone has said to you, Oh, you don’t need a trademark right now.

 

You don’t need to file the trademark. You have rights just based on use, just continue to use the problem with that is, like I said, 15, 20, 30 years ago, that wasn’t really an issue because you were a store in one particular market in one city, right. Or your restaurant, or you were consulting in one area in person.

 

So it didn’t matter. Really. If someone was using the same name, you’re in New Jersey and someone’s using it in LA necessarily. So the law as it States is you have Commonwealth rights. Your rights are limited to that, to where you’re actually using who you’re servicing with online businesses that has caused to be blunt chaos, because how do you prove where your servicing clients by being on Instagram online,

 

you know, having websites that technically target and market, not only all 50 States, but even outside the us. So the way that you get around those issues is by filing the application with the government, having a registration gives you a presumption of rights in all 50 States. So that way, if someone is using your name, all you have to do is send them that piece of paper.

 

That’s triplicate of registration and show them that you’re the owner and they should in theory. Got it. So many questions that, and I’m obviously, you know, I’m bringing questions from clients that I, that I know have been asking as well. So let’s kind of start back at the beginning. If there’s somebody who’s listening to this and they have program that they’ve named,

 

let’s say it’s best business, one, two, three, or whatever that they have been using for a long period of time. What are their first steps as of now versus somebody who hasn’t even, who’s coming up with a new name, let’s start with the established people that are saying, Hey, listen, my company name isn’t registered my program, or my course name or my mastermind name,

 

isn’t registered. What should those people that are already have an existing piece of work that they own do at this point in time? Yeah. And I think it comes back again to budgeting and understanding that a little bit of money can go a long way if you’re strategic about it. What I like to do differently, I think than most lawyers is clients come to me and say,

 

Oh, for test that I want to file for this. I say, let’s take a step back. We can definitely file. But did you protect your brand name, your core name? I have clients that come and say, Oh, this slogan, I want to protect it’s brand new and it’s new. No one’s using it. So what I do is I do an IP audit for a lot of clients,

 

but when they come to me, I say, let’s just take a step back. Let’s look at all of your websites, all of your courses, and let’s figure out what’s the most important instead of you deciding or someone telling you which trademark to file let’s think strategically and say, what are your most core names, your core content and connection with your core services?

 

Because it gets very expensive very quickly. So I would tell people who are using, and they haven’t had anything registered to really, you know, touch base. I’m happy to do this, to discuss and do the IP audit, but you can also do it yourself and just think like, what are the core names that I’m using and for what particular services,

 

and then get those on file. Yes. Maybe you came up with like a super cool name slogan that you’re using, but are you really going to be using that in six months to a year versus I would say the name that you’re operating under, that may be the first starting point. So I would say, you know, either check in with an IP attorney who can do that with you,

 

for you, or think about it and then get those on file. Okay. And let’s make sure that you guys don’t have to wait until the end of this. If you want to connect with Francesca for that IP audit, find her on Instagram at the trademark attorney. And she actually has a link in her bio on Instagram. You can just schedule a call with her.

 

So we’re making it really easy for you. It’s the trademark attorney on Instagram. And plus she has amazing videos and things on there that you guys will love. And you can schedule a call to set up that IP on it. Okay. So for those people that are listening and they’re new in business, and they’re just trying to, they’re thinking, wow,

 

I really want to name my company. This, what are their first steps? You know, let’s actually talk about how to search the U S PTO. What is that process and is, Yeah. So the first thing is to come up with a name, if you’re just getting started, I would say, come up with names that try to not be so descriptive because as business owners and content creators,

 

we want to express to our viewers what exactly it is that we’re offering. But unfortunately that falls on the lower end of protection. On the trademark scale, the really strong trademarks are the ones that are either made up terms like Google or terms that have nothing to do with the product that you’re selling, like Apple computers. Then there’s this sweet spot that a lot of marketing people like,

 

like April, you do this really well. You will find names that kind of hint at what you’re doing, but don’t literally describe like your signature offer. So those are the sweet spot they’re called suggestive marks. But anything like weaker than that is, is a little bit more descriptive in there. You can still get them as trademarks. They’re just a lot harder to protect and enforce,

 

meaning other people may be able to use them. And then when you go to create a brand that you’re about to invest a lot of money in, you know, you need to think about these things. So the more made up the less related to the actual things that you offer the stronger and the better. Okay. So for those people that are like,

 

okay, this is what I want to do. How do they go search and see if somebody already has that trademark registered? Yeah. So let’s say you came up with an awesome name. The first thing to do is go check on the U S T o.com. That is the government website. The government has a database of registered and pending trademarks. You can plug in the Mark,

 

but unfortunately it’s not very user-friendly. For example, if you put in the Mark, it really may only give you either the exact spelling, maybe with a space, but it really is very limited. It’s going to look for the exact Mark. So if you did work with the trademark where like, for example, I have special software where I plug in the Mark,

 

I plug in the goods and services and then with its AI software, it’ll pull up marks that are medically similar. Maybe they have a translation and a foreign language, and all of those can be potential issues that you’re not going to find yourself. However, for your due diligence. The first thing to do is for you to check on usp.gov, because maybe there is a dead hit,

 

and you’ll find that there, the next thing to do, though, it’s not enough just to look on you as PTO, because there could be people who are using the Mark that may not have a registration. As I mentioned before, trademark rights are based on use. So it’s really important to see who’s using and who can raise a potential objection. You check Google,

 

check, Instagram, check all those platforms, and then if it looks good, that’s when you go and you work with a trademark attorney. Okay. Okay, great. So you do your due diligence, you know, go, you know, was us pto.gov, not.com. It’s not geo OB do that check and then Google the heck out of it as well.

 

And I, I think that that is so important. I know that, you know, some people go, Oh, they’ll just search it and they’ll be like, Oh great, it’s available because it’s not popping up. And that is absolutely nowhere near enough. And then I can speak for experience. You guys, who are listening that I have had Francesca put our trademark names in her AI system and crazy things that there’s no way I ever could have found pop up.

 

So it is definitely an important investment to make. If, if you were in the process of growing your company and you have IP that you want to protect. And so I think that’s really an important thing. So any other last words today, when we’re talking about trademarking moving forward or any other things that our listeners need to know that are often missed,

 

maybe common questions, basically, what am I not asking that I should be asking you? Yeah. Number one, we’re in the middle of a, of a pandemic and a financial downturn. So you’re going to have a lot of people who may not want, or may not have the deans to file trademarks. So I will tell you there’s things you can do to try and protect your name,

 

even without a registration start using those TM symbols. And you may not know what that is. So a TM symbol, now that I’ve mentioned that you’re going to see them everywhere. It means that people are claiming rights to a name or design as a trademark. They’re saying I’ve created this. And when people look at it, it points to me means that’s my website,

 

it’s my services, whatever it is. So you came up with a slogan, or if you have your brand name that isn’t yet registered, put the little TM in the upper right hand corner. And what that does is that puts third parties on notice. So if you have another person to get the Google search went on and found your website, they’re going to see immediately,

 

Oh, this person is claiming trademark rights. I better back off. So that’s an extra element that you can do. It’s not as strong as a registration clearly because your rights are only limited to where you’re using until you get it on file. But at least it’s something. And I would say, think about budgeting for that registration, for some of your four names.

 

It may sound expensive. And I think it’s worth quoting. You know, you’re going to get people who are gonna do this cheaper, and you’re going to find people who are gonna do it more expensive, but my firm has a fixed fee package with a trademark search and the government and the filing. And it’s 1250, you know, that’s a deal,

 

it’s a deal. And I’m just thinking like the cost to respond, who would demand letter or to send a demand letter is that amount. So to get that on file, to kind of not have to worry, think about maybe budgeting that as part of your business process. Yeah. And I will say about, Oh gosh, it’s been about 12 years.

 

We filed a registration for a program that we were licensing to healthcare. And this was 12 years ago. And I think I paid, you know, well over 2,500 for somebody to just file that registration for me. So this is 12 years later, grand Jessica’s team. This is a deal. You guys it’s like the deal of a lifetime and it protects you.

 

And it really covers you. So we love that. So all of you who are listening, if you’re in this place, whether you’re new and you are just coming up with names of really, frankly, especially for those of you guys who have content, you have IP, you have things that you haven’t protected yet. You haven’t done your due diligence.

 

I don’t want you to lose those Francesca. Doesn’t want you to lose those. And so if you have questions about this, I highly recommend that you hit Francesca up for an IP audit. Again, she can be found at the trademark attorney on Instagram and she will, of course be back here on this sweet life entrepreneur podcast, again as well. And we’re going to be diving into copywriting next time,

 

which I know so many of our listeners have questions about protecting, like what actually is that? And so I’m excited to talk about that the next time that you are on the show. Thank you so much for being here and for all of your wisdom and pouring into our listeners. Thank you April. Thanks everyone.<inaudible> Wow. What an amazing episode.

 

Thank you so much for hanging out with us today. Again, join us live on clubhouse. You can follow me at April beach, turn on the little bell for notifications and you’ll get exclusive access to this room where Francesca will be here this week on Wednesday, April the seventh at 12 o’clock Eastern time. Taking your questions based on what we talked about on today’s show.

 

And don’t forget to connect with Francesca directly for her IP audit, which is a very important thing. It’s totally free. I don’t know anybody who shouldn’t take this opportunity up. She is absolutely a gifted expert at what she does. You can visit Francesca at the trademark attorney and she can be found at the trademark attorney on Instagram and on clubhouse. And on Instagram,

 

you can just very simply click the link and schedule a direct free complimentary consultation to get your intellectual property audit started. All right, again, this is episode one of a two part episode. Next week, episode number 222. We’re coming back with Francesca again, talking all about how to protect your creative works through copyright protection. All right, you guys have an awesome day.

 

It’s so great to chat with you and thanks again for tuning into this sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast.

Episode 218: Entrepreneur Sleep: How To Thrive As A Peak Performer – with April Beach and Mollie McGlocklin

Mollie McGlocklin SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Entrepreneurs Club on Clubhouse to join an upcoming room with Mollie and April

Who This Episode is Great For:

If you’re a sleepless entrepreneur, this show is for you.

Summary:

Sleep is affecting our businesses. Whether good, or bad, your sleep is connected to your company’s performance in some capacity. And, beyond that… our health and livelihood as humans.  But we all know that, right? 
 
If you’re like me – You have no desire to listen to a podcast that discusses everything you already know!  But this episode is different. Sleep expert, Mollie McGlocklin dives into tracking your sleep with tech, understanding Heart Rate Variability HRV, and simple small-steps you can do each day to work with your Circadian Rhythm. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know how your Circadian Rhythm affects peak performance
  2. Know how to read the date from your wearable sleep technology
  3. And have basic things you can do tomorrow morning towards more productive and healthy sleep

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome to episode number 218. And I’m April beach, your host founder of the suite Life company. And I am so glad to be talking to you again, usually on this show,

 

we’re talking about scale strategies, online, offer creation, how to create your courses or your mastermind and funnels and marketing. But we are all about building a business to give you the life that you want. And so that requires a holistic view on strategies for both business and life. And so I love doing shows like the ones that we were doing today.

 

And let me be completely clear with you about why this show really hits home for me. About two weeks ago, I landed in Philadelphia from Denver for a weekend to visit my oldest son who plays lacrosse for the university of Delaware. And I was on my laptop. The whole entire time got out of the airport, got in the rental car, turned on clubhouse,

 

and I was really tired. You guys, I had just gotten to this point where I had been going, going, going, by the way, I thrive on going, going, going, but I turn on clubhouse and I was browsing through the rooms of what I should listen to. And there was a room that popped up regarding sleep and it really hit home for me because I knew that this is something that I do not do well in this area.

 

Now a little bit more behind the scenes. I don’t like sleeping. I love being awake. I do really well from 10:00 PM to 1:00 AM. You know, the world falls away, everything’s silent. And that’s when I really thrive as a creator, frankly. And so I would much rather be awake living life than be sleeping. And that’s the way I’ve been my whole entire life,

 

but it’s really taken a toll on me and let’s even go a little bit deeper in transparency behind the scenes. What I used to think when people talked about, Oh, you know, I hit quote unquote, that wall. These are the things that I thought, Oh, you’re going to love me. Or you are totally going to hate me and never listened to this podcast.

 

Again, here’s the honest truth. When I heard anybody say or tell their stories about how they got like super tired and hit a wall. These were the things that went through my head, keeping it real. I thought I am stronger than those people. I thought that will never happen to me. And I thought I am born to thrive in like this balls to the wall type of a life.

 

It’s always how I have been. I love living like this. These people just aren’t built like me. Okay. Talk about really, really judgmental. And that’s when things like hit us on the face because it is in the face because that’s exactly what happened to me in over the last couple of months, I have gotten completely exhausted. The second part of this and why this episode is so important to me personally right now is that I lost my father to dementia.

 

And I realized that the way my brain is functioning is not the same way. It was 10 to 12 years ago. And for whatever obvious reasons that is, you know, age, maybe being one of them, I’m not taking care of my brain. And it is one of my greatest assets. And so when I heard our guests today speak on this clubhouse room about sleep.

 

I knew that I personally needed for her to come in here and deliver some insane wisdom to me as a CEO, as a business owner. And I believe that there are some of you guys out there that need to hear this message and what she’s talking about as well. Now here’s the deal. If you’re like me, you haven’t seriously, no desire to listen to a podcast that discusses everything you already know that you aren’t doing right?

 

But this episode is different. Our guest today is going to dive into tracking your sleep and understanding technology behind sleep trackers. And she’s talking about simple steps, okay? Simple things that you can do. You know, we’re not going to come in here in this show saying you got to get sleep, but that’s not at all with this show is about,

 

which is why I personally appreciate this episode so much. So let me introduce you to who our guest expert is today. Molly McLaughlin is a creator of sleep as a skill, a company that optimizes people’s sleep through a unique blend of technology, accountability, and behavioral change. She created this company from her own experience when she literally has had not slept well her entire life,

 

she had massive, poor sleep habits. And all of a sudden she found herself in for months. She dealt with insomnia in her background is in behavioral change. And so she went down this rabbit hole to figure out like, what is going on with these disturbances in my sleep. And she really went in a way that did not include sleep AIDS. And because of her experience,

 

now this company was born and she is an absolute expert at helping you know, how to really get the sleep that you need and understand sleep. And that’s what we’re talking about on today’s show. So at the end of this episode, you will know how your circadian rhythm affects your peak performance. You will know how to read the data from your wearable technology,

 

which was super cool because I wear sleep technology, but frankly, I really didn’t understand how to read the data. And so that is very cool. We’re talking about this on today’s show as well. And you’re going to walk away with some basic things you can do. First thing tomorrow morning to move towards more productive sleep in more healthy sleep. So here are the background notes,

 

everything we’re talking about, including a link to join the Sweetlife entrepreneurs club in clubhouse, where Molly and I are going to be going live. And she’s going to be chatting with you about your Entrepreneur sleep and peak performance questions can be found by visiting the show notes for this episode. There’s a lot of things in here and even more tools that Molly’s given you.

 

So if you want to know more about, we’re talking about Connect with Molly further, be part of this conversation and frankly learn right alongside me, visit Sweetlife co.com click on the podcast. And this is episode number 218. So let’s go ahead and dive in with Molly.<inaudible> All right. Hi, you guys. Welcome to another episode of the Sweetlife entrepreneur in business podcast.

 

I am so excited to be joined by my guest today. I’m actually found her on clubhouse. Many of you know, who’ve been listening that I am bingeing clubhouse and can’t get enough of it. And this is exactly why, because I get to dive into spaces that I never would have been able to before in find people like Molly. How do you say your last name off?

 

Yes. Perfect McLaughlin. Absolutely. Yes, I know. Is it phonetic? Is it not? Yes. And find people like Molly McLaughlin. I am so excited to welcome you here on this show. Can you introduce everybody to your area of expertise in super power? And just give us a little bit of background before we dive into what we’re talking about today.

 

Absolutely. Thank you so much for having me here. This has already been a pleasure. I can’t wait to get into more with you. I am the creator of a company called sleep is a skill that helps people optimize their sleep through a blend of technology, accountability, and behavioral change, and a little bit background on me and why I’m so obsessed with the topic of sleep and why it’s totally changed.

 

My life is that for so many years, I did everything not to do for your sleep. You know, every article you read what to do. I was doing the opposite in a lot of ways, but it really didn’t think it was much of a problem. I didn’t think much of it at all. Living in Manhattan as an entrepreneur, burning the candle at both ends stressed to the max.

 

And I just thought of my sleep as a lot of labels. I thought of it as I’m a night owl, I’m a short sleeper. I’m not the greatest sleeper. Oh, it must be in my jeans. That’s just how it is for me. And, and you know, a number of different things, but didn’t think of it as something that I would have much of a say of how to transform.

 

And I didn’t correlate when I was starting to get more and more sick at different things, you know, just getting run down anxious. I had guessed straight as I had shingles. I had a number of things that were just indicators, right. That you are stressed and things are not working. So, so yeah, and then it was not until I went through my own period of insomnia while traveling internationally.

 

So in different countries, you know, not speaking the same language and I cannot sleep. And it was really a lot of the entrepreneurship part of it that, you know, our businesses weren’t ready to be taken on the road yet. My fiance and I, and how it manifested was suddenly I can’t sleep. And the amount of anxiety that was happening during that period,

 

I went to the doctors in Croatia, got, you know, with Google translate and leave with their version of Ambien. And in that moment, kind of like, what is the game plan here am. I’m supposed to just take something like this for the rest of my life, that doesn’t align with my identity of who I think of myself and yet I’m desperate to sleep.

 

So what do I do? So what ended up happening was really just getting up under this area, going really down the rabbit hole of what it would take from a, what I learned to chronobiology and circadian rhythm perspective to transform my sleep. And then from that place, it really just snowballed into like podcasts, newsletters, courses, all of the things.

 

Okay. So you said so many things and we’re just going to kind of come together and pack it. But right now, I mean, your super power is helping high performers and entrepreneurs and small business owners have a healthy life and sleep. Yeah. That we all identify just like you said, I mean, I am you back in the past, right?

 

I definitely, I do not sleep as much. It goes in flows. I have an inconsistent sleep. You know, I have kids which brings a whole nother dynamic into that and I travel about five months a year. So with that being said, I think I have like a recipe for disaster relief disaster. And so I’m so excited to learn from you today.

 

And I know our listeners too, are going to be like, Oh yeah, that’s probably me. I’m like, so let’s start by just really unpacking this. So you said circadian rhythm. What is that for anybody that is not really aware of that term and what part of our bodies function in that capacity? How does that work? Yes. Perfect.

 

And I also want to say for what you’re sharing too, despite that being one of the lowest points at the time of my life was what it felt like, you know, just nothing is working. This is the worst thing is horrible. And yet I do now look back on it as being one of the best things that could have happened to me.

 

So if you are at any given spot in your journey around sleep, I think there really is so much to learn from it. It really, no pun intended woke me up and had me transform my life in ways that I don’t think I would have, unless it was at such a rock bottom place. So having said that, Well, just along the lines to thank you for saying that.

 

Cause I do feel like, I mean, I’m really transparent here with our listeners on the podcast. I mean, I do feel like, like I had hit a wall, I just turned 45 this week and I’ve always been able to push and push and push on a high performer, had tons of energy, always been able to do it. And it was just finally a couple of months ago as a first time in my whole entire life where I was so tired and I couldn’t push through,

 

I’ve still always been able to do that. I like, literally couldn’t think I literally couldn’t speak, like the words were coming out of my mouth incorrectly, but it was the first time ever where I feel like I hit that wall and I couldn’t keep pushing it forward. And so I knew at that point in time, and this was prior to Christmas that like,

 

I’m not healthy. I’m like, it doesn’t matter. I go to the gym every single day. All those things don’t matter. Like I knew that I was literally aging my brain and frankly, as with my father had dementia and these are all things that I’m starting to think about. And I’m saying, listen, I have really hit this wall and I need to sleep.

 

This is no longer something that, and I don’t want any of our listeners too. And this is the whole point of the show. Like, don’t get to the point that Molly did. Don’t you get to the point where I am, where I’m like stalking this woman on clubhouse. You guys help me. I have hit a wall. So we don’t want you to have to be to the point where I frankly am literally at this recording and where Molly was,

 

because how much more are you capable of being before you ever, ever get here and so on and so forth. So thank you for saying that. And that’s why I stopped you. Yeah, absolutely. It’s really important because I won, you know, I was reading nonstop, all these different things around how to improve my sleep and speaking with all these different experts and one thought leader in this area had made the point that when your sleep is not working,

 

there’s something that your body is really trying to tell you. And I’m not trying to say that in a loose, like esoteric way or anything, but I think that’s really important because how I was running my, this didn’t come out of a vacuum. This was from, you know, years of kind of a mismanagement of my time, my days my,

 

you know, keep pushing it to the next level. And, and so it occurred from a snowballing of that. And so what it really took was that to actually, for me to listen. So I don’t know the plus side while I at the time didn’t want to go through it. It actually was a blessing. And so I hope that there can be that message and that there is,

 

there are so many success stories on the other side of people being able to shift this area. So one, I acknowledge you for the sharing and the, the vulnerability there, because it’s so important. And to, you know, so then the, how, so what you said about the circadian rhythm, why this is important in this conversation is one just to kind of bring it back to the basics.

 

So no matter where you’re at and where your sleep journey is that we can always start to come back to one that this is a skill that, okay, so this is learnable. So let’s just let’s learn. So from the strategic rhythm perspective, one that exists on a spectrum was something that I didn’t understand. So the circadian rhythm is this 24 hour rhythm as human beings that we function within.

 

But that rhythm, the queuing system for that rhythm can either be on the spectrum of, from a strong side or weak side. And you might be falling somewhere in between that spectrum. Then I would make the argument that many of us are on the weaker side of that just as a modern society, how we’re, how we’re functioning and as diurnal creatures.

 

Yeah. This is all kind of coming from this concept around chronobiology the science of really time and how that impacts our biology as diurnal creatures. We are meant to be active during the day and at rest at night. And of course, in my example, I was doing the opposite, like, you know, upside down living. So we’re looking to,

 

how can we bring things back and align with those cue givers that will help our rhythms be strong? So we, you know, those people, those friends of ours that might go out, everyone goes out and out super late, but they still wake up at the exact same time, you know, early morning. And you’re like, how are they doing that?

 

That’s crazy. That’s actually what we’re looking to train for is that kind of specificity around just the automaticity of waking up routinely going to sleep routinely around the same times, but there’s tons of things we can do to get to there. Okay. Fascinating. And I know those people I’m married to one of those people that it doesn’t matter what time he goes to sleep.

 

It is like, this is what time he gets up every single day. Yeah. Okay. So talk to us about, you know, really why is this important for fully understanding for those higher achievers busy entrepreneurs? How does this fit into our, you know, whole life business strategy? Because to me, as a business strategist, the way I need to form it within my own brain is say,

 

this is part of my strategic business in life design. This is just as important is marketing and selling and other things. So it’s a very holistic approach to business and life. And so how for entrepreneurs and small business owners are really just high achievers who are listening to this, why is this so important? How does this really affect their everyday? And honestly their profit and their performance.

 

I mean, that’s what we’re really getting down to get to if that’s the driver great, that’s the driver, are you not making as much money as you could be because frankly you aren’t sleeping. Right. I’m sure that there’s some data and some correlation there. Absolutely. Well, so there’s so many places we can go with that, but I can just even say anecdotally that my fiance owns companies that help train poker players at the table that are high stakes,

 

lots of stress, and how to make those decisions, that their decisions in their thinking from a cognitive athlete perspective will impact, you know, possibly thousands and millions of dollars as a result. Right? So one of the first places that they begin is the sleep optimization perspective. And I work with tons of poker players in the management of that. And so I share that just because that’s a very tangible experience of at the table,

 

you can either walk away with lots of money or not. And so it’s kind of entrepreneurial in nature, but you apply that in the high stakes of your days of your, you know, business interactions with people and just that cognitive ability to show up consistently and reliably, like, you know, so in the example of myself for years, I, there wouldn’t be accountable illness around how I would be when I’d wake up in the morning.

 

It wouldn’t be like, Oh, okay. So for that next, really important client call or what have you, I will be bringing my a game. It wasn’t like that. It was like, I hope I get a good night’s sleep and you know that I can have that functionality. Right. Like, That’s me, I’m raising my hand. If you guys are watching the video,

 

it’s like, this is me. Yeah, for sure. Yes, exactly. Cause that, you know, and there’s tons of studies that will point to this. So whether it just error rates, if you’re sleep deprived and the amount of errors that you might make, if you’re taking scent, you know, test, or this is important for pilots,

 

you know, these would become life or death elements, but certainly from a productivity perspective, like you’re gonna have all your faculties available to you in those really times. So just to scale it back, I think of it as a couple of things. One, I think of it as super, super important for that productivity perspective. And also because I had so much of that mental health component in there with anxiety and stress and moodiness and crankiness and freak out,

 

then, then with that just, it provides for me just a really important space to be at a equilibrium with how I’m approaching the world around me and stress levels and anxiety levels. And we can get into some of the wearable indicators for that. So it’s not so esoteric. It really has some kind of quantified data behind it. Right. Okay. So yeah,

 

let’s go ahead and do that actually. Can you, I definitely want to talk about the wearables at the time of this recording. Probably if you’re listening to this six months or eight months from now, the wearable part will probably not be accurate enough today because the technology is evolving. And that’s what we’re kind of talking about behind the scenes, but let’s go ahead.

 

Can you start just by sharing a couple of steps for those of our listeners who listened, they’re like, okay, this is, I am April right now. I mean, just tell me like, what should I be doing to get on top of this, the process of bringing this into order. Yes. Great. Okay. So step number one.

 

What I actually say is despite the fact that a lot of what I’ll be talking about from the circadian rhythm kind of lifestyle perspective is that a lot of it’s kind of how to harken back to almost Hunter gatherer days and like, you know, aligning with sunrise and sunset. I’m not saying everyone needs to rise with the sun. I’m not making that at all,

 

but I’m saying that there’s a lot of things we can do to bring about that workability with those rhythms of nature, because that’s going to really result in higher sleep efficiency and quality of our sleep. And at the very same time, despite the fact that I’m saying that I’m also gonna promote the marriage of technologies. And so much of this technology is at the source of our kind of being off-kilter with the,

 

that relationship, ironically, then bringing in tech, I’ve found to really make a difference to game-ify this. So again, you know, down the road, you’re listening. What I would say is the first place to begin is a logging system of where your sleep is at right now is really, really eyeopening to people because often people say, I know I’m not sleeping well,

 

but then we try to get up under will. How much, how many hours are we sleeping? What times are we sleeping? How many wake ups, what’s your sleep onset look like? All of these sorts of things. And a lot of it is like, well, I don’t know some gray areas, a lot of question marks because it is it’s,

 

it’s such a hard area to track. So getting a proper or getting a sleep tracker of whatever at the time of listening to this is known to be one of the most effective on the market at the moment. Right. And follow them On Instagram or club ads. Cause I’m sure she’ll be up to date with this. So yes it is. She will.

 

I’m sure be talking about what is the most up-to-date thing when you are listening to this episode? Yes. I’m often fondly known as gadget girl by the end of the clubhouse. So we were talking about that was my name and not from a perspective that these are infallible, there’s still things you don’t want to just blindly listen to whatever stats are coming back.

 

You want to be aware of what they’re good at, what they’re not so good at, but either way, what they tend to be pretty solid at is are you asleep or are you awake? What time does that look like? But then also some health metrics that indicate the, your recovery that you attained throughout the course of the night. So all of those things will give us,

 

you know, kind of a window or insight into your sleep. So I say, start with that first place because, and years back, what it was, one of the first recommendation was keep a sleep diary, you know, write it out manually. And now you could do that, but also, you know, to begin to start tracking, it will be automated for you and often provide a way more insight that you might be surprised by some blind spots.

 

And along those lines, I have a question for you about one of those metrics with one of my slit trackers that I, that I had used in the past. And you mentioned it when, before we started recording this, which was heart rate variability, can you explain? I mean, I saw it on my sleep tracker. I, when I’m like Googling it online,

 

it was actually really hard for me to understand why that was so important. Can yes, it was a one Oh one on that. I’m so glad you said that. So this metric, this one metric you could devote into multiple podcasts, there’s actually entire podcasts that just talk about how to kind of understand this one metric and influence it. You’re not alone in the confusion of it better.

 

I’m like, why don’t I get it? So it, but it’s the reason why it’s I foresee one, it’s already ballooned in popularity around understanding this. And I foresee it being even more and more influential in our health. So the one, what is it? It’s heart rate variability HRV is basically the time interval in between your heartbeat and indicator of your recovery.

 

So if you can think of heart rate as kind of your load, that’s put on to you, you know, moment to moment, then HRV is reflective of how quickly can you recover from moment to moment? So it’s recovery of both mental elements of recovery, but also physical elements of recovery. And that physical can be about like the foods you’re eating the workouts,

 

you’re doing the air quality in your space, preexisting conditions that you might have going on. But then the mental component is really eye-opening to just how you’re relating to the world around you as entrepreneurs to, Oh my goodness. Like that can be really eyeopening. You get a lot of stuff on your plate and suddenly that that number will show that impact. And that can be a really cool way for those of us that might want to do that.

 

Push through, push through mindset. And I’m so one of those to start to respect the importance for recovery time and almost relating to our body, like an athlete would to build in that really next level of recovery so that you can take on all the things you gotta take off. Okay. Yeah. And I can see that I do understand a certain aspect and the correlation of that because when I used to train for fitness competitions and we used to do the heart rate training,

 

and when you know, between the things I was doing, like how fast would my heart recover between sets? And so is that kind of the same thing that we’re talking about here that’s happening in sleep that we’re measuring? Yes, exactly. So that’s why a lot of people are excited about particularly longitudinal nocturnal HRV. So there’s, you can measure, of course your HRV 24 seven and the nighttime HRV can be really eye-opening because that’s giving us an indication while there’s not presumably as much noise that’s happening because there’s a lot of noise on your measurement of your HRV during the day.

 

Cause you’re, you’re eating, you’re, you’re talking, you’re working out all these things. Whereas when you’re sleeping, presumably that’s largely recovery time and that is what HRV is all about. But so if you wake up and traditionally, this is very simplified because there’s way more nuances to this metric, but often the higher it is from your baseline, the more recovered you are and the more you see it kind of dipped down,

 

then that can often indicate that you are being more taxed, you’re stressed or you’re getting sick. So it’s actually really popular right now. That’s why it’s trending to with COVID that a lot of people are looking to this as indicators and days in advance of when you might even feel that you’re getting rundown, that that number is shifting. Then that can be a signal to really prioritize that recovery.

 

So those are just some of the ways that you can relate to it. But in the practical application, what I see with my clients is so all the clients are wearing wearables. They’ll see, Oh my God, my HRV is really dipping like significantly. So then they’ll prioritize recovery from whatever that looks like. So if they’re big time athletes, then they will adjust their training to really lower that.

 

And to take that off time, if they’re just entrepreneurs and they might kind of scale back some of their calls or what have you to really make a difference with that number and then get recovered in a way that can make a difference. The following day, That’s amazing. This is so much great information. Okay. So number one, log, make sure that we’re paying attention to what we’re doing.

 

Get a wearable let’s, you know, we’re not going to do with the archaic way of tracking when we go to sleep. I mean, there is just absolutely so much data out there that I’m hearing you say that it’s important for us to track know and be able to understand so that we can adjust things. So what else would you recommend for those people who are listening after they go through these first steps?

 

Like what type of common adjustments are typically? I know every single person is different, but are typically beneficial that you have seen with high performers and entrepreneurs. Yeah. So one asterisk that I would put for the wearables is just ensuring that you’re, we’re not getting like a no CBO effect by saying, Oh my God, I have so many friends that literally would come because I’m only getting 20 minutes of deep sleep,

 

30 minutes of REM or whatever. And so one just know that as of, at least this time, the recording, most of the hand and wrist wearables, they are said so much great information. I love what is available there. And the sleep stage classification in particular. So knowing is this deep is this Ram is this light, it’s not the best.

 

So to not get yourself all riled up around that part, instead focus on those basics that we talked about, what time did you go to sleep? What time did you wake up? And then some of those recovery metrics, so to stay in that zone. So that’s just my aspect around that. But then what I would say for, for all humans and particularly entrepreneurs is this concept of circadian rhythm.

 

Entrainment is really, really valuable to have a framework by which you set up your days so that you can strengthen that circadian rhythm. So you can be like your husband, right. And just kind of the goal is to be like your husband and to basically wake up around the same time off to go to bed at the same time, all of that comes from that.

 

So this is actually a term you can find in any kind of chronobiology textbook of understanding that you are in training your circadian rhythm, but that is from a number of what they call time givers that are external to you, that you are playing a role in from a behavioral perspective of getting so a couple of those that’ll just rattle off real quick. The top down most important one is light,

 

particularly sunlight. And the timing of that. So if you get nothing out of what I’m saying, then I would definitely say that first thing in the morning, how to train yourself to get even just a few minutes. I mean, ideal would be more, but a few minutes of sunlight outside. And unfortunately behind a window, doesn’t really count. It counts,

 

but takes much, much longer estimates with Jamie’s ICER out of Stanford, puts it at anywhere from 50 to a hundred times a longer to reset your master clock each morning, if you’re getting sunlight behind a window versus outside. So you want to just get yourself outside, but also expose particularly your eyes to that morning, sunlight, you know, you want it to be wherever you might be on the globe.

 

We’re aiming for that to be in the morning hours usually before like 10:00 AM of getting that morning light. And the reason for that is that behind your eyes is the super charismatic nucleus, which is your master clock that influences all your peripheral clocks as to what time it is. And why that’s important is then a whole cascade of kind of hormones and functionality happened based on what time the body perceives it to be.

 

And so we want it to be as consistent, those triggering systems as possible. So that’s that light in the morning and then dosing it throughout the day. But then you want as bright days as possible and as dim nights as possible. And when I say dim, it’s like post sunset, you want to be getting, I mean, really the, the actual recommendation is like candles,

 

but I know that’s not always so practical. So even like, I got like red lights over here. So, you know, you can, that can be another thing that you can bring in if you’re not willing to do the candles. But so we’re looking for very, very dim lighting that allow us to have our cake and eat it too. So versus like how things used to be sun would set.

 

We kind of go to sleep not long after for thousands of years now, we want to be able to still like, you know, do things, but we don’t want to impact our melatonin production. So that kind of red light candles or worst case scenario, incandescent lights that have more red in them, those can make a difference. So that getting that light right,

 

and then the next step would be temperature. So being mindful of really having this arc of your body temperature throughout the course of the day. So high temperature throughout the day movement activity, eating, you know, having engaging in lots of dynamic, cognitively demanding tasks, all those things during the day. But then in the evening, shifting over to fasting,

 

you know, relaxation, resting, connecting kind of calming everything down. So for entrepreneurs, what we do is create really like say layout of your day, where you have a set wake up time, he was set bedtime. And then from that place that had a Creek kind of two parts of your day, like a day mode and a night mode.

 

And then even just these little things like understanding like, Oh my God, when I have my food will influence the timing of when I fall asleep. And when I wake up and, or the amounts of wake-ups that I have throughout the night, things of this nature can be super, super empowering for people I learned so much. I never knew that about the sun in the morning.

 

Thank you so much. I’m like, literally I’m here taking notes. It’s just incredibly fascinating. And so the sun and the light, obviously all makes sense now that you explained that, but that would never be anything that would be, you know, just obviously common knowledge to those of us who aren’t experts like you. And so thank you so much for sharing that.

 

Okay. You have given us a ton of information. I have one last question that I’m curious about how you’re going to answer. Obviously I don’t know it, and that’s why I’m asking it. Is there a minimum amounts of sleep that general and I’m sure everybody’s different, but generally speaking that you believe people need to function in a healthy capacity. Oh yeah.

 

That’s the million dollar question. Everyone wants to know that one for sure. And you know, so some of the, the known recommendations are having us as it, a healthy adult, as it changes throughout the years, basically what age you are. But as a healthy adult than getting anywhere from seven to nine is the recommended amount that we’ll have thrown out.

 

There are other people that will speak to that you can, for some people might make sense to be in the, you know, six is range and what have you, based on their, the quality of that sleep. So I will say that it’s kind of split on that, that topic, but certainly what you can do is through the tracking element of things,

 

start to get up under that. The more we have some of these kind of top down, most important things addressed, then what often begins to emerge because, you know, sometimes you got to get past all of this sleep deprivation and built up time of variability, of sleeping all kinds of hours, and then not enough and ups and downs. So once we start having those structures often,

 

what emerges is more of your kind of set point for your sleep at the age that you’re at and at the health level and energy expenditure that you’re at each day. So you can have a clear understanding of that once everything else just kind of falls into order as well, is what I’m hearing you say. Okay, I lied. I have one, one more question.

 

Can you catch up on sleep? Mm, yeah. Good question. I know. Cause then it’s like that sleep debt topic was very popular for a number of years. So that is another one that is a bit of a point of contention, but there’s different schools of thought so well, if we go back to the conversation around dementia that you mentioned,

 

that’s a really big topic that’s come out of. This looks like a really strong correlation between sleep deprivation and neurodegenerative disorders. So whether it’s Parkinson’s, Alzheimer’s dementia, different things of that nature really linked because of the lack of proper cleaning. So glymphatic drainage was the coin, the term that was coined around this. So glymphatic drainage meaning versus lymphatic it’s glymphatic and glymphatic is the cleansing process of the brain each night during sleep,

 

during deep sleep in particular. And what it’s doing is it’s basically rinsing out with a janitorial process of your brain, of the buildup of waste products in the brain each night. And that’s what amyloid beta plaques are. Basically what’s left over. It’s a kind of calcification in the brain if we’re not having that proper amount. So the concern, so the reason I mentioned that is that we don’t see a lot of great ways to counteract that.

 

So say if you’ve been doing that for years and years, and there’s this buildup of this kind of a dirty brain, if you will, that buildup, and it’s very similar to brains that we see for late stage Alzheimer’s dementia or what have you. It looks a hand in hand and we don’t have a really strong way to then reverse that. So what I would say,

 

even from that perspective alone, is that we don’t want to rely on this kind of messy relationship to sleep where I’ll make up for it on the weekends, or what have you, because also if we just get back to the basics of what we know for great sleep, that the more we have that variability and the up and downs, one of the term for it is actually social jet lag.

 

And so social jet lag being this concept that, you know, Oh, around five days of the week, I’m really great with my sleep. I do pretty consistent, but then on the weekends, you know, I want to let loose and then you stay up late and it’s like three hours difference and, or more or whatever. And so with that,

 

then it’s, you’re having the experience that’s similar to, from a biological perspective, similar to jet lag. When you try to get yourself back on your normal schedule on Sunday night or Monday or whatever, but you didn’t go anywhere, but you’re still having that negative impact on your body. So the long and the short of it is it doesn’t seem to be a reliable method to build that sleep debt and kind of knock it out by having these long stretches of sleep.

 

Because then that also impacts cause quality sleep is a measurement of how your sleep was the night before the night before that. And they, before that. So it kind of all plays a role in there. So if you didn’t sleep so well, one night, often people will benefit from what’s known as kind of rebound sleep because you now, the body is really craving to get itself back on track and it will,

 

you know, kind of greedily get the sleep staging that it needs, but you can’t rely on that as a sustainable element because then that throws off your circadian rhythm. And now you’re getting tired at the same time. And it’s so frustrating. Right? All of that makes sense. Oh, thank you so much. I learned so much today. Thank you so much for being a guest on the show and we’re going to make sure everybody knows how to find you in the show notes,

 

but can you tell everybody who’s listening to this? Like, Oh my gosh, I need more of Molly. I need her help. I need her in my life. You know, what does that look like? How can people work with you more? Yeah. Well, number one, just thank you so much for having me. Thank you so much for your also just transparency and vulnerability about how you’re relating to your sleep.

 

And, you know, just gives us all hope in these different periods when we are struggling to hear, okay, I’m not alone. Cause you know, that’s really what I was dealing with with my sleep. So, and it’s takes courage to share that cause you could be like, Oh yeah, I’ve got my whole life together. And dah, dah,

 

dah. So, you know, I really, really admire that. So great work with that. And then yes, if you are struggling with your sleep, this is a real mission-based thing for me. so1@sleepasaskill.com, there’s lots of things that are available for free. We have a weekly newsletter, so I call it Molly’s Monday obsessions, cause I’m pretty obsessive about this topic.

 

And so all of these, you know, things that I’m obsessing about in the world of sleep and also kind of asleep experiments, lots of graphs and fun charts and whatever. And so that’s every Monday when you sign up for that, you also get a free downloadable PDF. That’s optimized bedroom, how to optimize your sleep environment comes right along. And then we also have a sleep assessment that you can take.

 

So whatever you’re dealing with with your sleep, then that will get you some kind of tailored advice around those areas. We have weekly podcasts with different sleep experts and you know, sleep tech and what have you. So all of that is available for free. And we put out a lot on social media and we’re really amping that up as well. And then if you are really struggling,

 

you need more than that. Then we do have courses and one-on-ones and different ways of working together as well. Wow. All right. Thank you so much, Molly. I’m definitely going there and I appreciate your time and your expertise and pouring into me and our whole entrepreneur community. And I am sure that this is going to be an important topic. It has been,

 

but really, as you said, moving forward. So we just really appreciate your expertise and, and being here with us today and it was such a pleasure to get to meet you same here. Thank you so much. You are welcome. Thank you.<inaudible> What a great show. Thank you so much for learning alongside me and hanging out. Most likely you knew a lot about this information.

 

Probably a lot more than I did, but it’s just such a pleasure to, to learn. And I took a million notes if you’d like to join Molly and me in a clubhouse room where we are talking all about sleep, wearable technology and all these things so that you can function at your peak performance as an entrepreneur, whatever that looks like for you go to sweet life,

 

community dot and There you can join by link our clubhouse club. You still need to join separately on clubhouse if you’re not a member, but you’re going to get an email with reminders and, and an invitation to this room with a direct link to this room. So again, you can go to sweet life, community.com to join our Sweetlife entrepreneurs club on clubhouse to talk to Molly live about this.

 

And of course, all of the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com click on the podcast. And this is episode number 218. Have a great day. And I’ll talk to you guys soon.

Episode 211: How To Fill Your Programs Using Guest Speaking – with April Beach and Heather Sager

Heather Sager SweetLife Entpreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab Heather’s FREE training: How to Build Authority as a Speaker WITHOUT Second Guessing What You Say

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs looking to get in front of your ideal audience and establish yourself as an expert in your space but you’re not exactly sure how to go about it through the process of speaking. 

Summary:

If you’re an entrepreneur and you’re looking to get in front of your ideal audience, establish yourself as a trusted source and solution, and sell more of your signature programs, services or offers, speaking is a great way to do that. However there are strategic steps that should be followed in order to achieve your ideal outcome, and what we learn in speaking to this week’s guest is that you can actually send clients away by saying the wrong things.
 
And this week’s show, Heather Seger, strategic speaking advisor, guides you through her four-step Speak for Authority method to fill your programs using speaking. Heather also dives into statistics speakers need to know, how to tell the right story, and expert insights to make sure you are speaking up in the right way, to the right audience, about the right topics. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand the four steps to the “speak for authority method”
  2. Know how to nail your message
  3. And understand quick strategies to choose your signature talk topic

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
Follow us on Clubhouse App: @aprilbeach


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 
 

You’re listening to the SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Welcome back to the show. This is episode number 211, And then I’m April beach. Super great to be connected with you today. We are diving in and we’re talking about how to fill your programs using guest speaking.

 

And we have Heather Sager, the one and only in the house. So what you can expect from today’s show is if you are a coach or a consultant, and you’re really good at what you do, even the leading expert in your space, but you’re having trouble getting noticed will speaking could be a really powerful way to establish yourself as a leader and get in front of the perfect audience.

 

And so today we’re talking all about the steps to do that and giving you the methodology from the expert herself, Heather Sager, but real quick, before we jump into that, if you’re new to hearing the show welcome, this is the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast, and we give you step-by-step business trainings that are so good. There’s no way they should be free.

 

You can find all the resources we have by visiting sweet life co.com. And if you’re interested in scaling your business, developing your signature program, signature method, signature offers in truly scaling your business to live life on your terms for massive profit. Then we would love to help you get to that place. Visit Sweetlife co.com and that is our Ninja skill. And that’s what we do.

 

All right, diving into today’s episode. This is for entrepreneurs in all stages of my start to scale up system. So we like to tag these episodes in advance. So, you know, whether or not this is really a good, good opportunity for you to learn and grow based on the phase of business you’re in. So if you weren’t sure what phase of business you’re in and therefore what you should be focusing on right now,

 

you can go and take a very short quiz just by visiting sweet life co.com forward slash quiz. And we’ll give you a full download of exactly where you are in your business, growth and development in exactly what you should be focusing on right now, so that you can grow your company faster. So that’s one resource I wanted to share with you. And along those lines of this particular episode is for those of you who are in phases two,

 

three or four of that start to scale up system. So hopefully that will equip you to know whether or not you should hang out with us any longer. And I’ll tell you if you’re in this phase, you are not going to want to miss this episode. And one other quick housekeeping announcement. I know that we have probably been talking about clubhouse way too much,

 

but I wanted to let you know that you can connect with us and connect with our suite life podcast, guests experts. By following me on clubhouse, I am at April beach on clubhouse, and we now host a weekly room at 12 o’clock, every single Wednesday. And that is Eastern standard time. So if you want to be on the hot seat,

 

if you want my eyes and your business to help you strategize your next steps, find us on clubhouse and subscribe to our clubhouse updates. If you are not on clubhouse yet, or if you just want the updates you can visit Sweetlife co.com forward slash clubhouse. And we’ll keep you in the loop of what’s happening on clubhouse while you might be waiting to get on the app and we will send you reminders and invitations to our upcoming rooms.

 

So I know that was a lot of information and you can find all the information I just shared with you and the resources for these show notes, which is going to be@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash two 11. Okay, let me introduce you to our fabulous guest on today’s show. You get to hear from Heather Sager. Heather helps entrepreneurs structure their ideas, clarify their message and hone their speaking skills so they can deliver a magnetic live presentations,

 

videos, and workshops to grow their authority, whether on a physical or a virtual stage, she’s spoken on stages around the world. Teaching six to seven figure business owners, how to grow their company using effective communication. She also works one-on-one with business owners to prep them for the stage and help you manage and prepare your message for the most impact. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode.

 

Again, all of those amazing resources that I shared and everything we’re talking about with Heather can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash two 11.<inaudible>. All right, you guys welcome back to another awesome episode here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur business podcast. And I am visited today by none other than Heather Sager in what we’re talking about is something that’s so important.

 

I know many of you guys have questions about, so we are immediately diving into how to fill your programs using guests speaking. So Heather, thank you so much for being on the show today. Give yourself an awesome intro, an intro that you deserve because you are a very powerful at getting people amazing results and tell everybody about what you do. Thank you so much.

 

I’m thrilled to be here. Thanks for the chance to serve your audience today and talk about pressure on an intro. I mean, I mean, honest, I will say behind the scenes, so I have followed Heather on Instagram and it’s one of those things where you’ve been connected and a little bit connected, but not completely connected. And I knew that you guys needed to hear from Heather.

 

So very excited to have you here. Thank you. Thank you for that. So, as April said, I’m Heather Sager. So I’m a coach for online Entrepreneurs and essentially what that means. I always joke that I teach people how to do the thing that most people fear more than death, which is public speaking and in the online space. It’s kind of funny because we think about public speaking back.

 

If y’all worked in corporate ever, how you think about getting up in front of a group and giving a presentation or teaching a workshop, or we think about speakers as the people who live their life on the road at conferences on big stages. And none of those things seem to really fit in the online space of coaches and course creators and online entrepreneurs. And what I like to remind people is the fact that as business owners,

 

we speak to people every single day. So we are already speakers. It’s not like a label that we just, all of a sudden adopt. We’re already speakers. And so I, what I do is I teach people how to do it with intention and purpose. So what they speak about actually connects back to not only what they’re passionate about, but also what they do in their business.

 

I think your voice has the potential to be a magnet for other people, for them to go, Ooh, I’m not only do I like her. I want to learn more from her. And the more that you get out and use your voice on different platforms, the more you pull people back with you that they’ll want to join your programs and hang out with you more and buy from you.

 

So that’s what I do. My background is my many entrepreneurs is incorporat where for years I spoke on stages around the world as a corporate trainer, where I taught actually entrepreneurs in the medical space. So doctors and their teams, I taught them customer service and sales to very taboo topics in the medical space tell you, as a 27 year old kid, it felt like teaching doctors how to sell,

 

how to talk about what they did, how to talk to their teams, how to talk to their patients. That was an intimidating task at hand. So I had to learn how to speak in a very different way. I had to learn how to be influential and persuasive with an audience who was highly skeptical of my experience, my age, everything about me.

 

And so that’s where I got my like big girl chops around speaking. That’s where I had to fight through all my own insecurities about being a, I was talking about being like a baby nugget on a stage being an unexperienced or inexperienced professional. Like I had to work through all of those mental issues. We go through. I had to do that in a very highly publicized,

 

highly criticized space, but I did damn good job. And I realized that while I love my job as a trainer, what I really loved was teaching people how to use their voice for good. And I got really good at storytelling. I got really good at the body language and the hand gestures and all those things that come with speaking that are more than just the message.

 

And I started getting people asking me, could you teach me how to do that on a stage? Or could you teach me how to lead a workshop? And I found all of my free time in corporate was teaching my peers and other businesses how to do what I was doing. And at some point I was like, I don’t want to do this for anybody else anymore.

 

Why don’t I just do this full time? So I made the leap like many do, which is, let me start my own business and help other people do the thing that I love. But here’s the kicker. It wasn’t just about speaking. It was about speaking with purpose because I think speaking is like gasoline on a fire. I think speaking is one of the best marketing strategies that we can use in our business.

 

And I think people treat it as a skill, but speaking, it’s actually a strategy. So many things that I want to say, right, right now about all those things. First of all, now you guys know I wanted Heather on the show buyer that was like, okay, we can just end it, just go work with other, and she’s going to help you be just this insane speaker,

 

but you don’t really, you said so many things though. So as business developers and obviously that’s what we do at the Sweetlife company, we help people develop their programs and we help them develop life-changing programs and offers and these amazing services. Right. And one of the things that they are always asking about is, but how do I separate myself from other businesses that are delivering the same type of results besides doing it within the framework of my program?

 

Like how do I stand out? And it always comes back to taking the authority on what, you know, in stepping out and speaking about it. So that’s the first thing. And I can’t wait to dive into the strategies we’re going to talk about here today on the show, but something else that you said that it’s so true is that you’re speaking to people all the time.

 

It doesn’t always have to be a webinar or an actual live event. But when, as an online entrepreneur, when you have the opportunity to actually speak to somebody and take them on a journey that you have pre crafted, it is a skill. And that’s how you get people to follow you that are the right people. And I, I want to just kind of pause for a second saying,

 

even if you’re listening to the show and you’re like, wow, I, you know, speaking doesn’t fit into my business model, listen to what Heather’s saying, because you’re already speaking. So let’s make it so you don’t suck at it, right? Let’s make every single moment that you are having the, honestly, the privilege, just like I just felt very blessed and privileged that people listened to the podcast.

 

Right? All of us, when somebody is listening to what we have to say, it is a very unique opportunity and a privilege to be able to speak to these people. So what we say and how we say it is incredibly, incredibly important. So just love everything that you said there. And I appreciate how direct you are about the importance of this.

 

So you help establish business owners really take the lead in doing so by speaking an increase. What I love of course is the sale of their programs. Talk about how you do that. You have a very special method and I’m going to tout Heather’s method here for a second. By way. If you all don’t have a method we need, we want you to have a method to make you known into gain the trust of the people.

 

You’re leading. Talk to us about your method in what is that called? And can you guide us through your method today? Yes. 100%. I love methods. We were sharing our love of frameworks and methods, and just easier ways to help people understand what it is you do, right? We all think things make sense in our own heads, but really our own heads are a very special place that only we understand.

 

So we have to be able to articulate them. So my signature method that I teach inside my program speak up to level up. It’s where I teach online course creators and coaches, how to leverage speaking in a way that’s going to grow their business. We walk through something. I call the speak for authority method. And the reason why we call it the speak for authority method is every business owner has different goals related to speaking.

 

Some people might be like, Hey, I want to get paid to speak $10,000 for a keynote or $40,000 for a keynote. That’s one strategy. But when it comes to speaking, there are several strategies that you can apply. One can be growing your revenue in your program. So selling from stages, another could be driving leads to your social media accounts or leads to your list or leads to your offers.

 

Another one could be just not peeing your pants. When you go live on a platform, it could just be growing your confidence. But I think throughout all of it, speaking is like a business card for your business and all of these, their authority boosting activities that when you grow your authority, you have the ability to charge more, get on better stages network with the people that you want to network with,

 

collaborate with the business partnerships you want to have when you have authority, which is clout, where people see you as the go-to in your field, it seems like doors open naturally. So if you aren’t known, if people don’t know who you are, you could be the best at what you do, but until other people point at you and say, she knows what she’s doing,

 

or he’s an expert in this, by the way you don’t say you’re an expert. You let other people do that for you until that moment comes. It doesn’t really matter how good your program is. You have to articulate it, make it sound like a big deal and get other people talking about it. And that’s where growing your authority becomes a really important thing.

 

Wow. Okay. Yeah. So talk to us about this, speak for authority method. And I love how you preface it by saying that the reason why it’s so important is because all these goals are absolutely important and they do apply probably to every single person listening to the show. So what is the first part of this method? Where does somebody start when they want to take action on that?

 

Yeah. You’re going to love this one because this goes right up your alley of what you teach, which is number one is nail your messaging. What I mean by that is you have to nail, who are you talking to? What do you have to offer? And how do you talk about those core offerings, your messaging? So, what’s interesting is the first time I taught my program,

 

when I started working with groups of entrepreneurs versus one-on-one, I started by going, let’s create your talk and I would start extracting ideas out of their head and formulating a signature talk with them. And what I realized pretty quickly was, Oh my gosh, this was the first time they were vocalizing their ideas. And some of them didn’t even have their programs fully formatted or organized in a way that really got people Results.

 

So I found out, you know what, when people start moving from just writing down their ideas or drawing out their ideas, when they start articulating their ideas, that’s when they realized, Oh, this either makes sense or it doesn’t. So step number one, nailing your messaging means that you are not just thinking off, like speaking off the cuff or winging it all the time.

 

Here’s this big myth that happens a lot of times when we see experts where we see influencers on a podcast or on a video or on clubhouse, we think, Oh, they’re just so naturally gifted. But here’s the thing. These people have been talking about these things over and over and over and over again, they know what they’re talking about. It’s not by chance.

 

It’s on purpose now, sometimes it’s by chance because they’ve just done it enough where they know no, but they have discovered what their core talking parts are. You have to understand what should you, and what should you not be talking about to lead people into your business, not lead them to other people’s businesses. Like there is a difference. You can talk about a lot of things,

 

but if you don’t have your messaging nailed, you could be providing a lot of education, but then serving them up open doors to have other people help them because they don’t realize how it connects back to you. Wow. Okay. And to totally put you on the spot here, at least as because everybody’s saying like, Oh my gosh, shoot, am I doing this?

 

Am I, cause everybody wants to be out there and sharing information, a great value. Can you give us an example of how sharing some information as in a particular way, may lead somebody to go work with somebody else? Yeah. I’ll give you me. It’s an example. Okay. I talk about speaking, right? And I want you to imagine speaking.

 

This is like this giant ocean of information. It’s in the, the marketing ocean. There’s so many different things we can speak about. And one or two times I did podcast episodes or interviews where people are like, Oh, speaking on camera, Heather, will you come talk about getting over your fear of the camera? And I’m like, sure, I love this.

 

This is within my wheelhouse. But what I realized is when I would start doing all these interviews that were specific to getting over your fear of the camera or going live on Facebook or all these things, which I, I do teach, what I realized was my messaging was really specific to social media speaking. And my offer is how do you speak on all kinds of stages?

 

Get your messaging down, use guest stages. Yes. Use your stages. But the speaking on lives and Instagram stories was such a minute point. I don’t want people to know me as the person to help you get over your fear of the camera. Like that’s not what my program is about. Even though I have episodes around it, like the messaging while it was a good,

 

relevant topic, it wasn’t core messaging. That’s going to drive back to my program, speak up to level up. I mean, it’s a lesson in my program, but it’s not the core concept. So I think a lot of times this thing that happens is we’re like, Oh, it’s within the wheelhouse. Well, you have to think about, is it like a neighbor down the block in your content?

 

Or is it like on the block, like on your street, in the house that you’re trying to attract people to. Wow. That’s so important. Okay. I’m just going to take a little, left-hand turn tangent here as we are all diving into, or as many people as we possibly can, we’re driving into clubhouse. For example, I just did the recording of this hosted a,

 

a welcome event room for a bunch of women entrepreneurs last night. And they were all asking, what should I be talking about in these rooms? And I felt grateful now. I didn’t totally lead them astray, but it was always coming back to cause I’m obviously not the speaking coach, but it was always like, what do you want to be known for?

 

And I think that this is so exactly important what you said, because there are so many things that we can talk about. I can, you know, talk about a million components of, of our program as well in, in the ways and other things that are like supporting evidence, supporting document, but not that may nugget. So what I’m hearing you say in what I want,

 

all of you guys to hear is what Heather saying is that go for go after what you want to be known for. This is also important why we have your signature program created so we know what we’re selling people into. So it aligns with your program so important. And I think that there are so many people that are just looking for any opportunity to get in front of an audience that they are willing to speak on.

 

Oh, I can speak on that. Oh sure. I can speak on that. And what you’re saying is that is not strategy. Let’s be very strategic and make sure that in the little amount of time that somebody is willing to give you attention, to hear what you have to say, that you are making a good use of that in establishing an understanding of who you are,

 

who your brand is and the, in the end Results you provide bingo so power. And let me give you a visual for that, because I want to make sure hearing me say, don’t ever talk about those things. Right? Okay. I want you to imagine, do you remember back in, I don’t know if some kind of math class, when we were in school,

 

that something called a scam. I think it’s called a scattergram. It’s like the graph that you would draw with the dots. And it’s like, when you would have a point, it’d be like all these dots that you’d look for the trends of the dots. Maybe this is a terrible example, but go with me here for a second. I’m sticking.

 

Yeah. You guys should see behind the scenes in the recording. I’m like, ah, So if you think about like the dots, like mapping different coordinates, but I want you thinking about is you want to map like the bulk of your coordinates. I E the bulk of your speaking to your signature offer. But if you have a little dab, like,

 

Ooh, I’m going to talk about this because it’s sexy or I’m going to talk like, I’ll do a room talking about how do you do your voice on clubhouse, not what I teach, but it’s a sexy topic that people want. Like if my little scattergram, gosh, I hope that’s what it’s called. If I have like a couple of beeps and boops of topics that are outside of my core,

 

that is not going to dilute. I’m known for, it’s just going to expand it. But if I spend too much time outside of my core topic, then I will be unforgettable because there’s no repetition on my core topic of people seeing over and over again. Oh, I want to speak on guest stages. Heather, Sagers a speaking coach for online entrepreneurs.

 

Oh, you want to know how you speak into this strategy? Heather, Sagers the coach to help you with that. Like you have to make sure your repetition in your wheelhouse is happening in order to earn the right to have those scattered topics. Absolutely. Awesome. Visual. Thank you so much. I have no idea what you’re talking about because frankly,

 

I think I was skipping school in stoned, every high school math class, but just keeping it real with that being said, I can totally get the visual and that completely makes sense. My teenage boys are going to listen to this podcast and yeah. It’s cool. Your mom’s super cool. Oh, they they’ve heard all the stories. Okay. I am redeemed.

 

Whew. Anyway. Yes. Totally makes sense. Okay. So you’re going to be unforgettable the closer you stay to what I’m hearing you say, the core, the center of that. Scattergram like the primary message. So powerful. Super awesome. All right. So step number one is like, we’re still at step. Number one, you guys, this is our goal.

 

The information that Heather has given you here. So nailing that message in deciding what we’re talking about. So the second step in that is obviously an extension of that. The second step you say is creating the actual signature talk itself. Sure. A little bit about how to go about doing that. Yeah. So for those of you who like cooking, I love cooking.

 

Imagine step one is like your amazing applause where you get all your ingredients out and you know what you’re going to make. Step two was actually following the recipe to build your delicious food, whatever you’re making your meal. So your signature talk, you’re not coming up with random things on the fly. It’s strategic because you’ve already done that homework. So your signature talk needs to guide your audience from where they are to where you want them to go,

 

which doesn’t have to be like a hub, but a tricky to buy my program. You need to guide them in their thinking and equip them with the tools to be successful on whatever the transformation they want. Your program just helps them do it faster. So your signature talk, it has to include stories. You have to be speaking to people’s beliefs. You have to be hitting that really good balance around insights and awareness and speaking to where they are.

 

But gone are the days where you can just talk about the why fluffy stuff for your whole talk. People hate that they know when they’re being sold or when somebody is bringing fluff. So people in today’s market, what tangible tips and strategies. So you have to balance your talk with both. How do you provide insights and teach people how to think differently about your topic?

 

You can’t skip over that because if you do, when they go back in their business and try to apply it and something’s off, you, haven’t equipped them with the right context for them to be successful, to be able to maneuver it in the context of their business, you have to teach them how to think. And then you have to give them some tips and strategies.

 

How I recommend people do that is you teach the why, and then you teach the what, and it’s gonna get a little technical, but I feel like your audience might love it. My format that I follow with people is you go, why, what, how easy model for a presentation? And you sandwich it with an opening story and a closing story.

 

Like not rocket science. It’s what I work with. Every client on opening story, closing story in the middle of the sandwich is the what, why and how, and if you’ve worked with April and you’ve been around her world, the what section is essentially your method. So you’re almost there. You just need to work on, okay, how do I get this messaging in?

 

And what’s the right place to talk about it in the how to make people hungry for more. But your signature talk should be like an accordion where you can deliver your signature talk in five minutes because you know your talking points, but you also can expand it and make it, I mean, a full day workshop, maybe even a full course, right?

 

So you should be able to know what your talking points are within your signature talk. And that becomes your business card on those guest stages. And it perfectly segues into purchasing your signature program. And I mean, this is just absolutely the journey that you take people on it and how you nail and get it and get people really understanding what you do and your zone of genius.

 

Couple of questions for you about the stories do you find? And maybe there isn’t a right or wrong answer, but I’m just asking the questions. I think that possibly your audience is hearing. We should totally do a clubhouse room on this, like in conjunction with the week we dropped this, we should, we should do a clubhouse room and take Q and a I’m here for it.

 

And that would be so much fun. So talking about really quickly about the stories, are they usually a story about another client, personal stories about how the expert themselves or the leader has overcome? Like what type of stories? I mean, are we making people cry? Does it depend on the context when we’re talking about stories in general, is there a quicker,

 

seriously? You guys follow us on clubhouse because Heather and I are going to do this. I’m just putting her on the spot right now. We’re going to house the clubhouse room on this. So just join our clubhouse room and you can ask your story. Questions, go to our Instagram. Bio is go to Heather’s Instagram bio. I’ll give you a little to give you a little teaser.

 

The secret to good storytelling is knowing what emotion you want people to feel. That’s the key thing. You have to be intentional with the emotions you want to evoke. So for example, when I was working with Tyler McCall last month, we wanted people to feel heart, but we also wanted to laugh. So we talked, we did a story about the time he went to forestry camp and was too embarrassed to tell his father that he had to take a dump.

 

So he had to go home. So like outside of the content, very weird left story about like 11 year old Tyler, that was one. But like, you have to catch people off guard, but you have to know what emotions are you going for? And obviously your stories have to have a point. There was a business lesson in that story.

 

I promise you. Yes. I’m sure there was, yes, we’re too. Like on the nose with our stories where like, I hate this people’s signature story where they’re like, let me tell you about my perfectly curated journey, which pumped me out of this perfect place to be your expert. No, I think it’s bullshit. Your audience is not in the exact same space that you were.

 

You can’t say I was in your shoes because I think it’s obnoxious and rude because you don’t know what their shoes are. I think we have to tell our journey stories differently in a more authentic way. If we want to attract the kind of clients we want. That’s if you want to have, I think, authentic, ethical, meaningful relationships that make impact,

 

you have to tell stories differently than what we’ve been told with the bro marketing online. Ah, here’s here’s my class name. There you go. Nice. Yes. Yes. Okay. Awesome. All right. Step. And we are going to do a clubhouse to room on this. So let me just say you go to sweet life podcast.com forward slash two 11,

 

which is this episode number. And we will make sure there is a link to how you can get into this club has room and has asked Heather your questions. Also follow us both on Instagram because we’ll post our events on our Instagram accounts to Heather. What’s your IgE handle at the Heather Sager at B Heather Sager. Awesome. Okay. So step number three,

 

we’ve nailed the signature talk. We are on a roll. What happens next? What’s the next most important thing? Okay. So I think as entrepreneurs, we get by a lot by writing things out and typing things in our Google docs to post on our blogs or whatever else. But if you want to speak, you actually have to speak. Which means the first time that you speak your signature talk out loud should not be on a stage.

 

It should be in the privacy of your home office, where you can sound like a blubbering idiot because you will. So, so step number three is becoming magnetic with our delivery skills. So you have to learn how to speak in a way that’s captivating and entertaining that serves your audience gone are the days where you can just show up and shoot a video on something good on a,

 

how to people’s attention spans are short. Even our live events are like on clubhouse. People can jump in and out of rooms quickly. So you have to understand that your delivery skills, it’s not just the words you say, how you say it matters more. So you have to think about, am I speaking in just audio right now? Or am I also,

 

do I have video when it comes to communication? There’s three parts. The words that you say, how you say those words and your non-verbals. And I think people put a disproportionate weight on those. What it works out to studies that came from Southern California universities in the seventies, show that in marketing, when we’re talking about things that have an emotional message,

 

which most of our marketing messaging does, 55% of what we communicate is our non-verbals. So our facial expressions, our gestures now posture over half of what we communicate, which is why video is so powerful in allowing us to see, Oh, she’s authentic. Or she’s not like video is powerful because you see those. But 38% of what we communicate is the,

 

how we say it. The, the pace, the volume, the emphasis, those kinds of things. It’s 38% leaving. Only 70% of our communication to our words. Now, as online entrepreneurs, we’re used to writing, we’re used to emails. We’re used to captions. We’re used to putting all the weight there. So it’s scary to think, Oh crap,

 

I have to focus on these others, but I see it as a gift. You don’t have to be so precious with your words when you’re speaking. In fact, I screw up all the time. If you rewind this back, I have misspoken. I have I’ve strung words together to didn’t actually make a sentence. I speak like war all the time,

 

wrong words, whatever. You just keep moving because your energy, how you deliver it in your body, language carries you and your message. So if you don’t get intentional with how do you want to be received? What kind of energy do you want to create for other people? What do you want them to feel when they hear you? See you listened to you.

 

If you don’t practice that, you’re leaving it to chance. And I don’t know about you, but I don’t, I don’t want to leave to chance what people say about me. Like, I want to be intentional and be like, damn, I want to work with Heather or, Oh, you can get speaking coach. That’s going to help you bring your energy up,

 

work with that. Like, I want to be more intentional. I don’t want to like be caught up and obsessed with what people say about me, but I know I can influence it. So I say, why not? Yeah. That’s amazing. Those stats are very interesting. I had not personally heard those before, so super, super surprising. And then step number four.

 

Okay. So how do we, how do we go about wrapping all this up together in this is your speak for authority method. This is your unique IP, your methodology. You have gotten people Results going through this process going through these steps time and time again. So wrapping this up, what’s that last really important thing that people need to do? Yeah.

 

So building your authority means you need to make sure that your speaking strategy fits your strategy. That you’ve outlined. So if you determined that speaking is going to grow your authority, you have to say, okay, what podcast stages do I need to be on? Which live events do I need to be on? Who would I need to partner? How do you identify the right player in your industry to help position you in that way?

 

If your strategy was to grow your leads, all right, in this stage, we’re going to make sure the freebie that you offer on stages correlates with your signature talk. So it’s not just a, one-off like, Oh, go take my random free training about something. That’s not what I’m talking about. You’re not going to drive that. So that’s what we’re going to talk about.

 

How do we get results from our speaking determined by the strategy that you identified as your number one, so making money, but that’s negotiating a higher fee. Great. If that’s selling your program, great. If that’s driving leads great, like it’s kind of a pick your own pathway there. You haven’t figured out what strategy you want for you. And then we have the template to say,

 

okay, how do I make that happen from a stage? Fantastic. How powerful is this? You guys? All right, let me make sure that I can summarize your four steps as clearly as possible, because there was so much gold throughout this process. So your speak for authority method that you just laid out like a red carpet here. I mean,

 

this is gold. You guys, you would have had to pay Heather a lot of money to get this information. And so make sure that connecting with her more, both on clubhouse, and we’re going to give you some ways to work with Heather after this. So the first part of your method is really nailing your message. The second part is really creating that signature talk.

 

The third is delivering it with confidence in the fourth. Part of your method is elevating your authority. Did I summarize that correctly? You did great. You did great high fives and applause for your articulation. Okay. Students, good students. You guys should see my, see my notes behind the scenes. I’ll just share personally, you know, public speaking has just always been something that I love to do.

 

And once I get up there and once I get on a roll, I’m great, but it is such a head trip for me to get up there in the beginning of it. And my biggest fear, I tried to figure out what I was afraid of. Cause clearly I talk all the time. I’m not afraid to speak, right? And I really don’t care what people think about what I look like.

 

I’m one of the few speakers that usually takes a stage in some sort of flip-flops. But what I realized I was afraid of is that people were going to leave that room. And this was when we were having, you know, regular events that people are going to leave that room unchanged. And I realized that, wow, what if somebody says that was a biggest waste of an hour?

 

I ever spent it scared the shit out of me seriously, forever, because I was like, gosh, I just want people to leave here and have some sort of a transformation. And I was taking that. I’m really an advocate for that. As you know, like that’s how we develop programs, your programs should deliver a transformational measurable result. And I wasn’t really sure that my signature talk was doing that.

 

And so if you guys are listening and you have whatever issues, like Heather said it at the beginning, people would rather wet, like die than speak on stage. What is that saying in the beginning? Yeah, it’s a good Jerry Seinfeld joke around more people would rather give eulogy or a B in the coffin than give their own eulogy. Right? That is awful.

 

We were all given a voice for a reason. We’re all called to do great things for a reason. And using what Heather told you guys today in this show and her method is going to help you get clarity on all of this. And I’m super excited and appreciate your expertise and your time here today on the Sweetlife podcast. So we’re going to do a couple things to wrap up this episode.

 

First of all, Heather has a way to get you started. Obviously we want to give you tools to take action right now. So Heather, where do people go to learn more about working with you directly? Yeah. So the speak for authority method we talked about today, I outlined this in a little bit more detail and at a little slower pace,

 

if you want to head over my free training is up right now. If you head over to Heather singer.com forward slash free, you can download that free training. You can watch it right away and go through it. And I teach you how to actually use this method to start driving leads into your program. So you can grab that. Now it’s really designed for coaches course creators and small business owners who do not have a large following,

 

but want to start establishing their self as authority. So that’s perfect for you, but also if today’s conversation was of interest and you’re trying to out what kind of stages would even work for me? Like how does this even play out? I think maybe we should go on a second date. So maybe let’s jump into a training. Let’s go on a second date.

 

So I have a podcast it’s also on that page. Heather sager.com post free. You’ll have two options. The podcast is the Heather Sager show and you get like a little Besta playlist that you can hear a little bit more around how I speak. You can get used to my style a bit, steal it, use it for your own and start getting more comfortable with this concept of what does it look like to speak on other people’s stages,

 

but also use daily opportunities to exercise your voice, build your confidence. And most importantly, be more intentional with your message that you want to share so you can make a bigger impact. I love it. Okay. So I’m looking at my phone here. If you guys are watching the video behind the scenes, looking at the schedule, this show is live on January 25th.

 

It is episode number 211. So that means sometime this week, you and I are going to host a clubhouse room and we are going to implement and talk to our audience and answer questions for people that are listening to this show. So I’m so excited to, we’ve been talking about like, you know, doing rooms together. So here is how you find out when this room is happening.

 

First of all, you can go to sweet life co.com forward slash clubhouse, and you’ll get a list of events and the direct link to the event so that you guys won’t miss it. Cause clubhouse is a lot of fun things happening. If you are not on clubhouse, then listen to my podcast that I recorded episode number 209, about how to get started on clubhouse.

 

And I just want you guys just to take a second here like me. I do have many notes. If you feel like you are struggling to be seen as a leader in your space, that you really want to connect with people on a more personal relational level relationships sell. That’s what sells and you want to get in front of your ideal audience and give them an experience,

 

transform them through your speaking so that they can work with you more. I highly recommend speaking in general, but specifically hitting up Heather to see how you can do that more confidently. So Heather, thank you so much for being on this show so much gold. Again, this is Sweetlife podcast.com/two one one. So episode number 211, we’ll have all the links that Heather mentioned cause we dropped a lot of gems in this.

 

So all the links, so you can find Heather and work with her more. And of course, a link to our clubhouse room when we get that scheduled<inaudible> Hey guys, thanks for tuning into the show to get updates and join Heather live in our clubhouse room, please visit Sweetlife co.com forward slash clubhouse. And follow me on clubhouse at April beach. If you would like to have Heather’s buys on your business and ask Heather your questions and also to our weekly clubhouse rooms,

 

every single Wednesday at 12 o’clock Eastern time. Thanks so much for tuning into us and I will talk to you next week.

Episode 210: How To Generate Leads With Pinterest Stories, Videos and Hashtags – with Laura Rike

Laura Rike SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab Laura’s Pinterest Toolkit

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Start to Scale Up System™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz

Summary:

Pinterest could be the sleeper tool you’ve been looking for to generate leads and grow your business. Pinterest is not a social media platform but a powerful tool that can increase website visits and bring you great new clients. But, few companies know how to use Pinterest. This episode covers the 101 of how to use Pinterest stories, videos, hashtags and more.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand how to use Pinterest stories 
  2. Have a starting plan to use Pinterest
  3. Understand the 101 of how to get started

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 
Follow us on Clubhouse App: @aprilbeach
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hey everybody. Welcome back to episode number 210 on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. Thanks so much for tuning in today. Happy January, 2021. We obviously just finished commitment week 2021 for entrepreneurs and small business owners.

 

And we had our fourth podcast anniversary birthday last week. So first of all, great way to kick off 2021. Thank you so much for being a listener of this show for the last four years and keeping us a top of the charts for business development online for entrepreneurs. We love you guys. If you haven’t had a chance to yet, please cruise over and leave us a review on Apple podcasts,

 

or just simply share this podcast from your Spotify up to your Instagram stories, or share this on LinkedIn. We appreciate you spreading the word about this show and just honestly how awesome you guys are as listeners. I get direct messages from many of you on Instagram and on LinkedIn, and just appreciate them so much. So we’re kicking off our fourth year with more proven business trainings that you can take to the bank.

 

We are known for giving you business steps and strategies that coaches charge thousands of dollars for. And it’s all totally proven. I’ve been coaching entrepreneurs for 24 years and the guests that also come on the show are proven experts in their space. So I’m so glad to turn you over to another guest expert on today’s show. We’re talking about how to generate leads with Pinterest stories,

 

videos, and hashtags. And let me give you a quick little backstory. I don’t do Pinterest. I’m not the Pinterest kind of girl whatsoever from a business strategy standpoint though. I definitely want to be where our clients are in where it’s a great place for our company to be, which is called the sweet life company for people to access our resources in the content that we distribute here on the podcast.

 

And so last year we got on Pinterest. We recorded a show about Pinterest with a guest expert, and my team quickly got to work implementing all those steps in our Pinterest engagement grew by something crazy. It was like 813%, which could be two things. Number one, it could show you how terrible we were at Pinterest before. So, you know,

 

there’s only way only one way to go is up or the strategies once are implemented with Pinterest. You can see almost instant results when you’re using Pinterest correctly. But with that being said full transparency, I still am not great at Pinterest. I’m grateful to have a team that does Pinterest. I’m not really on Pinterest. And so as an entrepreneur, I had a lot of questions for our expert today on,

 

you know, really who should be on Pinterest? What can you do on there? And especially all the new Pinterest stories feature. So on today’s show, we are talking to you guys about the fact that Pinterest could be that sleeper tool that you’ve been looking for to generate leads and grow your business. It’s not a social media platform. We’ll talk about that in today’s show,

 

but it’s really a great way to get eyes on your business and have people land on your website and increase your website, traffic and therefore generating leads. But honestly not a lot of companies are still leveraging Pinterest really well. So inter today’s expert, Laura rag is in the house today and she’s at Pinterest powerhouse who helps high performing business owners, content, creators,

 

and influencers grow profitability the right way with sustainable systems using Pinterest. She’s helped clients and students bring in over $50,000 in monthly revenue with her strategies. I mean, she’s really rad. You guys are gonna love her. And she’s been featured as a guest on podcasts like tailwind, ultimate marketer, twin cities, collective, and small business revival. And Laura lives in Minnesota with her family.

 

And she can be found@laurareich.com and we’ll of course, make sure all the links and everything we’re talking about in today’s show are going to be available for you guys in the show notes. If you’re new here then just so you know, you can find all the show notes and all the bonuses that we deliver with this podcast, by going to Sweetlife co.com, simply click on podcast,

 

and then you can click on the podcast number, or you can just type in the number of the podcast in our search bar. This is episode number 210. So welcome here to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast. And just a little bit of housekeeping before we dive into today’s show, if you haven’t yet held your seat or joined the early registration waitlist for my,

 

your signature offer masterclass, that is coming in February. So now is the time to get on that wait list. It’s a two half day intensive, so not two and a half days, but it’s two half day intensive that I’m going to be teaching in the middle of February. And this is going to teach you how to extract your own intellectual property.

 

Take a look at all the assets and all the great things you’ve created, and we are going to together build your signature program. Course mastermind, membership, whatever the business model of that is, we’re going to help you extract it all and create it into a signature offer. That’s perfect. Should give you the results that you want. Make sure that you’re joining that early registration list by cruising over to signature offer.com.

 

Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s podcast training.<inaudible> I’m super excited to be here with Laura Reich. And I will say that we did reschedule this episode because we’re both moms and that is what happens in our life. And Laura, you guys have to see this behind the scenes, this video, make sure you go to our YouTube channel and to our Pinterest,

 

there’ll be videos on there because she is glowing because she is beautifully eight months pregnant. And we had to make sure we recorded this show before baby, right. Number three, arrived. So we’re, we’re getting this out of here for you, Laura, welcome to the show. Thanks so much to everybody. A little bit about yourself. Yeah, for sure.

 

I thank you so much for having me. I am a mom of two boys with a girl on the way. So we are so super excited over here in this neck of the woods. And I am a VA gone rogue is what I call myself. So I used to try to do all the things and with a family that doesn’t work. So I picked one thing I love,

 

which happens to be Pinterest and design. And I have been going hard at that ever since and just love it. That’s awesome. Okay. And what is your URL? So people can find you, even though we’ll put all this in the show notes for you. Yeah, of course. It’s just Laura wrike.com. So it’s L a U R a R I K e.com.

 

Awesome. Okay. So today on the show I have a million Pinterest questions. So we had Melanie fountain on the show a while ago, almost a year ago, really diving into Pinterest Pinterest marketing. It was a great episode. I will say, as a case study, we took those like Pinterest one Oh one steps, and we tried them. And as a company,

 

we had crazy results. It was like we went from being nowhere on Pinterest, having random pins to, you know, having thousands and thousands of impressions. And it was like an 813% increase with applying some basic steps. And so I am a believer in Pinterest now, but I will also say I am completely still Pinterest illiterate because my, my team does it.

 

And I get questions all the time from business owners about, you know, still, should I be using this? What is this look like? What can Pinterest really do? And so today’s show is all about kind of dissecting some of those high-level business questions. So our listeners can, first of all, determine whether or not they should be in Pinterest.

 

So number one is this worth your time, number two, how to get started and you have a toolkit for people to get started, which I wish that we had had in the beginning, I will say for sure, you know, really what is this toolkit? How do we get started with this? But there’s so many things kind of spinning around with Pinterest.

 

So let’s kind of start, I would say, spinning around in my head with Pinterest. So let’s go ahead and just start with question number one. How does Pinterest rack up and compare to other social media outlets such as Instagram or LinkedIn? Yeah, for sure. Really the biggest difference is it’s not a social media platform like Instagram or LinkedIn. LinkedIn is been known for the more professional type connections and Instagram.

 

You have conversations and the comments and things like that. Pinterest really does not focus there. They really focus on you putting in the conversation into the copy and making sure that you have the keywords there so that people can find you when they find you. Then they read that conversation and they click through to the destination, which is where you can take it from there.

 

So it’s more search based and it’s more top of funnel based because you can utilize Pinterest to send it where those conversations are happening right now and bring in a wider audience over there. Okay, fascinating. So it’s SEO, it’s search engine. It’s a way to take a conversation and become the top of that question for you. Is Pinterest owned by Google or is it a Google product or something of that sort?

 

It is not, no, it’s separate. It actually plays off of Google’s domain authority and their own domain authority. So when you have your website and then you have a Pinterest profile or business account, right, you’re going to get more domain authority with your profile on Pinterest than you are your own website. Unless, I mean, you’re some super big wig,

 

but it has been around forever. Right? But like my website is not going to have as much domain authority as Pinterest. And so I really use that and play off of their authority to be able to bring people to my website. Very cool. Okay. So what businesses should be there. And so let me rephrase that question. You know, obviously who should be on Pinterest,

 

but as a business strategist, my brain works the other way, what buyers are on Pinterest, like who is actually looking for content to increase maybe their performance, their profit, their business ability or whatever it is. You know, we have a lot of marketing coaches, brand new coaches, video coaches, health coaches, a lot of physicians, a lot of attorneys and even a lot of CPAs that listened to our podcast are their buyers.

 

Absolutely. So there’s kind of two different ways that I tackle that for people. One, I am a Pinterest junkie, right. It’s my jam. So I’m always going to tell you, yes, there are buyers there to give you kind of an unbiased opinion. I tell everybody to go to the platform type in something that your buyers would be searching for,

 

right? Like what is the problem or the pain point that they are having and how would they find you? Other places on Google, on Facebook? Like what are they looking for? And if what pulls up underneath that search is offering or information or education that you can provide to them because you know how to do that as well. Then 1000000%, that’s where you should be listed because you’re missing that opportunity.

 

The other thing that I like to talk to people about is really when you’re thinking about buyers, like where are they? Right. Cause everybody has a different stage. And so we talked about this for a second too. Like, it might not be that they’re a startup or they’re established or whatever, but where do they aspire to be? So if they are someone who is earning three figures right now,

 

they’re not going to be looking for how to earn three figures on Pinterest. They’re going to be looking at things like how to grow your email list to earn five figure months. And that’s because they aspire to be in that position. So that’s also something that you need to kind of reverse engineer and think, okay, is my buyer talking to where they’re at right now?

 

Are they aspiring to be a five figure person? Are they aspiring to maybe lead a life where it’s freedom, right? And so they have more time in their day or their moms or whatever. And that’s really how you want to address it too, when you’re going about it that way too. So smart. Yes. And you know, there are always,

 

people want to hang out just you and I do too. We want to hang out with people that are just slightly ahead of where we are. Right? Those are, those are the best people that are going to hold our hand and grab us to the next level. And that totally makes sense that that’s the same thing people will be looking for on Pinterest as well.

 

How often should people post let’s actually talk about the content that should be posted on Pinterest? What is like the baseline, if you’re going to get started, this is how often you post. This is what it really looks like. Yeah. So it used to be an everything that I’m going to tell you guys here is how I handle it, right?

 

So I am not saying this is the end all be all. I’m not saying this is a hard and fast rule. You have to do it this way. This is what I’ve implemented for myself and my clients and my course members and things like that, where they see the results. So one of the things that I really tell people is it used to be pin 20 to 30 to 40 different times a day,

 

and you would pin your stuff and other people’s stuff. And really that’s not necessarily required anymore. What I teach is that you need to be consistent on the platform. So if you’re someone that’s just starting out and maybe you don’t have a ton of content out there, which I can try to prove you wrong, because there are multiple places that I can find content you have already posted online that can work for this.

 

But if you’re thinking content in terms of like landing page or sales page or blog posts, and you’re feeling like you don’t have a ton, then start at one or two pins a day, right? Even if it’s a time constraint, like how do I create all these pin designs? Start at one to two pins a day, then start to work your way up.

 

If you’re someone that’s been blogging or you have tons of an audience, and you’re looking to really expand on that and you know that you have tons of content, then start hire. We did a case study actually on my website. It showed, even though they had a smaller audience and the other account had a larger audience, one pinned, I think it was like seven times a day.

 

And the other one pin 21 times a day, they still saw the same incremental increases on their own accounts because they were being consistent. And it was the quality over how often they were posting that gave them that feedback to know that that was beneficial. Wow. That’s so awesome. That’s super encouraging. I know because our listeners are like thinking like, Oh shit,

 

20 times a day. Like, how am I going to ever do that? Like that is not ever going to happen. And so that that’s super cool to look at the case study and the stats and, and really just the incremental growth that’s happening with. What’s being posted now, little tangent, what software do you recommend that people use to manage their Pinterest?

 

So I go back and forth on this. I personally use tailwind. I love them dearly because they have tailwind tribes. And that’s really like a community-based where you’re sharing ideas together. And then, I mean, sharing other people’s ideas and really having that community type feel like you would on social media. The problem with me only telling you to pick one platform that I see though,

 

is it’s not a good fit for everybody all the time. So if you’re out there and you’re like, I’ve tried tailwind, it doesn’t work for me. I apologize that it didn’t work for you. I love them. They are amazing. But what I urge you to do is go to Pinterest and make sure that the scheduler you’re using, whether it’s ladder,

 

whether it’s meet Edgar or whatever is a Pinterest approved platform. Because if it’s not, you set yourself up for possibly getting marked as spam or even shut down because they might not be following Pinterest best practices. Wow. Okay. I know that is such a fear. I’m so glad you said that because people would never know, know to even look, they’ll just think,

 

Oh, well, because this platform offers it does works. Great. I’ll just take this one, but it is so important with not just Pinterest, all the different social media platforms that whatever schedule are you using does it does abide by their regulations. So thank you for that. And we’ll go ahead and make sure we leave some resources so that you guys can find Laura.

 

And then also to some of the software tools in the show notes of this show. So we’re not going to totally leave you all hanging out there with that. So this week I was on Pinterest and I have a confession to make. I am never on Pinterest. I’m not a Pinterest girl. I’m just not okay. And so this week I thought,

 

okay, I’m going to go ahead and post a video. I think I had posted something to a LinkedIn story downloaded, like the little five second video. And then I, you know, distributed it or long all of our, you know, Instagram and LinkedIn story channels. And then I’m like, well just sitting there on this little five second video,

 

why don’t I just try to put it on Pinterest? And so I went on there, not knowing even that Pinterest had stories, I was just going to post it like as a little video on there and, you know, boom, I’m sure everybody who’s listening to. This is like, yeah, duh, April Pinterest is had stories for a while.

 

You know, but to me that was, I was like, what, it’s another thing with this story. So what are Pinterest stories? What should be posted there? What is the purpose of a Pinterest story and how can they be leveraged in the business? Yeah, for sure. So it’s actually not something that’s entirely like completely past you, right?

 

So it is new. So don’t worry about that. Some people have had it around for a little while, but it has now opened up to more people. And so a lot of people are seeing the get early access symbol when they’re locking in, there are two sides of it, which is awesome. One side is the, I really feel like Pinterest is stepping up their game in terms of providing an opportunity for content creators,

 

to be able to tell a story better, to be able to educate more. Because when you think about it, you only have one graphic and you can only have so much on that one image to try to tell that story and capture their attention. So the purpose of stories right now is to be able to have multiple images so that they can kind of tap through.

 

And it’s kind of like a slideshow. I teach people to do more of like step-by-step, or this is what I’m working through or behind the scenes, or like more of that conversation visually in those stories. The only downfall to stories that I see currently, which I’m hoping they open up in the future is it’s not clickable to an actual landing page. So you wouldn’t use it like you do a static image because you can’t get them to use that referral traffic in our research that we’ve done in the past few months,

 

though, it really does help increase the brand awareness and authority on your account. So you will see that if you are using it, to teach people things and to educate them and to provide more information for them at the end, Pinterest puts on a follow button so they can start following you on Pinterest. And it’s really bringing in that authority from that platform.

 

And then we’ve also seen the link clicks and the traffic and the leads increase on the other things that we’ve been consistently putting out there because of the help with the stories. Okay. Totally makes sense. And leads me to, first of all, say, that means I really failed on my first story. Cause I just uploaded that one video and I was like,

 

wow, they want me to share more. I don’t have any more right now. All right. What the hell? I’m just going to upload this one video. So first of all, how people find your stories if they’re not already following you, does Pinterest use hashtags? Yeah. So Pinterest uses hashtags. This is one of those controversial type things though.

 

Pinterest, a while ago said no hashtags. Then they said, yes, hashtags. Now they’re saying don’t use them a ton. So my philosophy has always been when they’re, when they opened up hashtags, don’t use them to keyword stuff. Use them within a sentence that you have put into the description, like use up your entire 500 character limit. And then if you have room and you can’t put on a whole,

 

a full another sentence in there, but there’s a hashtag or a phrase that still is relevant to what you’re sharing, then use it as a hashtag. Right. And just kind of take it that way. I’ve never done more than like three on a pin at most. So I don’t really see it being a problem. As long as you use it,

 

that way, those that have gone gung ho or followed the ups and downs of the hashtag or no hashtag I think are starting to not see the best results. The hashtags are still searchable, so you can still find them in search. So it really just depends on, on what placement you have for them in the description. So if your pin is about how to create a content marketing strategy,

 

and it’s like a download of a calendar or graphic, you’re not going to use a hashtag girl boss. I hate that hashtag by the way, every girl listening to the show is going to hate me for saying that I can’t stand that term. Yeah, no, it’s too general. Yeah. Right, right. You know what I mean? You’re going to put like content marketing or content calendar or a social media calendar or something.

 

Yeah. So two that don’t do the girl boss. I’m not a huge fan of that either. I like the terms that actually are like leading me somewhere. Right. Like that seems anyway. So I would say if you’re talking about content marketing though, in the description, don’t waste your hashtag on hashtag content marketing, maybe do calendar download or calendar template or something like that.

 

So it’s still relevant, but it’s playing off of a different type of search that someone would do. Maybe they don’t know about the content marketing calendar, but they’re looking for calendar templates or some sort of business template or something like that. That way. Then you have the conversation, it still flows. You’ve got the keywords in the description. And then you just add in a couple of those hashtags that are still keywords,

 

people would search for, but you couldn’t put it into the sentence flow that you were creating. All right. I got you girl. That totally makes sense. So with our stories, can you add hashtags? I kind of went back to that question. How did, how do people find my stories if they aren’t following me? Stories are still there like a collaboration of pins.

 

So you get to put three or five or however many you want in there and you still get a description on each one. So it’s still going to be searchable. You still can put a couple of hashtags in there if they’re not already following you and they search for something, it’s going to show up in the feed, just like any of the other static pins or video pins.

 

So in terms of your video, you could have uploaded it just as a pin instead of a story. And it works the same way as a static pin. You do get a little bit more tagging capability in terms of topic, tagging for videos. Then you do a static pen. So you can also use the tags for keywords that you want to be found for.

 

And that increases the searchability as well. Okay. So let me make sure I understood this correctly. The stories are basically a collection of pins related to the same things, is that right? Yep. So if I have a static pain, can I like Instagram? When you have something in your feed, that’s a post, can I push that to story?

 

Like, can I push a static pin to story or is it a separate, complete way to post that It’s a separate, complete way to post that you can repost it? The only problem that I see by doing that though is Pinterest is very heavily encouraging people to do fresh content. So they will see that same static pin posted. And then again on your stories and they’ll consider that as like a spam duper kit.

 

Got it. Okay. I lied that. Wasn’t the last question before. Thank you listeners for bearing with me. I hope I’m not asking like questions that you all know the answers to. I really include this in this area. And so it was, I’m so glad to have you here, Laura. And so how long the stories stay in a story?

 

How long are they shown for So completely different than social media? They stay on there just like a Pinterest pin, unless you go and delete them, they will be on your profile. Awesome. Okay. That makes me really happy. Nothing bothers me more than posting a really great Instagram story that people only get to see for 24 hours. So that’s super awesome.

 

Thank you. I’m super excited about stories. Like I said, Kelly and JC on my team really create our Pinterest content and post that. So thank you. By the way, to those of you guys who have been following us on Pinterest it’s, it’s cool to see that and those interactions and things, but I’m totally personally Pinterest illiterate. So I’ve just have so many questions that I am not able to answer for our clients.

 

So I’m very excited about all this. Okay. So let’s chat a little bit about video pins. Now, what is the parameter around video pins? Are they all vertical? How long can they be? And are they clickable? Yeah, so they Do not all have to be vertical. I still suggest it because then you’re taking up more real estate on the feed.

 

I personally don’t want to go more than a minute to a minute and a half. I believe you can go longer. I think it’s like two or three minutes that you can go up to. I’m not a hundred percent positive because I stick on the lower end. And then what was your other question? That was my other question. Oh, it’s are they clickable?

 

Oh yeah. So they are not clickable unless they’re used for ads. They have been clickable in the past. Again, I’m not sure if that’s something that’s changing or updating because there have been a lot of changes in the past, like four to six months on the platform, but they really do help with that growth of the account as well. When we’ve seen a lot of people come to us and say,

 

you know, I had a huge spike in October and now it’s December and everything’s dropping and I don’t know what to do. They post a couple video pins, they do a story pin and they’re back up again. Right. And they’re doing that consistently. I’m not going out there and telling everybody to post one and you’re going to be like woo through the roof and like,

 

awesome. But like, if you keep doing that, you’re going to keep seeing the results go up and back in the direction that you want them to go. Love that. Love that. Thank you so much. I have my million of Pinterest notes here and, and Laura, the couple of things. So for our listeners who want to get started with Pinterest,

 

I will say in full transparency, even though I’m not the one that does it, I’m really grateful for an amazing team that manages our Pinterest there. We really have seen amazing results and growth from using Pinterest as a platform with our audience. So I will say that from what I I’ll just say, if you guys are considering using Pinterest, definitely have a strategy behind it.

 

And really what I would like is to direct people towards some steps to get started. Nobody wants to recreate the wheel and you have a Pinterest like toolbox a toolkit it’s really cheap. It’s like 37 bucks or something that people can get started with what is inside that toolkit and what can people expect with that? Yeah, for sure. So the toolkit is really put together for anybody that needs that simple strategy,

 

right? That’s actually gonna help them convert on the platform. And so it’s easy. We provide different templates for them, whether they’re static, pen templates, video template, story templates. I have an awesome keyword swipe file in there too. So I’ve gone through over 700 different type of niche, specific keywords and hashtags in this swipe file. And the cool thing is,

 

is we constantly update that. So the swipe file for fun stats has actually brought in over $33,000 for clients and toolkit. So That’s been super fun. Yeah, That’d be good work. That’s so good. Talk about an ROI. Yeah. Tons of other stuff too. Like we have a call to action, swipe file a branding blueprint to help them really understand how to brand their pin images.

 

And then there’s some bonuses of course, like a custom dashboard for Google analytics and how to track and make sure you’re getting the ROI and stuff like that too. So Yeah, I mean, when we, when we got started and we started implementing what I was saying is so true, like if we had had a toolkit like this, we would have grabbed it in the second.

 

And so based on our listeners in our show, if you guys are thinking you want to get started with Pinterest, we’ll go ahead and make sure we leave a link to grab this toolkit in the show notes for this episode. So make sure you guys go over and grab this. I would recommend those of you guys that are listening to get started here.

 

It’s a low investment and it saves probably months and months of time and years of learning because you’re getting Laura’s wisdom for only $37. That’s crazy for those of you guys that are scaling your business. So for those of our listeners, you’re scaling your business. You have a team like me that you really just, you want to delegate this, you know,

 

you, you probably want to be on the platform. Maybe your team doesn’t know Pinterest. They aren’t experts. Then I am going to point them towards you, Laura, we’ll go ahead and make sure that we put these show notes and I would really consider like hiring Laura’s team out to manage your Pinterest for you or something like that. At least chatting with Laura on the phone.

 

I know she has a bunch of other stuff for you guys. So based on our listeners, I always try to give recommendations. So if you guys have ever gone through and taken our quiz to figure out what phase of business you’re in, I’m going to tell you exactly who needs to buy kind of what here, if you want to do this, if you’re in phase one or two,

 

then I would go with the toolkit. If you’re in phase three, four or five, then I would go with one of Laura’s other done for you services. If you don’t know what phase of business you’re in, go to sweet life code.com forward slash quiz. And you’re going to get a whole rundown based on where you are of your phase of business development,

 

and then we’ll direct you there. But for those of our listeners, most of our faithful listeners already know what phase of, of our start to scale up system they’re in. And so they know, so phase one or two, you guys are the toolkit people three, four or five, then really done for you services near you’re ready to scale. Thank you so much.

 

Yay. Love everything that you shared. My, my Pinterest entrepreneur IQ, just like totally leveled up three levels. I feel like awesome. And I can’t wait to, you know, for our team to like start implementing some of the stuff that we talked about on the show as well. So super appreciate your time. Congratulations on your new baby. When this airs he’ll be here and I’m so excited for you and we’ll make sure we leave all the show notes for everybody to get their hands on these things.

 

I will say you guys, honestly, Pinterest has been a real nice pleasant surprise. We’re not on Tech-Talk or anything. We’re not on Twitter. And Pinterest has been really awesome and powerful for us to grow our audience. So thanks for being on this show. Yeah. I love hearing that. And I mean, honestly, it is such a great platform.

 

I’m so glad that your team can help you with that. That’s absolutely amazing. And thank you so much for having me. Of course. Yes, of course. Thanks for being here. I’ll talk to you soon. Thanks. Awesome. Some show. Thank you so much for tuning in and sticking with me here with Laura at the time that we recorded this,

 

Laura was expecting, and now she is probably listening to this episode, holding her beautiful baby girl in her arms. And so we just really appreciate Laura’s time and making sure we were able to record this episode for you guys before she gave birth and went on her maternity leave in such great information, follow us. If you aren’t yet on Pinterest, you can find us at Sweetlife podcast and you can see some of the things that our team has been doing over the last year.

 

You can even see how our, even our branding and our usage of Pinterest tablets has evolved how we’re using Pinterest stories and how we’re using video. We’d love to connect with you there and follow you back. All right, you guys have an awesome day. Again, all the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. This is episode number two.

Episode 209: How To Get Started On Clubhouse: For Entrepreneurs – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Get Clubhouse room notes, highlights and tips for entrepreneurs. Even if you’re not on the app yet! Follow me on Clubhouse @aprilbeach
By Text: Text the word “clubhouse” to 805-254-0880 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs looking to create deeper relationships with clients, peers and mentors.

Summary:

Clubhouse is a new social media networking opportunity for entrepreneurs. It truly takes the box it’s placed around you from other platforms and allows you to create deep relationships, establish yourself as an expert, learn, gift, and grow. But you may just be hearing about Clubhouse or be on the app and not exactly sure how to use it. Though we are not clubhouse experts This short episode gives you the 101 on how to get started on clubhouse what to expect and great opportunities for entrepreneurs using this app. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know the first three things to do when you get on Clubhouse
  2. Understand why Clubhouse is so special
  3. Start to strategize your clubhouse funnel and company growth

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
Get Clubhouse room notes, highlights and tips for entrepreneurs. Even if you’re not on the app yet!
  • By Email: www.sweetlifeco.com/clubhouse 
  • By Text: Text the word “clubhouse” to 805-254-0880
Direct Links to Join My Upcoming Clubhouse Rooms 
 
Follow us on Clubhouse App: @aprilbeach
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. You guys Welcome to the Sweetlife life entrepreneur podcast. I’m April beach, and I am super excited about this episode for a couple of different reasons. First and foremost, it is our fourth podcast birthday.

 

So thank you so much. You’ve been tuning in for the last four years. We have dropped an episode faithfully every week. And those of you guys who’ve been longtime listeners. I mean, those are you guys around the podcast launch team. I appreciate you so much for being part of this show, making this show what it is today and sharing it with your friends.

 

Thank you. Thank you. Thank you. If you’re new to listening, it’s so great to meet you. This is a show where we are known for dropping some serious gems. Sometimes those that other companies and coaches charge thousands for a lot of our episodes come with bonuses that are so good. Like you can’t even believe they’re free. So cruise over to Sweetlife co.com,

 

click on the podcast to get all the goods. If you have never ever been there before today is a special episode. Not only because it’s our birthday. As a matter of fact, a little behind the scenes, I was going to do a real special birthday episode and you know, we’re going to do this whole shindig and it was going to be great,

 

but there’s something way more exciting than our fourth podcast birthday that I absolutely had to scrap the schedule. And that’s what we’re talking about today. Today, we are diving into all things, clubhouse the new clubhouse app, especially for entrepreneurs. And I’m going to share seven steps to get started on clubhouse. Before I do this, I need to have a little disclaimer here.

 

I am not a clubhouse expert. As a matter of fact, there’s probably somebody, many people who can speak to this way better than I’m going to do. But I have taken the time to lay out seven steps based on my experience or the last couple of weeks inside the clubhouse app, things that I have learned by following other people and just really things that I’ve gathered about being on this app.

 

So I’m sharing with you my experience and what I’ve learned, and guess what you know, what’s so cool about the new clubhouse app. Honestly, there aren’t any experts yet everybody is new, and that’s why I’m so excited to share today’s Sweetlife entrepreneurial podcast episode so that you can get on clubhouse. You can be a drop of a big bucket that this app I believe is going to make.

 

So let’s go ahead and start with the fundamentals here. So, you know, whether or not you’re in the right place and you should continue hanging out and listening to this episode with me, number one, who is, is episode four, this is for, and all phases of my start to scale up system. So if you don’t know what business phase you’re in,

 

you can very quickly go to sweet life co.com forward slash quiz. And you’re going to receive a segmentation based on your business phase and very specific, customized recommendations to grow and scale your business to the next level. This particular episode is for entrepreneurs in all phases of my system. Just if you’re a new listener, the reason why I did note that is because some of our episodes are just based on a specific phase in business.

 

And I note that phase in the beginning of every single podcast episode. So frankly, you don’t waste your time. If you’re hanging out here with me, I want to make sure that this is a valuable use of your time. And so I tag every episode based on the phase of business that that episode applies to this one, however, is for all phases.

 

So let’s go ahead and move to the next thing, who is this episode? Great for this episode is great for entrepreneurs looking to create deeper relationships with clients, peers, and mentors. If that is you keep listening. Now let’s go ahead and dive in a little bit here. Clubhouse is a new social media networking app and opportunity for entrepreneurs. It really truly takes the box out from around you that other social media platforms have created the limitations.

 

The restrictions in clubhouse enables you to create deep relationships, establish yourself as an expert. It also allows you to learn, gift other people with your knowledge and grow, but you may just be hearing about clubhouse and you’re not really sure if it’s exactly, you know, what you should be on or how to use it. And so in this short episode,

 

I’m going to give you the one-on-one on clubhouse, based on my experience, those experience of my colleagues and the people that I am following. So my mentors, so that you can get started on clubhouse fast and in the right way. And we’re going to also talk about actually how to get into the app as well. At the end of this episode,

 

you’ll know the first three things to do when you get on the app, but I’m actually giving you seven steps to actually onboard yourself onto the app. You’ll understand why clubhouse is so, so special. And you’re going to be able to start strategizing your clubhouse processes, what you’re doing on clubhouse personally. And of course professionally, because I’m a business coach and that’s what I talk about.

 

All right. So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive into the seven steps to get started on clubhouse for entrepreneurs.<inaudible> Okay. So welcome to call the house. We help. That basically means that I know that not everybody’s on there yet. You may be listening to this show being like, what the heck, April? This is so not fair.

 

I am not on this app. So here are a couple, just one. Oh, about getting on the app. First of all, currently at the recording of this, something can change literally the next hour with this app. You guys, but at the recording of this, which is only a week before the show drops, I did, this is close to the time of the show dropping as I could.

 

It’s only available to iOS users. Those you guys that are on Android, you’re going to have to wait a little bit longer. I have zero details on that, but I just wanted to let you know that it’s only available to iOS users. If you are an iOS user, you can go and we have it in the show notes here, you can go download the clubhouse app and let’s go ahead and dive into step number one.

 

The very first thing that you do even before you’re on the app is you should create and save your username. Now, here are some tips that I have seen. And from what I’m learning about your clubhouse username, unlike on some other platforms where you would take it, the name of your brand or your business clubhouse is like a real deal, real relationship app.

 

So it’s best to make your username, your real name, or as close as you can get to it. So that’s step number one. When you reserve your username, you’re going to be put on a waiting list to get in the app. Some people are waiting weeks, maybe even months to get into this app. And I understand that it’s frustrate.

 

Keep listening, hang in there with me, listen to the rest of the show. Cause I’m going to tell you exactly what, what to do. Once you get on the app, you can cut to the front of the line and we do this by getting a sponsor. That is also, what’s so cool about the clubhouse app, but you kind of have to know somebody that knows somebody to get in there.

 

They have to have your phone number literally saved in their phone. So you don’t just kind of know them. You actually have to really know him. So I was waived to the front of the line. My experience was I went downloaded the clubhouse app, reserved my name. I am at April beach on clubhouse. They Kevin’s my name. I was really excited about that.

 

And I was immediately waved in by my sponsor. Brian Fanzo you guys might know him as I social fans on Instagram brands also been a guest here on the podcast and he’s one of my mentors that helps me to increase my speaking career. And so Brian immediately got an alert that I was trying to get in the app and he waved me to the front of the line.

 

He endorsed me in. So what happens now on my profile, his endorsement of me is always on the bottom of my profile in my bio, which is really, really cool. And that can lead to a whole nother conversation about who you should endorse, maybe who you should not endorse on clubhouse, but that’s just my story of how I got it.

 

Otherwise you can be invited in and skip the wait list. When somebody, you know, on the app is a member of a group, which we’ll talk about groups and clubs are clubs on the app and they can nominate you. So those are a couple of ways that you can actually cut to the front of the line and get on the app. Otherwise just keep waiting.

 

You’ll get on there soon enough and believe me, it is worth the wait. So step number one is creating your username. Make it your real name. Again. This is like a real deal app. Step number two is creating your bio. There are clubhouse rooms on how to create great clubhouse bios. You are welcome. If you’re already on clubhouse,

 

cruise over, check out my bio at April beach, say it’s perfect. I’m not a clubhouse bio expert, but it’s been working for me to connect with the people that I really want to connect with. So you’re welcome to steal what I’ve done there. Now, overall in your bio. I want you to know that clubhouse is very, very generous.

 

It gives you a great deal of space in writing room to really bullet point, what you do and be very intentional about who you can help and who you want to connect with. So in your bio, you should make it really clear what you do to the problem you solve in really your intent tensions. Why are you on clubhouse? What’s your intention for being there?

 

You might also want to share something unique and funny, maybe a little something like behind the scenes. Like you love to ride horses or like Brian Fanzo my sponsor has that. He’s like a pager wearing millennial. I mean, that’s funny like who even wears a Pedro at all anymore. Right? And so you might want to include some of those things.

 

It’s in the bio. One of the things that I understand is that your bio is also searchable. And so within the app, the first few lines in your bio carry a lot of weight. So currently if you search online business strategist, I will come up as the top of that search in clubhouse. That’s because in my bio, the very first three words,

 

bio our online business strategist. So that’s step number two, creating your bio step. Number three of getting started on clubhouse is connecting really, really. So the first version you should connect with is your sponsor. You should follow your sponsor back, okay. This is really keeping it raw. I cut somebody right to the front of the line, who I’ve known in business for a really long time.

 

And this person is not following me back. It’s just a courtesy, right? So follow your sponsor back now, with that being said, you can learn a lot from your sponsor. So follow your sponsor. And there’s a little bell next year sponsors name you’re going to want to turn on. That means you get a notification whenever your sponsor is talking,

 

go in and listen to those rooms that your sponsor is in. Go and listen and learn and be a sponge. The first part of connecting on club house is just sitting back kind of watching the flow of how it goes. It’s a really amazing way too. Honestly, you’re dive in head first into this. It’s not even like a Cannonball. If there was like an upside down Cannonball and that’s what happens.

 

You just are in here. And all of a sudden you’re in these places and people are talking, it’s like a whirlwind. So just chill, just sit there and just absorb and take as long as you need to, to do that. Bet, we’re going to talk about not taking too long and jumping in right away. The next thing you want to do is when you’re listening to somebody speak,

 

and I’m going to share with you exactly the breakdown of how you find those places, where people are speaking here in a sec. But when you’re listening to somebody who, somebody who is speaking, when you’re in a room is what it’s called. Look to the people, to your right, and look to the people to your left. What you going to see is people literally hanging out,

 

standing next to you in a room, listening to somebody, speak on stage. Now this is all on an app. It’s all on a screen. So the speakers are going to be at the top of your screen. The people that the speakers follow are going to be the next section down, and then the rest of the audience is going to be underneath that clubhouse.

 

We’ll probably change that up in some capacity in some way, I’ve heard some thoughts of other people on that, but currently the recording of this that’s the way it is. So look at the people standing next to you on your right and your left tap on their bio. Maybe give them a follow. If it’s something that really aligns with, you know,

 

what you want to connect with. And then the next step is connecting off the app. Clubhouse does not have any hyperlinks, your bio, your neighbor’s bio, nobody gets hyperlinks except for there’s two places that clubhouse currently links to you. And that is Twitter and Instagram. And this is a really powerful thing I will say in my 10 days, maybe 14 days now being on clubhouse,

 

my Instagram following has tripled because my clubhouse account is connected to my Instagram account. And so how people connect with you is through DMS is through relationships on Twitter and Instagram, because there really isn’t a way to connect except for within talking within the rooms in the clubhouse app itself. So just so you know, that’s how you connect with people off the app.

 

There’s a lot of strategy behind that. As far as building funnels, can’t get into in this episode, this is just your seven steps to get started, but I’m sure your wheels are spinning. Okay. So that’s step number three. Step number four is search and find. So in clubhouse just a few days ago, they just released the ability to search by topic.

 

They’ve done a really good job with this. And so you can actually search and get notifications on rooms. So discussion rooms that fall under those topics here is the only downfall that I see of that. So far, the only rooms or discussions that you’ll get notified of are currently those that are hosted by clubs. We’re going to talk about clubs here in a minute.

 

So if you search entrepreneurship where you search parenting or you search gardening or whatever, you’re only going to get notification of the discussions under those topics that are hosted by a club, not all the rooms. So if I were to launch a room on gardening, because I don’t yet have a clubhouse club, you would never get notification of that. So just part of being part of an app,

 

that’s in the beta process, but you can still search by topics that you want to learn from. Also, I would recommend that you search by topics that you want to lend to. So this is getting into a little bit of business strategy. If you are an expert, if you are an expert funnel builder, or you’re a Facebook ad strategist, or you’re a graphic designer search for the rooms,

 

obviously in your area of expertise, so that you may be able to lend some information to the host of that room, the moderators of that room and the listeners of that room, or frankly, just so you can up your skills and be even better at what you do. And then the next tip I have for you under search and find is search for totally random rooms too.

 

One of the cool things about clubhouse is there are starting to be rooms on everything. I came across an amazing room. It was an 80 HD room and it’s just for people like me that have trouble focusing. And the room is hosted where they work in sprints and everybody’s sitting there in the room together and the host puts on music and then everybody goes to work for a period of time.

 

And then everybody together like takes a break and has their distraction moment. It’s a great way to increase productivity. So those are some cool rooms happening inside clubhouse that are totally not business-related at all. In addition to that, I will tell you if you are a faith person, if you’re a believer, there are some amazing rooms. This morning, I was in a room hosted by Myron golden business building like kingdom business building.

 

There’s amazing prayer rooms, Bible study rooms, really for all religions. Those are just the ones that I’m in. And so very cool things that you can search that are totally not business-related at all. Like if you need prayer and you don’t want to go to your neighbor or your sister, you can go on clubhouse and you can raise your hand and say,

 

will you please pray for me? I mean, how amazing, Oh my gosh. Like the power of this is just so unbelievable. Okay. Sorry. I’ll get back on track. Step number five, navigating. This is kind of just a one about how to navigate the app. The very first resource I have for you, that is a place that you should be tapping into is clubhouse guide.com.

 

We have put a resource to that in the link of the show notes here, please make sure you go to clubhouse guide. It’s how to get started on clubhouse clubhouse. One Oh one clubhouse best practices, a lot of the black and white and the meat and potatoes of what I’m explaining here on the show. Although I’m just sharing it with you from my personal experience so far,

 

that’s where I want to direct you to. That’s always going to be updated on, you know, the really the one-on-one and navigating the platform. It’s clubhouse guide.com. So let’s talk about nag navigating the platform and some of the terminology. The first thing you need to know is that there is what’s called a hallway. You have your own unique curated hallway and the hallway is showing you rooms,

 

discussion rooms based on the topics of interest that the app determines you may want. Now, again, what determines what you want are the topics that you follow, but also the people that you follow. So when you get on the app, you’re going to see a hallway. It’s like a list of conversations happening right now. All you have to do is tap on any of those rooms.

 

You’re immediately put into the audience and you can listen and see if you want to stay. When you enter a room, you’re put on mute. So you don’t have to worry about it. You can just tap on there, do the dishes, you know, drive your kids in the car or be at the gym, whatever. So the first thing you need to know is a hallway.

 

The second navigation point is the events tab. The events tab is in the top of the app. It looks like a little calendar, and you’re going to see a couple of different options for you. First of all, they’re suggested events for you, all events. And then the third tab is your events. And we’re going to talk about those in a minute.

 

So clubhouse will suggest events and scheduled rooms. Events are rooms that are, prescheduled both rooms that are prescheduled by clubs and individuals that you may want to attend. You’re also going to receive notification. So anybody you follow when they start a room, or when they’re speaking on stage in a room, if you have notifications turned on for that person, clubhouse will notify you.

 

And they’ll say like, Hey, so if I’m speaking in a room and you follow me, clubhouse would be like, Hey, April’s talking over here on this room on blah, blah, blah. And you can immediately tap that notification and enter the room and start chatting with me. How cool is that? Step number three is following clubs. So clubhouse enables people to create clubs.

 

Now we’re going to be doing many podcasts on this. I’m sure this is a very, very new app. Again, it’s in beta testing. I am not a club owner, so I can’t speak to that yet. But what I can share with you is that you can apply to have your own club. It’s going to be like the new Facebook group.

 

Many of you listened to this podcast, you know, how much I load Facebook groups. So I’m really looking forward to an opportunity to create community on a different platform. So just clubhouse, you can apply to start your own club. The application process currently is very backed up, but when you get approval for your club, then you can invite club members.

 

And when you have club members, they’re going to get notified every time your club hosts a room or an event. And so many other things, they can nominate other members to your club. I mean, it’s really an amazing way to grow your community. So one of the tips for you is if you want to start a club from what it is right now,

 

the way I understand is you need to host and schedule some individual rooms so that the app sees it. You’re not just like a flash in the pan that you’re really here. You’re really committed to build a longterm club with this app. You need to prove it to them. And how cool is that? It’s not like anybody can just start a group,

 

right? You have to be in it to give and to serve and to win it. And so you have to apply for a club and you have to prove to the app that you are worthy of being there and hosting that club on their app. Now you can follow clubs as well at the bottom of each person’s bio. If you go to the bottom of my bio,

 

I follow a ton of clubs. And I’m, I’m a member of really a great deal of clubs, maybe too many. Cause I got club happy and in applied, cause I was so excited just to talk to all these people. But if you go to the bottom of my app, you can see the clubs that I am a member of or that I follow.

 

Honestly, I’m not really sure that delineation between that. I think they’re the ones, I’m the member of in the bottom again, see, I’m learning here and you can click on that club and you can follow the club. Once you followed the club, the club hosts can have an opportunity to invite you to join the club. So you can follow a club and you can join a club.

 

So two different ways to connect with clubs. And then again, we talked about creating your own club, go to clubhouse guide.com for more information on creating your own club, but you’ve got to prove it, that you’re worthy of that. And you’re, you’re ready to be a leader on this app in order to get approved. For that, I promise this is going to be a quick episode and dang,

 

I have more to say than I thought I’m just clearly. So like a kid in a candy store, excited about this app. Number six be you. Okay. So when you join a room, if you have a question, raise your hand and ask the question, the host or the moderator will bring you to the stage. When you get on the stage currently in the app,

 

you are un-muted. So please, please mute yourself because you’re basically going to be disrupting the whole conversation when you get on stage and maybe they’re not ready to have you speak just yet. So be patient when you get on stage, mute yourself, listen, wait for the moderator to say, Hey so-and-so did you have a question or something that you’d like to say?

 

And here is a second thing. It’s okay to be nervous. It is crazy. Some of the really big influencers and leaders that I’ve seen get onto the stage for the first time and their voice is a little shaky or frankly, they’re just like, I’m nervous. And why somebody said it really well. I forget who said this, otherwise I would so credit them.

 

Literally. It’s very true. Somebody said, it’s not that you’re nervous to speak, but I think that we all understand the gravity of what this app could do for our relationships and our business. I think that’s where the nerves come from. It’s having an opportunity to speak to people that you would probably otherwise not have a chance to connect with. As an example,

 

I have been honored to be on the stage and to invite influencers to my stage, such as Myron golden and so many others. And I would never be able to connect with these leaders. Otherwise I send them an email. Obviously I can’t get a cell phone number, you know, and these are people that I highly value and I want to learn from in clubhouse.

 

It’s okay to be nervous when you go on the stage, just ask your question. And one of the other tips I want to leave with you is don’t ask to speak unless you have something really valuable to say, you know, those people who like raise their hand because they just want to speak because they like to hear themselves talk. Don’t be that person on clubhouse.

 

Seriously. If you want, if you have something genuine that you want to contribute, if the host says, Hey, does anybody want to contribute or ask a question, do it, don’t hesitate, jump up there and do it, but definitely make sure that you’re being respectful of both the hosts and the moderators and everybody in the audience time based on what you’re going to say and just don’t be that weird fan person just be respectful.

 

So if you are invited on a stage or if you’re in a room, you’re going to look around, you’re going to see some really big name people in this space. They’re just people too. They’re just, they’re listening and talking and sharing in the conversation. And it is absolutely a beautiful place just to be authentic, build relationships, learn, give,

 

grow, and create amazing networking with other companies. And then the last tip I’ll leave you with step number seven is starting your own room. Dive in, create a room. I have literally been buried in Instagram DMS about people asking me questions about clubhouse or companies who want to work with me based on the rooms that I’ve hosted. And now what they know my area of specialty is from clubhouse.

 

Literally my calendar is totally full. Okay. That is because I dove in and I started a room. I didn’t know what I was doing. And I was like, Hey, you know what? This is my first room I started. It was about the podcast episode of the week. I was like, okay, Hey, cool. I already know that I’m talking about this on the podcast this week.

 

How cool would it be to start a room? That’s a conversation about the podcast. And so I started a room and it was just talking about five areas of focus for the upcoming year in your business. And that room grew and grew and grew and grew. And I invited people to the stage and I made people moderators with me. And there’s other strategies behind that and why I did that.

 

We can talk about it another episode. But the reality is, is that just start a room. You know, I was speaking to somebody of course, again and Instagram DMS, and she is starting a business in an area where, you know, she just needs to do a lot more market research. And so I suggested to her, start a room,

 

asking a question, asking, are there any XYZ experts out there or are there any people with this experience out there, come join my room and let’s talk about it. So she didn’t even have to be the expert of that room just because you hosted doesn’t mean you’re the expert, a great colleague of mine, Heather and Haven would we host a lot of rooms together.

 

Now started a room a week ago, week and a half ago on how to monetize virtual events. Very simply because she wanted to know how and that room grew to the largest room. We have coasted on clubhouse so far with amazing virtual event and speaking influencers coming to our stage. The whole experience frankly, is blowing my mind. As you can probably hear in my recording of this show.

 

So you don’t even have to be an expert. Just ask a question. You might say, Hey, does somebody want to co-work with me right now? Hey, is anybody else having trouble potty training their kid? I mean, it can be about anything. Dive in, start a room, get started on this app, building authentic relationships. Okay.

 

So I don’t think I was succinct as I wanted to be. I apologize for that. Let me recap. The seven steps to get started on clubhouse for entrepreneurs. Number one, go get your username. Hopefully you won’t have to wait too long to get in. Number two, create your bio number three. Connect that’s following your sponsors and intentionally connecting with people and making other networking connections on the app.

 

Number four, search and find the right topics, the right rooms, and totally random rooms. Just to see how they’re doing things. Number five, navigate the hallway. So make sure that you know how to tap into rooms, how to leave rooms quietly in how to follow clubs, be part of clubs and get more of the topics that you’re interested in listening to in your hallway.

 

Number six, be you. It’s cool. Just be you. You can show up in your pajamas. Nobody cares be you and number seven, dive on in. Okay. So in the show notes of this episode, which you can find by visiting sweet life podcast.com forward slash two zero nine, I have a ton of links for you. You are going to find obviously the link to download the clubhouse app.

 

You’re going to find the link to clubhouse guide.com and you are also going to get an opportunity to get notifications from me. Now, clubhouse gives a lot of notifications, so we kind of to create a work around for this. So if you want to know, when I’m chatting in a room, join me in a room to chat. And then all of the other amazing entrepreneurs that I moderate and cohost rooms with,

 

you can very simply go to sweet life co.com forward slash flub house. Let me say that again. Sweetlife co.com forward slash clubhouse. If you are not on clubhouse, go there. And I send a periodic notes about the rooms that we are in highlights from rooms, in other things that we have seen and experienced just being in this app in the early phases.

 

So if you want updates, room notes, highlights, amazing quotes. I have about 20 pages of just blow your mind quotes. And then you can get those things by going to Sweetlife co.com forward slash clubhouse, or you can text them word clubhouse to the number (805) 254-0880. All of those things are in the show notes. Also in the show notes, I have provided direct links to join my upcoming rooms.

 

So if you’re already on clubhouse, you can go to the show notes for this episode and you can click on the direct link to join my show. I hosted a show, not a show room. And so used to saying show with podcasts. I host weekly room every single Wednesday at 12 o’clock Eastern time. And they are business strategy sessions for entrepreneurs.

 

Very similar to the things we talk about here on the podcast, but you and I get to talk about about it and I get to help you and help you strategize and answer your immediate questions about the topics January 13th. If you’re listening to this show live, I am. Co-hosting a room on license in your content. So how to scale your business by licensing your content.

 

I’m co-hosting that room with a few different, amazing attorneys that are copyright attorneys, IP attorneys definitely join that room. If you’re thinking about scaling your business by licensing your content courses and other strategies, or frankly, you’re just wondering about it, January 20th, I’m hosting how to grow your six figure coaching business with podcast and PR and January 27th. I am hosting a room on how to create your methodology,

 

your process, and turn it into your signature offer. Those are all on Wednesdays at 12 o’clock Eastern time. I would love to chat with you in any of my rooms and literally there’s so many other awesome rooms. I can’t wait for you to jump in and join this app when you do make sure you follow me at April beach. And if you aren’t yet,

 

you can DM me on Instagram. I am at April beach life on Instagram, and I will send you a link, a direct link from IgG on how to get all hard clubhouse, insider notes, and links to join me in all these rooms. Ooh, as longer than I thought it was going to be so much for hanging out with me guys,

 

I got to get back to clubhouse. Yep. That’s pretty much what it’s like. I’m hosting a room tonight, a female entrepreneurs round table, and so excited to jump in and learn from some of these amazing men and women leaders. And I can’t wait to talk to you in there too. Again, the direct show notes for this episode can be found@sweetlife.com

 

Forward slash two zero nine. All right. Talk to you guys soon.

Episode 208: How Be A Peak Performer In Health, Wealth, and Relationships in 2021 – with Eric Partaker

208 Eric Partaker SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

The 3 Alarms, Free Digital Book and Training

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs and leaders in all phases of business who feel like you just can’t catch up, and you know there’s a better way to live. Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz

Summary:

To kick off the new year, I’ve brought Peak Performance Coach, Eric Partaker, on the show to help you get started on the right foot and make 2021 the year you become the most productive version of yourself in multiple areas of your life and business. Eric has worked with and led high-performing teams at McKinsey & Company, Skype, and Chilango. He is one of 300 people worldwide certified as a High Performance Coach, by the High Performance Institute. Over the last 20 years he has studied and modeled the traits and habits of the world’s most successful people, in order to help his teams and clients break through their barriers and reach their highest potential, in both their work and life.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. No longer waste time
  2. Have a strategy to root your identity in who you want to be (even before you get there)
  3. Stop being an amateur and become a pro

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 
Email Eric Partaker | eric@ericpartaker.com
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome to 2021. The first show, and we are starting out with a major bang that is going to be a game-changer for you. I’m so excited to dive in and help you understand how to be a peak performer in your health,

 

wealth, and relationships this year and beyond with our guest expert, Eric partaker. So let’s chat about what we’re doing here and why this show is so special. You know, as entrepreneurs, as leaders, as human beings, we all want to operate at our highest level. We all want to be that person that we envisioned we would be right. But what happens is we get burned out.

 

We get stretched thin, and there are some things that just don’t balance out to equal the vision that you might’ve had for what you wanted your life and your company to look like. And so we’re going to dive into that and we’re going to start out with a powerful plan and strategies to really be a peak performer in your health, your wealth and your relationships in 2021.

 

And let me just tell you, this is not another piece of content or some other podcasts on how to become productive or how to set goals. No, no, no. Our guests today shared strategies that I have never ever heard before. These aren’t the same old, same old things. These things are game changers. You guys, if you watch our video episode of this,

 

it is totally me behind the scenes taking massive notes. The things that he was saying was just gold. And so this is an episode that is definitely not to miss for those of you that really want to operate at your highest level in 2021. And, and frankly take back control of your health, wealth, and relationships, which are all things that we have left behind struggling with this last year.

 

We all hope and pray. So let’s talk about, you know, really what you can expect out of this episode. In this episode, we’re talking with Eric and I’m going to give you a bio on him. This guy is super duper awesome. So we’re talking with Eric, who’s a peak performance coach and author of the bestselling book, the three alarms,

 

a simple system to transform your health, wealth, and relationships forever. And the information on this show, like I said, it’s not going to be the same old, same old. You’re going to discover powerful new ways to increase your productivity, deep root your identity in who you’re supposed to be. And you’re also going to understand how to become even stronger with each challenge that comes your way.

 

It’s really, really good stuff. You guys. So at the end of this episode, if you apply the strategies in here and the bonus, that’s going to be given to you here with this show, you’ll no longer waste time. You’ll have a, to root your identity and who you want to be, even if you’re not that person yet. And you’ll stop being an amateur and become a pro.

 

Now let’s introduce you to Eric partaker. Eric’s a CEO coach and mentor, author, and peak performance expert. He was named the CEO of the year in 2019 business excellence awards. One of the top 30 entrepreneurs in UK 35 and under by startups magazine and among Britain’s most disruptive entrepreneurs by the Telegraph, he’s advised fortune 50 CEOs while at McKinsey helped build Skype’s multi-billion dollar success story and has founded several businesses of his own.

 

He’s a certified peak performance coach and has also completed a coaching certification and apprenticeship with professor BJ Fogg who leads Stanford university’s behavior design lab told you this guys it’s just super rockstar. He continues research evidence-based studies in psychology, neuroscience, habit, change leadership and peak performance. And he is giving you a totally free digital copy of his book. You can cruise over to Sweetlife co.com.

 

This is episode number 208, and a link to download his book will be found in the show notes. So if you are really ready to make a change that is going to stick and your business and your work and your relationships so good. You guys let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.<inaudible> Alrighty. You guys, I’m so happy to be joined by Eric partaker here today,

 

and we’re talking to all about peak performance, peak performance, usually in the past, have you been listening to the show for a long time? We talk about peak performance with extreme and adventure sports. And as that relates to the company you’re building basically. So you can have more time to take off and play with your extreme inexpensive venture sports. But today we’re really talking about peak performance that comes before that something that is not discussed often enough in the entrepreneur space.

 

And that’s about really performing at your highest level all the way across the board, so that you have an opportunity to reap all those benefits and rewards. And Eric is in the house today, talking all about his new book and how you guys can get to this state of becoming a peak performer and doing this in your business. You can do it in your life.

 

Eric. Welcome. Thank you so much for taking the time to join us here on the Sweetlife podcast. Super glad to have you tell everybody a little bit about yourself. Yeah, thanks April. And thanks everyone for taking the time to listen. Yeah, I’ve, I’ve been obsessed with peak performance for over two decades, but well, first, definitely in the wrong way.

 

And then in a, in a much better way. So about 10 years ago, it was all, you know, work. It was hustle mentality, and that’s how I was for the whole first half of my career. You know, so a hundred plus hour work weeks at McKinsey and company and helping build up Skype before we sold it to eBay,

 

few of my own businesses. And you know, I’m on a plane. Start to feel unwell, Dr. On-board rushes over, takes my vital signs and says, we need to land the plane immediately. I think he’s having a heart attack 10 years ago, playing emergency lens, where to a small town in France, the runway shut down. They take me off into a waiting ambulance where they administer nitrates to open up the arteries and increase the blood flow to the heart.

 

And as the ambulance sped off to the local hospital, I looked up to the eyes of the French paramedic looking down at me and I said, please don’t let me die. I have a five-year-old son. I didn’t say, please don’t let me die. I need to clear my inbox. And you know, my point there is that as entrepreneurs we’re so into the hustle,

 

we’re so into, you know, what, what do we got to do next? And, and it can all go at any moment at any time. And what I said in that moment, it really truly changed my life because the next morning I woke up and I thought, you know, all of my success to date at that point had come at the price of my health and relationships.

 

I almost lost my life. And then the very first words out of my mouth had nothing to do even with my own life. But, you know, with my boy at the time, right, my two boys now, but at the time, my, my only son and then that just struck me as, okay, that’s the three legged stool.

 

That’s what peak performance means. You know, we need to perform at a peak level across our health, our wealth, our work as a wealth driver and our relationships. And when I say peak performance, I’m not meaning turning. Yeah, I don’t, I don’t mean like in a turn a person into a Ferrari, you know, I mean, close the gap between your current and best self across all the areas of life that matter most,

 

you know, on the health, you know, work and home front. That’s the mission that I’m on now that I’ve been on for the last 10 years. And my book, the three alarms is, is about that mission. And it’s about how I’ve, codafide it as if you want to reach your best on the health, wealth and relationship fronts,

 

you need to do it through IPA, like the beer, but better for you and the IPA standing for identity productivity and antifragility. Yeah. And thank you so much for sharing your story. You guys watch the videos of these, you know, any sort of story like that. I’m here, like tearing up behind the scenes, but I understand that there are so many people that are on their way to hit that point without what you’re talking about in this book and,

 

you know, praise God, you were able to come back and figure it out and, you know, share it with the rest of us and really be able to leverage this to the next level and come in here and step in and help entrepreneurs. And so this is a perfect episode before we were recording. I was thinking, I wonder, are we going to air this?

 

And this is a perfect one to kick off 2021, because some of the things that you’re talking about, you know, we all want 20, 21 to be different than 2020. And it wouldn’t be nice if we just woke up and the whole entire world that was glittering on January 1st and everything was perfect again. And, and, and it’s okay to want those things.

 

But what we know is that we need to have a plan regardless of what comes about. And that’s what you talk about here in your book. And I love that now you have worked with really high level executives and entrepreneurs and your work in the past and getting people results in this. And it has really been extraordinary. And so I’m super excited to dig into what we’re talking about on today’s show.

 

So you say how to become a peak performer with IPA identity productivity, and antifragility, let’s go ahead. Can you dive in a little bit, and let’s kind of dissect each one of these things. So our listeners have an idea of some immediate actions and some areas in their life that they can, you know, rebalance or correct, or take a look at and,

 

and make some adjustments. Can we dive into IPA and the identity first? Yeah, let’s do it all. Talk about each and a practical tool. And the book of, I give loads of practical tools, but we just give like one quick win takeaway for each, each section. And let’s go ahead and say this too. If I can just interrupt.

 

You also said, all of our listeners are going to get a free digital copy of your book and we will make sure that is a huge gift you guys, and we’ll make sure that the link to that is in the show notes for this show@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash two zero eight. So yeah. So let’s go ahead and dive in. Yeah. Cool. And,

 

and I just want to step back just super quickly once again, and say, you know, 20, 20, it was a challenging year. And part of what I’m trying to do with getting the message out around this book is to have it perfectly timed with making 20, 21, a rebound year making 20, 21 the year where you stepped back up to the plate,

 

right? Where you take things back up a level and you kind of dust things off and you say, all right, let’s go again. And IPA is the path forward. And, and one other thing to remember, my definition of peak performance is not turning you into a Ferrari. None of this is about achieving perfection. This is just about you showing up as your best self in the areas of life that matter most.

 

This is about you kind of gaining entry to what Abraham Maslow estimated was the 2% of people in the world who realize their full potential. So IPA for me is about gaining entry to that 2% club. So identity, identity, why don’t we start with identity? So the why here is because we cannot become a better version of ourselves now and going forward,

 

if we continue to be the person that we’ve always been, that doesn’t line up. So what got you here? Won’t get you there. You need to make a change. And entrepreneurs leaders, CEOs are very intentional when it comes to work, they get it. They know that I need to have envisioned. I need to model myself after that vision,

 

but they don’t bring that same intentionality often to their health and home, or you know, their, their health and relationships. So what I talk about in the book, the three alarms is how I decided, okay, what is the best version of me look like on each of those fronts? And that’s what I’d like everyone listening to do right now.

 

Just ha have a thing. If you were to give the best version of you, you at your best, a name on the health front, what would it be if you were to give the best version of you, a name or a phrase or a persona on the work front, what would it be? And if you were to do the same on the relationship or the home front,

 

what would it be? So I gave an example of what I’ve done with myself. So on the health front, it’s not me who goes to the gym in the morning, I’m a world fitness champion. That’s who goes to the gym in the morning. That’s the person who walks through the door. And when I’m in on, in a particular exercise and I get to the eighth rep,

 

and I’m not sure if I’m going to get to the 10th, a little voice goes off in my head and says, of course you will, because you’re a world fitness champion. And that’s all being driven by identity because behavior follows identity. When I take a Spider-Man costume and I put it on my seven-year-old Leo, I do not need to teach Leo what to do next.

 

He doesn’t need to go through Spider-Man training camp. I put the Spider-Man costume on and he starts shooting webs from his wrist, jumping around, making funny noises. Right? So what it really, all I’m trying to do here is to get everyone listening to, you know, remember that you’ve already done this. You did it as a kid. You picked an identity,

 

maybe when you were playing, you changed into that and it changed your behavior. Same concept. You’re just remembering back to something you used to do. Every time I go to the gym now I’m wonder woman, perfect world fitness champion. Now I have that on my phone as an alarm at 6:30 AM, I’ve changed the name of the alarm. And it says world fitness champion to prompt that intentionality.

 

Okay, because I’ve segmented my day into three parts and I’ve chosen basically a best self identity that will power each of the segments. And so 6:30 AM world fitness champion goes off. The next alarm on my phone goes off at 9:00 AM and it says, world’s best coach, am I the world’s best at all of these things? Of course not. But that’s the version of me.

 

That’s going to start the Workday. How does that version of me show up and behave in the world? You know, how decisive inspiring and reliable will I be for my clients? If I’m coming from the vantage point of the world’s best coach versus just Eric and at 6:30 PM, the game-changing alarm for me, we’re all different for me. This is a game changer.

 

It goes off and it says world’s best husband and father to prompt the, how would the world’s best husband and father walked through that door right now? That’s the power of intentionality, right? So I’ve chosen, what does best look like on the three areas of life that matter? Most, I queue it at a particular time of day, that would most benefit from being powered by that best self identity.

 

And I get three massive benefits. It brings intentionality into the day. It brings wise counsel, you know, into a moment, you know, okay, what should I say in response to this person? What should I do next? Well, what would the world’s best husband and father do? And number three, it prompts, reflection, because if I do lose my cool with my seven year old,

 

for example, I’m not perfect then because I had something so high to measure against, I feel like a real jerk afterwards. Right. And that’s good because that’s making the gap painfully obvious and it means that I get better and better at closing it. So that’s the identity piece I’m taking course millions of notes here. I’ve already named all of my different sections of my day and who I am.

 

So I just I’m appreciating this and eating it up. I’m a sponge here, loving this information. I love that identity too. And it’s so true. Like when along the lines did we forget who we believe that we are rather than, you know, what the world tells us. And so, and I, and I love that. And you’re so right about the fact that as entrepreneurs,

 

we are so apt to believe that before in our business, but maybe not so much in our health and our personal lives, those things for sure are not the same. Maybe it’s because money doesn’t drive it. And it’s not because they aren’t as important to us. Well, maybe the health at first, you know, so I think this is super awesome.

 

Loving this so far. So let’s talk about productivity, the identities, EEI, and in IPA, what do you do and what do you recommend as far as productivity and how does that, why did you choose productivity as part of your methodology for obtaining people? Yeah. Great question. So, okay. So context then, you know, setting. So first we start with,

 

well, who is it that we want to be? That’s the identity piece. So now we’re operating from the vantage point of our best self and the three areas of life that matter most. So what do we do now to make progress? Because we’re just awesome, but we’re standing still, right? And we need to progress. We need to climb the mountain now.

 

Right? And so we do that through action. So that’s why we talk about productivity because knowledge isn’t power anymore. These days I can Google anything and be knowledgeable about it. Within seconds. Knowledge is not where the game is played. It’s about taking consistent persistent deliberate action. That’s where the game is played. And that’s why we need to optimize ourselves for productivity,

 

because we don’t want to just be taking any action. We want to take the right action and most efficiently, so smart. So there’s loads I go into in the book and productivity. I actually, it’s a big thing that, although the IPA acronym is it’s only three letters I had to do productivity planning and productivity execution, because it’s about, you know,

 

plan, execute, plan execute. Right. Right. And I think before you go into it, you’re an expert in this. Did you realize that I know a lot of entrepreneurs that have the best laid plans, but then zero ability to execute. Is that why in your experience of dealing this, you know, entrepreneurs, we can think of these,

 

Oh, this is going to be the plan. We can even set the plan, lay the plan out the steps of the plan, reverse engineer, the plan, Gantt chart, the plan, whatever it is, but then actually doing it tends to be a lot harder. So is that because we all struggle in this? Yeah. Yeah. Well,

 

I was a chronic over planner. I would just plan, plan, plan, plan, plan. The other thing though, too, that I noticed with myself was that I was also a world-class procrastinator and may have something to do with the entrepreneurial mindset because of our tendency to dream and to, you know, think about, you know, big opportunities and the next big thing,

 

it’s almost like this, you know, proneness for distraction, right. Or at least it was for me. And so I had to transform myself from a chronic procrastinator to a super producer. And, you know, we won’t have time to go into all the productivity tools, but I want to drive home. One in particular that I think is mind blowing.

 

So the average person loses and this, this data, I first picked up, by the way from the book, the one thing, the average person under observation loses 28% of their Workday to multitasking and effectiveness. So the person thinks that they’re multitasking in an efficient way, but what they’re really doing is they’re doing what’s called task switching, going from one thing to the next,

 

very, very rapidly. And that leads to a 28% loss in the day, because rather than sticking with one thing, they’re jumping around. So when they get back to the thing that they originally intended to work on, they’ve lost their place. They have to retrace their steps at the regain, their momentum, all of this leads to lost time, 28% loss of a day.

 

Now the book just leaves the stat right there. And I thought, hang on a second. This is like not doing that stat justice. So I took that number and I said, well, let’s generously take off six weeks for vacation in a year. So let’s do 28% loss against 46 work weeks. That means that the average person is losing 13 weeks a year,

 

which is an entire calendar quarter. So of course you don’t feel productive. Of course you don’t feel like there’s not enough time for everything you’ve lost a whole quarter every year Because you aren’t productive. And because you would have lost all that time. I mean, you’re playing a game of basketball and you’re going against the competition. You get to the end of the third quarter and then news to you.

 

Somebody says, Oh, by the way, we’ve got to tell you, but you and the rest of your team had to sit out the fourth quarter. You’re like, huh. And you’re like, well, how do we even have a chance of winning then? And they’re like, Oh we don’t. Yeah. It’s. So if we extrapolate that across a 40 year career,

 

that means that the average person loses an entire decade. What could you do with an extra decade? That’s like two more careers potentially. Wow. So what’s the problem here? The problem is people just jumping around too much throughout the day that in their phone disturbed their, their focus and the concentration, having too many browser tabs, open notifications coming in left,

 

right and center all of these lures to kind of guide us off our path for peak performance, our path for realizing our full potential that’s the issue. And so what we have to combat all of that with is developing the power of single tasking, which is a bit of a lost art, especially nowadays with smartphones angle tasking is nothing more than making sure you stick with what you’re working on for a good chunk of time.

 

At least 30 minutes provided there’s 30 minutes of work to do. I like to shoot for, you know, 30 minute chunks throughout my day. And then I take a break after 30 minutes. And the way you can develop the habit of single tasking is by becoming a lawyer for a few weeks. And what I mean, what I read is that lawyers timesheet their days because otherwise they don’t know where to assign the client time.

 

And when I thought about that, I thought, well, if a lawyer can do this every single day as part of their career, then I could certainly should be able to manage it for like, you know, few weeks. So all I did was I had four columns activity start time, end time, total minutes. And I literally recorded every single task I did from the time I woke up to the time I went to bed kind of before and after work,

 

I was more like grouping stuff together. You know, it’s like getting ready for example. But once I started the Workday, it was everything. So working on presentation nine to nine, 13, nine, 13 to nine 17, LinkedIn nine and 17 to nine 20, you know, Google search nine 20 to nine 23, reheated coffee and check Twitter.

 

And the alarming thing that it revealed was just how much task switching was going on. On the first day that I did this, I had 77 entries in my Workday. Wow. As I was bouncing around unknowingly from one thing to the next. So when you do this, it does two things. One, it raises an unprecedented level of awareness in you in terms of where is my time actually going and how often,

 

you know, am I switching and bouncing around? And then two, it starts to become kind of painful when you have two for the third time, for example, on a day, right. Facebook 20. Right, Right, right. It’s really eye-opening. And I could see how that would be incredibly. Eye-opening really, really fast. And gosh,

 

I mean, I just think that there is so much last time, by the way, the one thing is one of my favorite books of all time. And we’ll make sure that the notes to that book as well are in the show notes for this show. And I think that one of the things that you’re saying here was really, really interesting, the art of single tasking.

 

So when we single task and chunk our time and block calendar, a block and tackle and do those things, how fast and how much more of an increased you see in productivity in your clients that you have do that. I mean, is that like instant results that they’re seeing when they actually change these are, what are your case studies working with clients who have,

 

who’ve really tried to apply this. Yeah, that’s a great question. So we’re not machines, we’re not robots. And so what that means is that we can’t actually reclaim the entire 28% and then that may lead you to believe that, okay. So then I can’t actually get the full quarter back. That’s actually not true because when you start to develop your ability to focus,

 

it also speeds up your output for the 72%. That wasn’t an issue anyway. Right. So what I see is, well, beyond then the 28% capture, it’s almost like people are becoming twice as productive as they previously were and that’s life changing, right? Because you’re producing more with the time you have. And that suddenly gives you the time that you are yearning for when it comes to your health and your relationships.

 

And yeah, it’s been life-changing for me to personally, because I just work, you know, with an extreme sense of focus I’m intensely on and then intensely off. And there’s no real anxiety during my Workday. There’s so much to be said to this. Like you were saying, I mean, it’s, you guys are just going to be super excited when you get a chance to experience Eric’s book with that being said again,

 

there’s so many things we could talk about, but moving on to the anti-fragility, let’s talk about that and why that is so important. We were talking about it a little bit behind the scenes before we started recording. What exactly is that to our listeners who are just wondering, I don’t even know how to define that necessarily in my life. Yeah. Okay.

 

So let’s play a game. Let’s say that you are a shipping container, you know, and my question would be, well, what does the container or the crate, you know, say on the side, if you’re that crate, what’s your label, is it fragile? And then that means you get hit a couple of times you break. And then my question to you would be,

 

well, what’s the opposite of being fragile. And then you’ll say probably something like robust, you know, or strong, robust, and strong synonyms, you know? So that just means that, okay, I can kick you a few more times and eventually you break and then you might say, no, no, no, no, no, no,

 

no, no, no. I’m resilient. Okay. Well, by definition, that means that we can keep hitting you and you’ll absorb the shock and you’ll stay the same. It’s like, Oh, okay, well that’s pretty good. Enter antifragile. The more we kick you, the stronger the crate becomes, wow. That’s where we want to be.

 

Now people, when they first hear this say, okay, wishful thinking, that’s like, you know something in a Marvel movie, that’s, that’s not reality, but then you’re dead wrong because every single person, your body is a perfect temple for anti-fragility. You stress a muscle and it causes it to grow. You expose the body to germs and bacteria.

 

It builds the immune system. You expose tissues to, you know, small doses of, you know, ultra by light. And it actually generates vitamin D you’re already, anti-fragile physiologically your body’s already doing it without you even realizing it. So it’s hard coded in your DNA. You just need to get what’s happening in your body, up into your head.

 

And so anti-fragility is about realizing that the gym, where you go and you train doesn’t need to just be there in the gym. You can turn life into one massive training camp. So every moment of adversity, challenge, frustration, disappointment thing, that doesn’t go your way. It’s nothing more than a personal trainer in the gym of life, walking up to you and saying,

 

Hey, here’s a Dumbo. Do you want to curl it? And you can either grab the dumbbell, curl it, complete the repetition and grow stronger as a result. Or you can wimp out and walk out of the gym. So it’s up to you. And the antifragile mentality says, yeah, I’ll take that dumbbell. Yeah. And if you’re in an argument with somebody,

 

for example, and now they escalate the argument, all that’s happening there is that they’re saying here here’s a heavier Dumbo and you could walk away or you could stay there and you can curl it with your best self. So loads of different ways of building this mentally, you know, anti-fragility, you know, that I cover in the book, but probably the most powerful,

 

I mean, there’s so I have so many favorites, so hard to choose. Okay, I’ll go with this one. If you can embrace this, just this, if you forget everything else I’ve just said, and if you just embrace this one thing, even if you forget to pick up the free digital copy of the book, that’s fine, but just don’t miss this point.

 

And that’s in 2021. Do you want to remain amateur in life or do you want to turn pro let’s start with an amateur. So the first half of my career, I let an amateur existence by that I made feeling for me, preceded action. I needed feel like doing things in order to do them. So feeling generated action. That’s how an amateur lives their life.

 

And the amateur will get amateur. Results a pro knows that it’s action that generates feeling the equation is literally flipped, which means they don’t need to feel like doing something in order to take action. They take action, whether they feel like it or not. And in fact, when you really upgrade this kind of way of being or mentality, the less you feel like doing something,

 

the more discomfort it presents you, the more you step into it, the more you say it’s there for in that direction. I must step, you know, it’s sorta like elite warriors are trained to run towards the sound of gunfire, not a way. Right? And so turning pro versus remaining an amateur, what do you want 20, 21 to be?

 

And where have you been an amateur in life? And where can you develop a professional mentality and know that action generates feelings, not the other way around. Wow. Eric, I’ve never heard it explained as well as you just explained that there, thank you so much. I mean, that was just, I mean, the anti-fragility part in one of the things you said,

 

let me look back at my notes here. So I have it, is that the resilience you bounce off and stay the same. And so many you hear that talked about so often like, Oh my gosh, well, you need to be resilient and just bounce around and just pop off this. But what we’re talking about is, yeah, resilience keeps you exactly where you were before you don’t go forward.

 

You don’t go backwards. You just bounce off and you remain the same in the way that you’ve just explained that with actually changing with actually becoming stronger from each one of the blows, the pushes, the drops, whatever it is super amazing. And I love everything that you said, and I know our listeners are just really going to get a ton out of this.

 

Not only that that’s so generous of you to give away a digital copy of your book and for your time here on the show, this is the perfect show. So Jeff Goins introduced us. Thank you, Jeff, for bringing Eric here on the show. Jeff was a guest on the show. Oh my gosh. Like almost four years ago now in the very beginning,

 

when we first launched and he was right on about you being perfect for our audience and your message that you wanted to share. And I’m so glad that you’re here and this is exactly what we were looking for for honestly, for me personally, to kick off 2021, you know, we have guests on the show. I learned so much from you and really wanting to find somebody that was saying exactly what I selfishly personally needed to hear right now is an entrepreneur and a mother and a leader.

 

And what I would consider was a peak performer up until 2020. And now I just feel like I have been resilient and I have not necessarily gotten stronger through this. And so I will look at myself very, very closely after today’s episode. And I’m super excited to dive in more to the work that you’re doing and really appreciate your time on this show.

 

And so tell everybody how they find you. I’m really into reading print copies. I love holding a book in my hands, how they can experience your work, where you hang out when you are being incredibly focused and hanging out online, not all the time and how they can work with you when they’re ready to really take their business and their life to the next level.

 

Yeah. I just have to say April that, you know, when you say, wow, I really needed this personally. Hey, me too. You know, the reason that I’ve done all of this is not because I wasn’t born thinking this way. I had to become an expert about all this stuff because I really needed it. I needed to become anti-fragile.

 

I needed to become more productive. I needed to start living more intentionally. So we’re all on the same boat on that. So I just wanted to say that. So, okay. The book, if you like print copies of the book, please head over to Amazon, amazon.com, amazon.co.uk. I’m based here in the, in London, in the United Kingdom,

 

but either Amazon will have the book. If you head over to my website at Erik, Erik with a C Eric partaker, just like it sounds partaker.com got a free digital copy of the book waiting for you there. And I have some free three-part video training with worksheets as well, waiting for you there that will help you further embed some of the concepts in the book I’m coming out with an entire video course that I’m filming actually this week,

 

like over 40 different modules, all about IPA, which will be available on the website by the time this airs. And then if you’re listening and you’re like, look, I think I benefit from even just a chat, a single kind of peak performance insight session, which, which I run, you know, on a free basis with people, or if you’re like,

 

I need a coach or any of that, then just get in touch via the website. And, you know, we can have a chat, basically. I’m looking after, at the moment, 24 CEOs, entrepreneurs, other coaches, and they’re running everything from billion dollar businesses down to pre-revenue, you know, they’re just getting their funds raised to start their business,

 

but they all share the same quest. They want to close the gap between their current and best self. They want to reach their full potential and they want to do it. Multidimensionally and then, you know, my email, Eric, Eric partaker.com. So there you go, Thank you so much and we’ll make sure all those links are in the show notes.

 

And thank you so much for your time. I am super stoked to kick off 2021 with you, Eric and great to be connected with you. Thank you.<inaudible> Right. And that is a wrap for episode number 208 here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. You can find all of the show notes and the digital copy of the book that Eric’s promised you here on today’s show by visiting Sweetlife co.com

 

simply click on podcast. And this is episode number 208. And for those of you guys that are really ready to kick off this year with a bang, make sure to join us for commitment week 2021. It is coming up on January the 11th, totally free to join, and we are going to be covering five different aspects to reset and refocus your business for 2021.

 

It’ll take less than seven minutes a day. You guys it’s insane. We’ll go ahead and leave the link to join commitment week 2021, as well as the link to download Eric’s book in the show notes, or you can also just simply join commitment week by visiting Sweetlife coat.com forward slash commitment dash week dash 2021. Right? You guys be awesome. Can’t wait to talk to you next week.

 

Bye bye. For now

Episode 206: 3 Tips To Put Family First As An Entrepreneur & Create More Time Freedom – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Download: The Ultimate Guide to Choosing the Online Business Model That’s Right for You

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Start to Scale Up System™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz
 
Small business owners who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. 

Summary:

Growing a company while raising a family is a lot of work. Oftentimes entrepreneurs feel maxed out, and “Cat’s in the Cradle” by Harry Chapin breaks your heart. You started your company for freedom, and you know you can obtain it, but you don’t want to wait to sell or years more of hard work before reaping family life’s rewards. 
 
In this episode we break down 3 practical systems you can implement this week, that require minimal work and will gain you maximum time freedom.

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. See how you can tweak your business model right now to create more time
  2. Know the power of messy days, how to schedule them and why you’ll love them
  3. Know more creative ways you can connect with your #1 team (family)

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi, you guys. And welcome to episode number 206 of the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, and Merry Christmas to those of you who are listening to this live and happy holidays to everybody, regardless of what you celebrate here,

 

we are celebrating family, and I just hope that this show reaches you and that you’re blessed by what we talk about today. Thank you so much for tuning in with us over the holidays. We’ve never missed an episode so far. And this year with all that’s happened in 2020 is no exception. And so today we are talking about three simple ways to put family first as an entrepreneur and create more time.

 

So whether you’re listening to this live and it is Christmas week here in 2020, or you’re listening to this down the road, everything we’re talking about is a proven business strategy that you’re going to be able to take to the bank and create more time in your life, whatever you want your life to look like. I know that many of you who’ve listened to this show for years.

 

You know, that half of the time my teenage boys are walking in and out of the door. On the other side of, of my office recording here, you know, with their friends or to the skate park, you know, wherever it is that you are doing life, we need to create a business model, a lifestyle around enabling that. And so this show fits really well into what we’re talking about right now with the holidays,

 

with, you know, really cherishing life. I think the one thing that for us, it was just such a hidden blessing that came out of 2020 is just really loving being together at home and cherishing time. The one thing that money can’t buy is a second of time. And so a lot of things we’re talking about here on the show we’ve been talking about for years,

 

but in this episode is all strategies to control time into a create as much time so that you are enabling family first in your business. This episode is for those of you guys who are in any phase of my start to scale up system. And so that’s phase one through five, whether you’re just thinking about starting a business, or you are a seasoned entrepreneur,

 

that’s making a huge impact this show. And what we’re talking about here applies to all of you guys who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. Because the reality is, is a growing a company and raising a family is a lot of work. And oftentimes we as entrepreneurs feel super maxed out right in that song, cats in the cradle,

 

I’d sing it to you, but I’ve a really terrible voice that song comes on and it’s like heartbreaking. And, and I was actually just listening to it last week with my boys. And one of my kids asked guys, you know, I love song, but what does it actually mean? And I was like, ah, you know, it’s about this dad that worked so hard that he never had time for his kid and he regretted it.

 

And it was like, Oh, that through the gut, I know we feel that as entrepreneurs. So that’s how we were talking about some strategies here on the show. At the end of this episode, this is what you’re going to know. So you are going to see how you can tweak your current business model right now to create more time like instantly right now,

 

as you’re listening to the show, we are going to talk about the power of messy days, how you can schedule them and why you will love messy days. And I’m going to share with you some behind the scenes about how I schedule these types of things. And you are going to know more creative ways that you can connect with your number one team,

 

which is your family. And if you don’t have kids in your listening to this show, this family, your family is your support system, your network, whatever that looks like to you, all of our lives are beautifully different. And so whatever that looks like to you, you’re going to be able to take the strategies that we talk about here on this episode and apply them right away to your business and for all the show notes and the resources we mentioned here in the show,

 

cruise over to Sweetlife co.com. Again, that Sweetlife co.com click on podcast. And this is episode number two, zero six. Okay. Let’s dive into today’s strategies. It’s going to be a real quick show cause it’s a holiday week, but really powerful. So stick with me.<inaudible> Step number one, in order to create more time in your business for family and lifestyle freedom,

 

we need to look at your business model. So your business model can either bury you or save you. So the first thing I want you to look at is really how you’re serving clients. How much of that time does that of your time, does that take within a week and understand the demands of delivering certain projects or services places on your time, energy and your ability to focus.

 

First of all, what do you do? Take a look at what you do. Just kind of picture your, your week and how you’re working with clients. Do you work with people? One-on-one do you work with people, one on group? How does that really look in your life? And right now I want you to assess that. And I want you to understand the time that’s required,

 

that you are spending currently working with your clients and take a look at this current business model that you have. What does that look like? How do you work with people? Is it one-on-one? Is it one on group? How frequently in the first thing you want to do is you want to ask yourself, you know, Hey, is this working for me or is the actual amount of time that I’m spending with my clients taking away time from family?

 

Now one might say, well, wow, isn’t that great? You know, you’re, you’re so busy. Your business is so busy. You have so many clients. Yes, that is true, but busy doesn’t equal. Good. So we’re going to give you some tips here to take a look at turning busy-ness into profit and time. And so the first thing I want you to do is I want you to ask yourself,

 

what can I change right now? So that would be, are you seeing clients five days a week? You and these are just some suggestions for you. Can you block and tackle your client days as an example, I only work with clients privately on Thursdays and Fridays. And I’ve shared this with you guys on the show before, and I’ll share with you again,

 

because I just get great feedback from this time. Number one, I think, I think best when I consolidate my work. So if I know that Thursdays and Fridays are, or my business coaching days, when I work with entrepreneurs and small businesses, then I get in that mindset and I know what I’m doing. I also then can look at my business model and I can say,

 

okay, all of these businesses are in this same type of need, this same type of area. And so now I’m going to create groups and I actually scale my business model and I always do this again, reassess it. So I have, if I have five clients that are in the same place and need the same things, I actually will offer a group strategy call for those clients.

 

It’s great for me, it’s great for them to network with other people and everybody gets the same results. So I want you to look at your business right now and ask yourself, can I number one block and tackle my days. And then within those days, what sort of smart scaling can I do for my business model? So can you create group offers?

 

Can you create some on-demand content that your clients or your customers might want to absorb, instead of saying the same thing to different people? One-on-one can you create maybe an online resource center for your clients to tap into some of your more, more frequently asked questions to help save some of that time or even create a course or an actual program for them to go through online.

 

Other strategies for you are creating maybe a membership committee, unity, or an online forum this year can be done with Slack or something easily with boxer, where you create a group of people that you want to connect with and you want to help them Connect with each other, but you don’t want to launch a full-blown membership site because that might not really work with your actual business model.

 

So those are some suggestions of things that you can look at right now in your business, so that you can say, Hey, listen, what can I actually change immediately? What can I actually group together to save my time? And what are the dates phase where I would like to serve my clients? Another reason I haven’t mentioned it here, but why I serve clients on Thursdays and Fridays is because of the entire beginning of my week is on business building content creation and actual strategy.

 

And so I take care of the business building inside in the beginning of my week, when my mind is fresh. For example, I’m recording this podcast episode on a Monday, usually record on Mondays or Tuesdays. When I know that I can put really powerful, highly impacting content. And then I take care of serving my clients because once I go in and I start immersing myself in my client’s businesses,

 

it fully takes over all my thought processes. So that’s one of the reasons why I serve clients towards the end of the week. And then I have that weekend break in between. So action item. Number one is take a look at your current business model. Can you group together the days that you serve your customers, serve your clients, and can you make some changes to how you’re serving your clients?

 

Creating group offers a membership community, or even just an online forum and really take a look at controlling instead of spreading yourself out throughout the week, consolidating your work into different types of work that you were doing at a time. That’s really strategy. Number one, within that same strategy. We talked about this a few episodes ago on the show within that same strategy,

 

you should be planning your year in advance. So planning what you’re selling when you’re selling it. So, you know, we have a big macro plan and then we have a micro plan week by week. So you really should be taking a look at what’s happening for the year to come. Regardless of when you’re listening to this episode, you can do this at any point in time and really know what you’re selling when you’re selling it and what demands that’s going to put on your life and your family,

 

okay. Strategy, or I should say, tip number two is my favorite. And I call it for the love of messy days. This is what a messy day is. A messy day is a day that I have scheduled in the middle of my week. My messy day is always Wednesday. And that day is a break between my strategy and my content creation at the beginning of the week.

 

And my client service at the end of the week, messy days are totally to be spontaneous. And this is an amazing thing. It’s especially amazing if you have teenagers like I do. So on my messy days, I really don’t schedule any client meetings, but this is the day I schedule like the kids’ teeth cleaning, or if I need to stop by the grocery store or any appointments like I would have for myself,

 

like going to get my eyelashes glued on or a haircut, all of those things are always scheduled on a Wednesday. This is also the day where I am completely able to be spontaneous with my kids. Do I have to get work done? Yes. I still work on messy days. So Wednesday is my favorite day to be this day. But it’s also the day that,

 

you know, if my kids just want to sit down and, and have a cup of coffee and hang out where I always don’t have somewhere to be, I always can make sure that that is in that day. And they literally throw the plan out the window again. Do you have a list of things you have to get done on messages? Yes.

 

Are they so regimented and scheduled? Not at all is one of the things I love doing with my kids on messy days is we have this taco wagon down the street and it’s just this amazing Mexican food that’s here in Lafayette, Colorado love taco wagon, and the kids will just be hungry. I’ll say, Hey, let’s, let’s go to taco wagon and grab some tacos and it’s super spontaneous and they love it.

 

We listen to music. We play music messy days are the days where I can just stop and walk out of my office and share songs with the kids and listening to what they’re listening to, or watch YouTube videos or sit down and play call of duty, which by the way I suck at on Xbox. But I try, you know, those are the things we do on messy days.

 

And so messy days are a day sometime in your week, if you can’t fit it in every single week, maybe plan and schedule a messy day every two weeks. And again, this is the time for you to know this is when you can fit in your haircuts teeth, cleaning, having to run an errand, maybe go to the post office. But it’s also the day where you can totally stop and have a cup of coffee with a friend who just might really need you call your aunt on the phone,

 

who you haven’t talked to in forever. And all those things that get scheduled out because the schedule is too regimented. Messy days is totally to not be regimented, but you will love it because you’ll actually get more work done in the other days. When you know, you have your messy day, wherever that may land in your week. And then the third tip I have for you is to really over communicate with your family over communicate with your team.

 

Again, whoever that is, it can be, you know, young, old, it can be your dog. You know, I used to communicate with my toddlers, my boys, when I was working from home and say, okay, you know, mommy really has a lot of work to do for the next two hours. But after that, we’ll sit down and we’ll watch Mickey mouse together or whatever.

 

And so as long as you’re over communicating, what’s about to happen with your team. Then everybody is going into that with open eyes and they understand how they can support you in that process. Again, it doesn’t matter if they’re three or if they’re 35, they all understand that. So some suggestions on how to over communicate with everybody, but in a way,

 

that’s not going to take you too much time because that’s would be against the point of this whole entire episode is number one. Every single Sunday night, just have a quick weekly powwow. We do this all the time. We go through the week, we look at our calendars, see what’s coming up and everybody’s just on the same page. It literally takes five minutes and that’s for a family of five to do,

 

but it helps to just communicate and what’s to come. It also helps us all mentally prepare for the week ahead and how we want to show up in that week. We also have a nightly pregame. And so a nightly pregame again, literally takes like one minute saying, okay, this is what the morning is going to look like. This is what I have today.

 

This is what you know, you have going on this next day. This is what this looks like for our family. Let’s again, have everybody be on the same page. It’s also the place where I can take a minute. If my kids need to talk about school or things they’re struggling with and help them strategize a plan to, you know, maybe make up some schoolwork,

 

which frankly has been a lot since everybody’s doing online school and it’s a freaking mess. I won’t go down that rabbit hole, but it’s a time for me to really connect with my boys and hear like, yeah, I just have this, I have this math test tomorrow. I have no clue what I’m doing and really be able to focus in on them.

 

And I know that they really appreciate this nightly pre-game as well. Couple of things we also do and we’ve done for years and years and years is we calendar share. We’ve also taught our boys how to add things to our family calendar. So we have one Gmail address where we manage all of our kid and family things. And so anytime one of our kids has something they want to do.

 

They want to ride to the skate park or they want to go sleep over with a friend or whatever it may be. My boys can add that event and share it to our family calendar. So without even talking, we all know what everybody wants and needs over a period of time. And so everybody’s on the same page without taking any time whatsoever. And you might be asking like,

 

okay, how do I do this? My kids are five. Well, of course this is age appropriate, but I will say that we started teaching our boys to add things to our family, shared Gmail calendar when they were as young as nine years old. So these kids can do anything with tech, right? So you would be very surprised at the wishes we receive on our family calendar.

 

And it’s really cool. That’s how our kids get to do things because it’s planned in a way that works for everybody. And then the last suggestion that I would have for you is a family chat or a family WhatsApp channel or family Voxer. If you’ve never tried any of that, those are all awesome places to create a group chat where everybody’s on the same page.

 

And you as the business owner can even just shoot, instead of calling this person and telling this person to pick up that person, you can just get on your boxer and just say, okay, you know, I’m running 10 minutes late from this meeting. We’re having chicken for dinner. I’ll see you soon, whatever it is that you need to say,

 

you can, you can put in a box or chat to your family. And it’s a really efficient way to actually create more time. Again, if your family is, is a roommate, if your family is, you know, your other business team, or if it’s friends, whoever your people are, these are three simple ways to put those people,

 

to put your family first as an entrepreneur and create more time in your business. And so here’s what we talked about today. We talked about how does your current business model and know how to group your days together and what you can tweak and scale and your business model right now, in order to create more time each week, we also talked about messy days,

 

why you need messy days, why you’ll love them, why your family will love your messy days and really why it just frankly, it’s going to make you think, wow, I’m so glad I’m an entrepreneur instead of wow, crap. This is way harder than I thought it would be. Is there ever going to be a light at the end of this,

 

you know, constant tunnel of demands, messy days, fix that, like in an instant. So if any of these things I can say, I love my messy days the most. And then the third thing is think of more creative ways to connect with your family, whether it’s calendar share or Voxer and different ways to communicate, whether it’s a weekly powwow or a nightly powwow.

 

We talked about that as well. I hope you found some of these suggestions helpful to you and your team, your people, all the people that love you. And you know what it’s really special to have people in your life that love you so much. They just want more of you and they need more of you. That’s a gift. And you know,

 

I know we’re also grateful for that. So it’s really important as small business owners that we take strategies like this business model, calendar share and more practical lifestyle strategies in order to create this time and in life freedom, I’m here to help. I’m here to support you. It’s what I do here on the show. I’m a business strategist, but I’ve built multiple companies with kids.

 

I think I launched my first business when my youngest was six weeks old. So I totally get it. Whatever phase you’re in of parenting. Thank you so much for listening to this show. Again, happy holidays. Happy new year, let’s kick 2020, like to the curb behind us. And I’m so excited to start 2021 with you. We have a lot of amazing things coming up on the show,

 

including commitment week 20, 21, five days. I’m only 10 minutes a day to completely lay out your entire 20, 21 business plan coming up here next week. And so I dive into commitment week 2021 with us next week’s episode number 207. All right, you guys, I will talk to you soon. Have an awesome day.

Episode 205: How To Scale With Systems and Grow Your Team – with Ravi Abuvala

Ruvi Abuvala SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Access Ravi Abuvala’s Free Course: The Exact Steps We Took To Scale 2 Companies To 7-Figures In 18 Months!

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs and small businesses who want to scale by hiring Virtual Assistants but you don’t have the time to look for staff, the expertise to find the best help internationally or the systems in place to onboard your team to scale faster. 
 
This show is ideal for entrepreneurs in Phases 2-4 of my “Start To Scale Up System” – Take the quiz to learn your current business status

Summary:

It’s time to grow your business and you need help. But how do you find the right team members when you don’t have time (or knowledge) to onboard them? In this show, we’ve covering how to hire international help, how to onboard them correctly, and how to do this by using an outside agency. Ruvi Abuvala, founder of scalingwithsystem.com is on the show dishing the powerful secrets his company uses to help other businesses grow and scale with team, systems and “The Ramping Bible”, and how to leverage these in your business right away. 
 
We’re answering these questions about Hiring/Working With Virtual Assistants
  • When is the right time to hire your first virtual assistant?
  • Should everyone hire one? When would you not want to?
  • Where do you hire your virtual assistants from? What are the pros and cons of those areas?
  • How do you know what to take off your plate (delegate) first?
  • How do you make sure there is strong communication and reliability?
  • Should you hire one virtual assistant for everything or multiple virtual assistants for each task?

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. Understand the exponential scaleability of teams
  2. Be aware of the need for (or update of) onboarding systems 
  3. Know which onboarding systems to create first
  4. Have all the answers to the questions posed above

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
For help building offers, courses or programs that Scale visit www.signatureoffer.com
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome to another episode of the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. I’m April beach, your host, and I’m super glad That you’re here today is a heavy heading show. And you’re going to get a lot of powerful,

 

valuable information. I can’t wait to introduce you to our guest, but if you’re a new listener here to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, I just wanted to say, hello. I’m April beach, the host of this show and founder of the Sweetlife company. And we help experts, entrepreneurs and small businesses scale online, develop your signature offers and become the undisputed leader in your space by providing business consulting and services to service-based entrepreneurs and companies looking to grow and scale with online services,

 

programs, and digital products in everything that we do here on the show. This is our outreach. This is where we deliver proven business trainings from decades of business coaching that you would pay thousands of dollars to get this business strategy. We deliver to you here on the show, totally free. So thank you so much for tuning in, and I can’t wait to dive into today’s show today.

 

We’re talking about how to scale with systems and grow your team. This is episode number 205, which means all of the show notes can be found by visiting sweet life co.com click on podcast and episode two Oh five on today’s show. We’re specifically talking to those of you guys who want to scale your business by hiring virtual assistants, but you don’t have the time to look for the staff yourself.

 

You might not have the expertise in the areas you’re looking to hire. And so it’s hard for you to sort actually who’s the right candidate because you yourself may not know or be a master in a certain area, and you need systems in place to scale your business faster. This show is ideal for those of you guys who are in phases, two, three or four of my start to scale up system.

 

If you aren’t sure your current business status, cruise over to sweet life code.com forward slash quiz, you can just pause this episode for a second and you can just answer six questions. You’ll get your exact business status and a checklist of things you should be focusing on to grow and scale your company faster. So it’s time to grow your business and you need help,

 

but you need to find the right team members. Today’s cast is absolutely insane. You’re going to love this guy in the very best way. He is the founder of scaling with systems. And on this show, we are dishing out powerful secrets that he uses in his company to scale his business faster. And these are the questions that you are going to know the answers to at the end of this episode,

 

when is the right time to hire your first virtual assistant? Should everybody hire a VA when you not want to hire a VA, where do you hire your virtual assistants from what are the pros and cons of those areas? So US-based versus internationally. How do you know what to take off your plate and delegate first? So at the end of this show,

 

you are going to have a list of the most common roles first fulfilled by virtual assistants, by companies looking to scale, how do you make sure there is a strong communication and reliability when you hire out internationally and should you hire one virtual assistant for everything or multiple virtual assistants for each task? Today’s guest expert is rubby of Evolla. And he’s the founder of scale with systems and business accelerator that works to bootstrap and scale their client’s businesses leveraging paid advertising sales funnels,

 

and fully trained overseas VAs, which is the area we’re focusing on today. And the past 14 months, not 14 years in the past 14 months, he has scaled to seven figure businesses with less than a thousand dollars of his own capital in four commission-based employees. Today, he’s worked with over 500 firms around the world and place 300, excuse me, 630 virtual assistants.

 

And he’s spoken on some of the largest stages into the industry, including being featured by Fox news, Forbes and entrepreneur. So without further ado, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s podcast episode. Again, all the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode number two, zero five<inaudible> Are you guys well, I am joined by Ravi ABA Vala here on the show because it’s time for us to talk about how to scale your business with teams.

 

And this is not something that comes naturally to most entrepreneurial leaders. You know, we’re really good at our area of genius. You know, our zone of genius, what we do the ways in which we give people Results, but when it comes to scaling, there’s a couple of bottlenecks. One is usually business model and the second one is growing teams.

 

And this is something that I have really struggled with as a leader of both of my own companies as well. And it’s not something that comes naturally to me. And so I was super stoked that Ravi wanted to be on this show. And today we’re diving into really how to scale your business, not only by initially growing teams, but growing teams and then sub teams,

 

and really how to scale the actual teams themselves. Some things that I don’t think we talk about enough as entrepreneurs and experts as leaders. So Robbie, thank you so much and welcome to the show April. Thanks so much for having me here. I am super excited, listen to the podcast for a little bit as well. And I know that majority of it is just pure value.

 

So that is exactly what I aim to give everybody that’s listening to this today. So thank you guys for your time and you as well, April. So thanks for having me here. Yeah, I’m super stoked. Okay. So today we’re Going to dive into a couple of different areas. First of all, remote teams, internationally based remote teams. We’re going to talk about,

 

we’re also going to talk about your expert process of growing remote teams, how you onboard people, and then we’re going to dive into how to scale your teams within your teams. So I think one of the first questions that we need to tackle for our listeners here is just breezing by this, because they’ll have all your resources and where to find this more,

 

but just as a foundation, you know, how do people really find expert remote, highly qualified individuals, really outside of the U S to work for them? Yeah, that’s an awesome question. And it’s one that we obviously hear all the time, and I think with anything in life, you have two kind of ways of doing it. It’s like,

 

you’re going to roll up your sleeves. You’re going to figure it out. You’re going to do it yourself, which is awesome. Especially if you’re just starting and you have like the training and everything to go along with it. And you want to take them from just like an anybody to the expert of their fields. That’s one way to do it. And the other way to do it as essentially,

 

you know, working with some kind of third-party company or working with a recruiter, to finding somebody who already has a lot of the skills and qualifications of the tasks that you’re looking to get completed, and then pretty much transplanting them into your team at that point. And then you’re pretty much only selling them on your culture and your vision. So you have two different avenues.

 

You can kind of go down. I see people going through both. We do both, depending on what we’re going, if it’s like a hyper specialized expert in a certain field that like, I don’t even know how to deliver that result. Like, as you grow in scale, if you’re listening to this, everyone’s like go only delegate to people. What,

 

you know how to do it. Well, then you’re locked in this like sphere of like knowledge. And instead you’re gonna get to the point where it’s like, I don’t know how to do this, but I want to do this. And so, you know, I need to hire someone that already knows it. So there’s that aspect of him, which is a little scary,

 

but it was almost like, we’ll talk about later, you communicate KPIs. I think it’s okay. And then like on the other side is like, Hey, I already know how to do this. So maybe I don’t have to go find somebody else that knows how to do this. I can just teach this person to myself, but then you kind of create those systems and that ramping Bible that I’m sure we’ll talk about here in a little bit,

 

that helps them kind of grow along that process. Okay. So this is a really good opportunity. I want people to know, how did you get into this? Like you didn’t, you didn’t start this, did you say I’m going to be a scale expert and help people build teams? So share a little bit of your background in, in why this is now your Ninja skill.

 

Yeah, so I keep it really short because I want to stay on the value. But very long story short was going to go to law school, graduated college. My dad was diagnosed with stage four lung cancer. I had to go take care of him. Instead of law school, I finally got into law school, decided it wasn’t for me. I dropped out sort of my first company prospect social was an advertising agency and knew nothing about systems.

 

You don’t think about process. Like I was just like, I’m going to come at this just with pure hard work, like pure grinding hustle mode. And for the first eight months I gained about 50 pounds. I was like losing hair. I was getting gray hairs and I made $3,000. The first six, eight months of business, $3,000 as a screenshot on my website.

 

You can see it. And I almost thought that I made the wrong decision. Then I hired my first coach or consultants. I went to a mastermind. I hired my first coaching consultant. He showed me really the powers of virtual assistants, the powers of systems, the power of sales funnels. I know a lot of the stuff that you guys cover as well.

 

I implemented that stuff. Next month, we did $30,000. Within six months, we had done a hundred thousand dollars in one month and now that’s a multi seven figure business. And just from that moment that I hit the map by having that first month to a, you know, a few months later when people started seeing me living abroad and traveling the world,

 

I just had a bunch of people reaching out to me. How did you do this? You know, we were in the same Facebook group and at the same level and all of a sudden you’re shot up here. And so I just pretty much was like, yeah, that’s pretty much just like the sales funnels and these virtual assistants. And here’s how you do it.

 

And long story short, you know, I think a lot of great businesses if you know, like Slack or a few others, like it’s never really, the intention for that main business was ever to start it, but you just have people like banging on your door. Like, you know, you’re trying to sell one thing and they’re like, I want this other thing.

 

And so that was kind of the Genesis of scaling with systems. Yeah. I love it. I love it. And we’ll make sure there’s a link to your company and how to work with you as well to do this. So we have these first hires and it is, it’s such a big problem for business owners. You know, we have these first hires,

 

but they’re on board, but let’s talk about actually how to interview them. You have a really special onboarding process this too. I know from talking to so many companies and I personally know within my own business that developing the onboarding process is a ton of work to do it right in. Sometimes, you know, you really fail in a way that you’re not going to get the end result for that new person.

 

So talk to us about your it’s. You call it the ramping Bible and really how to do this, how to bring people, team members on board. Yeah. It’s super interesting. It’s like, you know, anytime you just sit down and I know you work with a lot of like people that are creating their intellectual property on coursework or whatever it is.

 

And so, you know, I don’t know about anybody else, but when I’m doing it, it’s like, I’m not getting paid for that necessarily yet. And so it’s really hard to like, take that time, carve it out and do it. It’s it’s just like, there’s like leverage data and you’re like, I’m going to get paid later for this.

 

But right now this is really difficult. And the onboarding process is something super similar. And so a lot of people, they don’t have any kind of onboarding process. They don’t have any kind of training. And so instead what they’ll do is just hire someone and they’re like, okay, go do this thing. Or then they’re trying to spend all this time training them and that’ll work with their first hire and maybe for the hire after that.

 

But if you’re smart enough, you know how to, which I wasn’t smart enough with just so everyone here knows I had to learn the hard way, but now we help our clients avoid it. You can create this kind of onboarding training process. We call the ramping Bible inside of scaling, which systems is 35 pages long. It’s a Google document. And it literally starts out like we have one for our commission-based sales position literally starts out with just like,

 

Hey, this is why we’re hiring you. And this is the importance of this position. These are the KPIs. And then these are also the<inaudible>. These are the goals. If you do this, you’re going to make this money. If you do this, you’re going to make this. So there’s no like end of the year bonus, there’s no like,

 

you know, you’re going to get promoted at Rockefeller. And it’s just like, here’s how you will make more money and graduate in our company. And we lay it out from everything into Z. And then after that, I’m telling them because a lot of people mistake this and they don’t even have this systemized, but why should you work for scaling systems?

 

Why should you work for this company? Like, what’s the vision here? What’s the dream here? What are our past clients? Like you have to sell your employees on working with you. And if you don’t and they’re going to leave the first opportunity that they get. And so then we have a few pages on like who we are, what my bad,

 

that story. I just told you a second ago, like about my dad, the lung cancer, the drop out of school. And then we get into kind of the hard skill stuff, which is like, Hey, here’s how you send cold emails. Usually you scrape leads. Here’s how you send LinkedIn messages. Here’s how you do demo calls. There’s do qualifying calls.

 

I mean, it took me probably two months to get the whole thing together. But now, you know, between the 1800 virtual assistants that we’ve hired in the past two years, and then, you know, I personally have onboarded 35 different team members inside of our company. All I literally do is, and I’ll tell you guys a little hack, which we don’t have to get into,

 

but our salespeople pay us $1,500 to come work for our company and make us money because we give them a pretty much a done for you course almost. That’s like, here’s how you make money online. These are you doing. And we just have our service as a thing that they deliver for. And so we’re teaching them to be like top 1% salespeople,

 

you know, top 1% lead generators. And so some of my sales guys, I have a guy in Canada he’s 17 years old and making like close to $10,000 a month at 17 years old selling our stuff. And so if you can have something that comprehensive from a to Z, then you can get a 17 year old in Canada to sell for you.

 

You can get someone in the Philippines to do ads for you or client fulfillment or whatever, the backend stuff for us, but it kind of all lays on and falls on that foundational ramping Bible or whatever you want to call it. That someone gets whenever they join your company. Okay, that’s genius. I’m sold. I want your ramping Bible. And I want my own ramping Bible for the Sweetlife company.

 

Absolutely. You know, I thought our brand introduction onboarding process was cool. Well, definitely no where doesn’t even hold a candle to this. So if you guys are listening, clearly this is the gold standard. This is what needs to be done that alone. We could end this podcast episode on, well, you could just do that. You’re going to scale exponentially just by doing that,

 

this ramping Bible, you have it for your own company and your own systems, but then do you also help other companies develop their own ramping Bible based on what you have established there? Let’s talk about that a little bit. Yeah. A hundred percent. So like if I was to just get people, the Randy Bible straight as we haven’t and probably overwhelmed a lot of people,

 

right? Unless they like have multiple team members already and they have people to work on and consume the content. It’s like people would lose their minds. So instead we’re kind of build pieces of the ramping Bible together. So they get to see ours, they get understand what is involved in ours. We help them build it. But instead of being like,

 

Hey, do this for every position in your company, usually cause we place these virtual assistants for our, we start there and we’re like, okay, this is what they need to be trained on. And we actually train them for our clients. So we do, they do a 60 day bootcamp and we do all the work for them. So they’re kind of getting the done for you,

 

virtual assistant, but then it’s like, Hey, you know, what do you need to, we teach them how to great, obviously SOP standard operating procedures. So, you know, what do you need to reference back to what happens if you make another hire, right? What happens this virtual assistant leaves, whatever it is. And so we help them build this ramping Bible with them.

 

And we usually start in the lead generation side because that is an, our experience where a lot of people are lacking in their business is just like, you don’t have enough appointments or people in their calendar. And then once we get past that, then we can start talking about ramping Bibles for sales or ramping Bibles for our account management or ramping Bibles for chief operating officers or any one of those other positions.

 

Yeah. So we kind of help our clients create that after they joined scaling with systems and then we’ll give them the virtual assistant, who’s going to go through it already, fully trained. Right. Oh my gosh. What an amazing outline, what amazing program you guys have. Okay. So this brings us to the next area that I really want to talk about.

 

So the majority of the listeners to this show are established small businesses, but if you really, they call us micro businesses. You know, if you look at a small business, it’s still, you know, a hundred people. So we’re talking, you know, businesses that have anywhere from eight to 20 team members or businesses that are listening to this show that might only have three team members right now,

 

but they need to get to 12 in order to fulfill all the roles within their company. This brings in so many other growing pains as far as from a management and scaling standpoint. So talk to us about your expertise, what you can pour into our listeners when it’s time to actually scale the team itself. What are the primary roles? We talked about a little bit behind the scenes before recording,

 

but what are the primary jobs that most companies seem to fill first when they’re starting to delegate and grow their team? And how do you recommend companies go about managing that scaling process within the team itself? Yeah. So there’s a great concept called a scorecard. I didn’t create it myself. It was from the gentleman who created HubSpot. They wrote a great book called inbound marketing,

 

and they’re talking about the scorecard inside of there. And the idea of it is like, you know, every day as a CEO, other team members should be reporting on their scorecard to you the 10, 12, 15 most important statistics in that company. So, you know, number of leads generated number of appointments, you know, number of cash collected yesterday.

 

You compare that to last week, whatever it is. So the first thing you have to do before you even talked about scaling a team and making the hires is like, are you systemized? And then once, you know, you’re systemized, if someone was going to take this role, what is the expected KPIs? Where’s this expected goals I would want them to do.

 

And a lot of people’s like, I don’t know, but let’s just say, have you focused solely on email? And you knew that you could send out 300 emails a day and you could probably get five people. That’d be interested in what you’re doing. Then, you know, that’s while you’re still trying to juggle 15 other things at the same time.

 

So if you hire one person to do this, full-time they could probably get eight to 10 leads day. That’s a, probably an average or a conservative number to use. And so then you hire the person who said, Hey, I’m expecting eight to 10 positive responses, leads, booked appointments in my calendar. If you do this every single day, they say,

 

yes, you go great. Then what you’ll do is you’ll try a bunch of things out, LinkedIn, email, Facebook, Instagram, or whatever kind of department that you’re in. Obviously whatever’s relevant to that. And then you’ll see what’s working and you’ll see what’s not working. And a lot of times it’s like one thing is blaring obvious that it’s working.

 

And a lot of other things aren’t. And the biggest mistake, I see people doing whatever their scaling teams is. They keep everyone focused on this like kind of general level where like, everyone’s just doing everything instead of being like, okay, majority of our booked appointments are coming from email, but I keep on trying to do Facebook messages or LinkedIn messages or whatever it is instead of okay,

 

email works. I’m gonna put you full time on email and they’re going to hire another person to do full-time on email as well, but that’s doubling our efforts. So the first thing that I’ll usually say is like, you figure out what’s working through your KPIs and your scorecard. And then you can double down on that as long as it’s something that you want to double down on such as sales or lead generation,

 

right? The typical flow that I see people doing in a business, especially higher ticket service based businesses, which is kind of what our wheelhouse is, is virtual assistants for lead generation is mostly the number one thing that you do then what’ll happen is pretty soon you’ll get so many leads that you literally can’t do. The sales calls. You’re like, you know,

 

dizzy from doing eight to 10 sales calls every single day. So the second hire that we used see is sales. And at this point you have kind of the front end of your business taken care of. You’re waking up, you’re out, you’re having the BA generate leads, a sales person closed deals. And now you have the back end you’ve got to work on.

 

And I know you work with a lot of hyper scalable or you help people become hyper scalable through like courses or kind of intellectual property. Exactly. So then we start working on that. How do we kind of make your offer a little more hyper scalable? So before we even hire somebody, you know, you don’t want to hire someone in to do something that’s inefficient because then you’re just spending money to do something that’s inefficient.

 

So how can we streamline your backend process a little bit more, your offering your coursework, whatever it is, working with one niche. And then you’ll usually hire a virtual assistant of a bill for you or some other specialized person. Then it’s an account manager to handle everything that’s going on. And at this point you’re pretty much just operations, right? You got someone generating leads,

 

you’ve got someone closing leads, you’ve got someone onboarding clients, you got someone delivering for you. And that’s honestly all really low cost because you’re using virtual assistants and commission only salespeople. And then you kind of have room to do the next hire, which is a little more higher level, but just like chief operating officer, essentially, this is the person that is now managing all these people.

 

And they’re the ones that look at the KPIs and everything else. And now you’re pretty much free to do what, like I’m doing. A lot of my other clients are doing which like podcasts and play with ads and do content and grow a YouTube channel and work on your products onto the backend stuff, which is a dream state for me personally, I had to make sure that the whole company is growing and scaling month over month.

 

Right. And, and you’re the only one that can do those things. Nobody else can do those, but you, you know, it’s your genius. And I, and I absolutely love that. And so what we’ve done is a company is, you know, we grow really, we have grown from the top down and I say this the time on this podcast.

 

So my listeners know that I really suck at management. I don’t mean to be, I’m really nice, but I’m just not a great person to work for because I’m super entrepreneur creator, not, you know, not a great systems person, but then Kevin’s, I have those systems people to do that. But you know, we’ve really grown it from that CEO position that,

 

you know, CMO position and then down. But I love this idea. Granted, we started growing 16 years ago, but I love this idea about really filling this in. So are companies that come to us and the people that listen to the show, I mean, everybody knows the power of scaling. They just don’t know how to go about it.

 

And there’s budget different ways. We’ve talked about scaling, you know, scaling your offers, you know, to figuring out your systems, how your, your business model, which is all the stuff that I geek out on this scaling through teams is absolutely seems the first foremost, everything you should be thinking about those you guys who are listening, whether you’re just getting started or you’re just at that tipping point where it’s time to scale.

 

For sure. I want you to process what re what Ravi is saying here, because it’s incredibly important and I totally see this. Okay. So let me ask you some questions here. As I’m getting through to kind of thinking about some questions that our listeners would be asking. So we talked about finding the right people and whether you outsource or, you know,

 

you’re, you’re kind of going through the process of finding them on your own finding the right people is, is a big, heavy lifting job. And so that is something that your company takes care of. And we’ll make sure that our listeners know how to find you this ramping Bible, again, huge project, huge project. And so based on where our listeners are in this love the value of taking your expertise in your template and creating their own from that.

 

And one of the things you said that was really important that I just want to hit on is having our team members find themselves in our mission is a big thing. I know for me personally, we just got back from our 20, 21 planning retreat in Florida. We were in Florida last week. And one of the biggest things for each one of my team members has been like,

 

okay, what is your vision? And how can you find your vision within my company? You know, how is this great for you in addition to being really awesome for me too. And so I love it. That’s something that you guys hit on and there, do you feel like we can do that as well with international teams as we can growing US-based teams?

 

And how do you create that culture within your team? I did not tee you up for this. You did not know I was going to ask this, but how do we create that sort of team culture when your team is spread out all over? So I’m super happy you asked it. And, and it’s funny, cause like culture is kind of like one of those little buzz words that people just say,

 

you know, on an Instagram video or whatever it is. But if you have a team, you understand that like culture is the difference. If like when COVID happens and you’re a business campaign payroll that they’re still working, right? Like that’s a difference in culture. And obviously, luckily we didn’t have that problem because we’re online. But like my brother had that issue cause he had restaurants.

 

And so culture is a difference in like, you know, you not being able to make salary next month, culture difference. And like you having to ask someone to work later when it’s, you know, it’s supposed to be their night out with their girlfriend, whatever it is. And they are like, no problem, I totally get it. And like finding those people,

 

it’s a great book, good to great. By Jim Collins, he talks about, you know, getting them on the bus and it’s like finding those people is super, super important. And to do that, you have to develop the right culture and that really starts with, and I’ll be really honest. I will listen. I was really great at this in the beginning.

 

Then we went from six employees to 36 in a matter of three months. And like, I really lost myself and I lost that kind of culture. Like the address was delegating. Like you didn’t do the culture, you do the culture, whatever it is. And what I’ll tell everyone here is why I brought it back from me and what it was in the beginning was like every 90 days we have performance reviews with our employees and I delegated those out for a little bit time.

 

Cause I was just so busy, but we care about personal financial and professional goals. So we would say, Hey, you know, what’s been going great the past 90 days, what do we need to work on? You know, this is both of us, everyone get the feedback. They can knock the CEO. They want to, I think it says,

 

awesome. Let’s talk about goals here. So in the next 90 days, and then even further and beyond what are your professional personal and financial goals. And so some of our team members it’s, I want to lose weight. So when I go back home from Thanksgiving or I go home for Christmas, you know, I look better or maybe it’s like,

 

I want to be able to buy a house, but my credit is for whatever it is and what you’ll realize. A lot of times it doesn’t have to do with money. Like these are not money goals here just like access to certain things or knowledge or information. And so what you can do as a company is help them reach those goals. If they help you reach your goals.

 

So Hey, if you hit these numbers that we send this many outbound messages. If we get this many books appointments, then I will pay for a credit repair service. So you can start getting your application for your home, whatever it is. And I was doing that really well in the beginning. But then, like I said, I lost touch.

 

And recently, literally about a week ago, right in the middle of the move from California to Florida, I’m doing 36 performance reviews in three days. And I’m just like 12 a day, pretty much. I’m like, Oh my God, I’m going crazy. But in that timeframe, I actually was able to like finally go back down and touch every single person and just like hear how much our company has impacted them.

 

And then like what their future goals are and what, and at the end of every single call, they’re like Ravi, I can’t believe you took the time out of your day to do this call with. And I’m thinking in my head, like, I’m grateful for you. Like, please don’t leave me. Like you’re in the big part of this.

 

I’m not, this is nothing like you’ve done everything up to this point. And so I guess that’s the point of building that culture has to really do with like asking your employees what they want, including overseas virtual assistants. The ones that were the most honest with me were the ones in the Philippines. And they were telling me like, they want to have kids,

 

but it’s a little difficult for them to have kids because of like biological reasons. And so we’re talking about adoption and like all these other things that like the other people, you never would hear anybody in the us or someone else talk about what their employer for multiple reasons. But yeah, it sounds cheesy, but figuring it out, writing down what they want,

 

holding them accountable, I’ve been helping them reach it. If they help you reach your goals on your business, I think is a great way to keep a high performance culture inside of a company, but also have that kind of caring. Like I’ll take care of you. Don’t worry about it. Kind of thing. I love that. Oh my gosh,

 

love that. Appreciate all of that. And all of you sharing and the transparency and just really all about that. And I think that’s as important as everything else we talked about today. All right. So businesses are ready to scale and they need help. How can they find you? Yeah, of course, the easiest way. And then I had told you the beginning of this and I’m sure you can confirm it.

 

I talk very fast and I like breeze over topics that people are like, Ravi. I want to learn more about that. And so what I did is I put together a free course. It’s about five and a half hours of totally free content and overs, like where to find the virtual assistants, what kind of lead generation scripts you should be using,

 

you know, how to kind of build that ramping Bible yourself. And if you want to get access to it, you just go to scaling which isn’t dot com slash sweet dash life. And I know April set, you’ll link it down below, but she actually attaches to the podcast. So that way you guys can make it easier for you to remember,

 

but yeah, scaling with systems.com/sweet-life. And you guys get instant free access to that course. Yeah. Highly, highly recommend in your company, scaling with systems. We’ll make sure that we have links to where people can find you in addition to not only the course, but across social media as well. You thank you so much for your time. Thanks for talking fast.

 

Totally love it. We covered so much information and I know that our listeners got a ton of value out of this, especially those that are really at that place where it’s time to scale. They’re serious about it and they want to do it right. So really appreciate your time on this. Yeah, of course. April was an absolute pleasure. Thanks so much for having me on here.

 

Keep up the great work with all the incredible content and for everyone that’s at home or driving, whatever you’re doing, working out and listening, I do appreciate your guys’ time and I hope you got some value out of it, For sure they did. For sure. All right. Thanks Robbie.<inaudible> What a great show. I appreciate rubby so much for being on here.

 

And I like you when we have these guests in here, I’m taking notes like a crazy woman. If you’ve seen us behind the scenes or if you haven’t yet checked out our YouTube channel and you can actually see the full interview on video with me and Ruby and see me taking notes here through this process. Again, you can find the course, which is an amazing bonus.

 

We have, you know, no, no profit stake in this whatsoever. And Ravi doesn’t either. This is a completely free training that he’s given you simply by visiting scale with systems.com forward slash sweet dash life. And you can get access to this complete training that he has for you learn more about that onboarding Bible, the ramping up Bible, and how to create your own.

 

We are here to make sure you have systems in place to grow and scale your business online faster. And we appreciate you listening to the show. If you haven’t yet, please take a second and leave us a review on Apple or you listen to podcasts and connect with us and follow us at Sweetlife company on LinkedIn. Thanks so much. You guys I’ll talk to you next week.

Episode 204: How To Hire The Perfect Business Coach – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

Episode Bonuses:

26 Business Coach Interview Questions – free download

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for entrepreneurs who are considering hiring a private business consultant and need to be sure their investment is well spent. This is best for businesses in Phases 2-4 of my Start to Scale Up System™. Visit www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz to learn where your company stands. 

Summary:

You know what got you here is not going to get you to the next level. But, hiring a business coach may feel risky. How do you know if you’ll get the results you need? How do you know if you can trust this person? Will their style meet your needs? Are they legit? In this episode you’ll get massive clarity on how how to hire the right business coach for you, what questions to ask a potential coach and how to weed out the rookies coaches for the best.

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. Know if you’re ready to hire a business coach 
  2. Be equipped to ask the right questions when interviewing business coaches
  3. Have a ton of clarity on how to find your perfect fit coach

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi there. And welcome back to the show. I’m April beach, your host and founder of the sweet life company. And we are here to help all of you experts, entrepreneurs, and small business owners scale online,

develop your signature offer and become the undisputed leader. How we do this here on the show and in the suite life company is by providing an experienced, proven business consulting firm over a decade of working with entrepreneurs, just like you and helping you grow and scale your business with online services, programs, digital products and programs on today’s show. We’re talking about how to hire the perfect business coach.

This is episode number 204, and this is what you can expect. First of all, should you tune in, should it hang out here for me, with me for another 20 minutes? So this show is for those of you guys that are considering hiring a private business consultants, but you need to make sure your money is well spent and you want to make sure that you’re going to the next level.

Here’s the deal. You know, that what got you here to this point is not going to be the same strategy, or maybe even the same self-teaching that can get you to the next level in your business. But hiring a business coach can feel really risky, especially now that everybody under the sun is calling themselves a business coach. Most of them who haven’t even built and scaled their own companies.

And so there are some things that you really need to be careful for. You know, if you’re thinking, how am I going to get results? How do I know if I can trust this person? How’s this person’s style going to meet my needs? Is this person really legit in this episode, we’re diving in to give you massive clarity on how you can hire the right person for you and you know,

the right questions to ask, to make sure that potential coach is going to be the one that delivers you, the results that you’re looking for at the end of the show, you’re going to know, first of all, whether or not you actually need or are ready for a private business coach. And you’re going to be equipped with the right questions to ask when interviewing a business coach.

And of course give you a ton of clarity to find that perfect fit coach for you. Along with this show, we have a download for you. They are 26 business coach interview questions, and you can go grab that, download it totally free. Just visit the show notes@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash two zero four. And you can totally grab that it’s a free download and really important questions.

I want to make sure we’re not only giving you the strategies and talking about the important things here on the show, but I’m actually giving you two pages of questions. You can sit down during your interview with the coach and just ask them in, go ahead and make sure that you are getting the results that you’re looking for even in the pre-interview time. So if you’re ready for that,

let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show<inaudible>. So we’re going to break this show up into two parts, cause I want to make sure I’m giving you exactly what you’re looking for in the answers you need. First of all, again, we’re talking about how to hire the perfect business coach for you and the perfect coach for you is different than the perfect coach for me,

everybody is different. And so it’s really important that you have your own strategies to figure out who that perfect fit is going to be for you. The first one we need to do is talk about whether or not you actually need to be investing in a private business coach. And if your company is actually ready for that. And then in the second half of the show,

I’m going to help, you know, the questions to ask, to find the perfect fit coach for you. So let’s go ahead and dive in again. You can grab the download for the 26 interview questions to ask a business coach by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash two, a four, or you can download it instantly with no opt-in when you join our free community,

you can join our community over@sweetlifecommunity.com and all of our podcasts downloads have no opt in there to really give you speed and efficiency. Okay? So here we go. First of all, are you ready for a private business coach? Just because we all want to individual attention doesn’t necessarily mean that your business is at the point where you’re really ready for that level of coaching.

So let’s go ahead and talk about that together and make sure it’s a good investment for you. First things. First, number one, if you feel like you’ve been trying everything on your own, trying a bunch of different things and failing that them, or if you’ve been self-taught with little games, it may be time for a business coach for you. Although here’s the deal.

I am a huge advocate for failing. Failing is part of what makes you smarter and increases your entrepreneur IQ and helps you find confidence in yourself as a business leader. So when it comes to business growth, failing is part of the process, but we also need to help you make money faster and smarter. We don’t want you to failing forever all the way through.

If you’ve tried something on your own, you can’t get through, you can’t push past a barrier or you don’t understand something, or you like me value not recreating the wheel from scratch. Then private business coach is probably what you’re ready for. Number two, instead of being confident and proactive in your business, you’re starting to follow and copy other people’s success.

So maybe you’re confident in the beginning, but now you’re, you’re starting to kind of copy cat what other people are doing. And that’s never a good thing because even though it might look good on the outside for you, somebody else’s business model might seem like it’s perfect, but it doesn’t necessarily mean it’s the right pathway. And it’s going to get you the same results.

So if you find yourself starting to copycat what other people are doing and you’re lost, then certainly a private business strategist is something that’s going to be wise for you to get wisdom. So if you’ve been trying to do this on your own for a long time, you see other influencers and you see other businesses, and you’re trying to duplicate what they’re doing without any strategic wisdom of your own.

And that’s not working. Then it’s time for a private business coach. So really consider hiring a consultant and somebody who will roll up their sleeves with you, dive into your business with you and really hear what your struggles are. Your areas of expertise, how much money you bring to the table. What you’ve already tried. It’s really important that you don’t hire somebody.

That’s just going to teach you things you’ve already done. And this person should help you come up with a customized plan. That’s going to work for you. And here’s some things that I want you to consider. If you’re building a six to seven figure business and it’s not a side hobby, then it’s probably time. If you’ve met the previous criteria, we’ve just talked about to invest in a business coach,

business coaches are worth their weight in gold. They can absolutely change and transform your business. Literally, almost overnight. Now, no, there are no overnight fixes, but your understanding of your plan and your strategy can go from completely murky to very, very clear, almost instantly with the right coach. There’s nothing that feels better than that. Now you still have to go and implement it,

but that Mindshift alone can truly lift a million pounds off your shoulders and give you the clarity and focus you need. Now let’s talk about what you should invest or expect to invest with a business coach. And the first question starts with you. What can you afford? There are a lot of business coaches out there. I’m a said there are a lot of bitches out there.

There are a lot of bitches out there too, but there’s business coaches out there. I’m laughing. Cause I know my producer is going to leave this in here and you can have an hourly rate with a consultant anywhere from $50 an hour, $500 an hour, up to $5,000 an hour and really beyond. I don’t even know who those coaches are, but I know that they exist.

And I’m hoping this podcast episode can help you sort, the great coaches from those that are truly a sham. This is also why I’ve included the 26 questions to ask a business coach, download with this podcast to help you guide your conversations in interviewing a new coach to help make sure you aren’t getting taken to the cleaners. Okay? And so the deal is,

make sure your investment aligns with the money you have projected to make in your business and make sure it aligns with the value of your offers, your courses, your services, your programs, and what you can expect to recuperate what your ROI is. So the reality is is if you’re selling something for $200, it’s hard to recuperate an ROI. If you invest in a business consultant,

that’s going to cost you 30,000. How long is that going to take you? The amount of investment in my opinion should be relative to your ability to recuperate with an ROI. And that really starts with your offer. How valuable is your offer? You might be hiring a business coach to help you develop your offer, but you generally know the value of what you’re going for the target audience that you want to reach.

And so make sure that the value of what you’re selling is going to help you recuperate in a reasonable amount of time, your investment with a business coach. Now, just aside plug, if you need help developing your signature offer or program, or course consider joining my next upcoming masterclass called your signature offer, and you can add your name to the interest list for that by visiting signature offer.com

will really help you build something that’s highly valuable. And I say this because honestly I’ve heard a lot of people who have invested a lot of money to work with coaches and they put everything on the line and they lose their ass. Some of them have quit their jobs. They can’t pay their mortgage. I don’t want to see that anymore. I don’t want to see that heartbreak.

I don’t want to have any more phone calls with entrepreneurs saying I have nothing left. I spent $20,000 on this coach on this mastermind and I have nothing to show for it. I don’t want that to be you. And so be smart about what you’re investing and make sure that you’re working with the coach. That’s going to deliver the results that you’re looking for.

So if you have money to invest in mentorship, I highly recommend that you do it. The ROI is there. As long as you find the right coach, that can get you the results. And so one of the things to look at is how many trainings are you currently sitting on? If you’ve collected a ton of business courses, if you’re sitting on business downloads and listening to tons of podcasts,

you’ve been in a bunch of different masterminds, but you still don’t have any Results then certainly it’s probably time for a private business mentor for you. Although, as I’m saying this out loud and I’m as I’m recording this, I do know that very few coaches offer private one-on-one. So I would start there if you’re feeling already like, gosh, I really want to work with somebody and I want to get close to them.

Definitely start looking for coaches that even have that as an option. Everybody’s so into scale, scale scale, there are very few coaches that will give you their one-on-one time anymore. And frankly, that’s just a shame. And in that process, you want to ask yourself, how close do I want to be to this coach? If it’s important to you to have a personal relationship with the professional relationship,

with a business coach that knows your story, they know your profit plan. You know, you want them to know what’s on the line for you. You want them to know then, you know, you have the names of your kids and where your dream house is going to be located your vision and the purpose for what you’re doing. Then the best place you are going to find that is in a perfect private relationship.

Okay. So here’s your breaking point if you’ve listened to this so far and you’re like, yeah, no, I’m not ready for a private business consultant. I, I still want to DIY that’s great. You can go ahead and stop listening to this podcast now and tune into maybe another sweet life entrepreneurial podcasts that you’ve missed. If you’ve determined that yes,

it’s time for me to invest in a business coach to grow my company more strategically and faster. Now let’s talk more about how to find the right coach for you. So Denise Duffield-Thomas was on the show a few years ago, actually she’s a money mindset, coach and author of the book, chill preneur. She was a guest here back in 2018 and she wrote a great article a few years back.

And I just want to reference this article because I think it’s really important as we dive into this. I also want to make sure I’m operating and recording this podcast with integrity and ethics because I am a business coach. So I want to make sure I’m bringing you outside expertise and resources. In addition to what I’m delivering you here on the show to help you find a business coach.

And that it’s just not all coming from me. So it’s not me saying, Hey, you know, here’s the questions you should ask a business coach, but there are so many different, great coaches out there and that’s really the truth. And so I want to make sure that I’m giving you enough resources. You can ask wise questions during your interview process.

So I’m referencing Denise’s article here and I’m going to talk about some of the things that she brought up in this article, as well as the strategies that I’m giving you here on this show. So a few points that she brought up and they are very, very valid. The first question to ask yourself is where are you at right now in your business?

Take a really good look at the current plain field. What does it look like right now in your marketplace? What does money look like for you? What is your money look like right now? How clear are you and what you want to build? How clear are you and where you want to go? What do your services look like? Or what do you want them to look like in what’s happening right now and have just a real serious come to Jesus with yourself and just say,

this is where I am right now in my business. I’m not clear on this, or I’m not sure about this, right? I don’t know what decision I want to make about something. Just get really clear and understand where you are right now. This is before you ever get on the phone with a potential coach, this is what you should be doing throughout the process as you’re looking for a coach.

So the first question is really to take a personal inventory after you’ve identified where you are and say, okay, where do I want to go next? What does that look like to me financially? What does it look like? As far as what impact I want to have on a market or on a niche? What does it look like in my business model?

Generally? What type of business model am I looking to build and what sort of marketing and PR do I want to bring in and tap into my business first, take that personal inventory of figuring out where you are and then get really specific on the results that you’re looking for from a business coach, the results you’re looking to achieve in your busin